SZ Series: User's Manual

 

96123E

Safety Laser Scanner

SZ Series

Ver.2

User's Manual Read this manual before using the system in order to achieve maximum performance. Always keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

 

Introduction This user's manual describes handling, operation, and precautionary information for the SZ Series Safety Laser Scanner ("SZ"). Read this user's manual thoroughly before operating the SZ in order to understand the device features, and keep this user's manual readily available for reference. Ensure that the end user of this product receives this user's manual.

Safety headings This user's manual uses the following headings to display important safety information. Strict adherence to the instructions next to these heading is required at all times.

Danger

Caution

Note

Reference

Failure to follow the the instruction results in significant harm to the machine operators including serious injury or death.

Failure to follow the instruction may result in damage to the SZ or to the machine on which the SZ is installed.

Provides additional information for proper operation.

Provides advanced and useful information for operation. Indicates reference pages in this manual.

 

Safety precautions General precautions • SZ is an active op opto-electronic to-electronic protective device responsive responsive to diffuse rreflection eflection (AOPDDR). It is a device, whose sensing function is performed per formed by opto-electronic emitting and receiving elements, that detects the diffuse reflection of optical radiations generated within the device by an object present in a protection zone specified in two dimensions. • You must verify that the SZ is operating correctly in terms of functionality and performance before the start of machine and the operation of the SZ. • KEYENCE d does oes not guarantee the function or performance of the SZ if it is used in a manner that differs differs from the SZ specifications contained in this user's manual or if the SZ is modified by the customer. • When using the SZ to protect machine operators against against a hazard or hazardous hazardous zone or when using the SZ as a safety component for any purpose, always follow the applicable requirements of the laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or region where the SZ is used. For such regulations, you should directly contact the regulatory agency a gency responsible for occupational safety and health in your country or region. • Depending on the type of machine on which the SZ is to be installed, there there may be special safety regulations related to the use, installation, maintenance, and operation of the safety component. In such a case, you must fulfill such safety regulations. regulations. The responsible personnel must install the SZ in strict compliance with such safety regulations. • The responsible personnel m must ust do the training to the assig assigned ned personnel for the correct use, installation, maintenance, and operation of the SZ. • "Machine operators" refers to personnel who have received approp appropriate riate training from the responsible personnel and are qualified to operate the machine correctly. correctly. Machine operators must have specialized training for the SZ, and they must understand and fulfill the safety regulations in the country or region in which they are using the SZ. • If the SZ fails to operate, machine operators m must ust immediately stop the use of the machine and the SZ and report this fact to the th e responsible personnel. • The SZ is desig designed ned with the assumption that it would be correctly correctly installed in accordance with with the installation procedures described in this user's manual and correctly operated according to the instructions in this user's manual. You must perform an appropriate installation of the SZ after performing a sufficient risk assessment for the target machine. • The SZ should be processed as an industrial industrial waste product when being being disposed.

SZ-M-NO0-E

96123E

1

 

Warning  

Operators

Danger

•

•

•

 

Usage environment

Danger

•

• •

•

•

•

•

 

Do not use the SZ in an environment (temperature, humidity humidity,, interfering light, etc.) that does not conform to the specifications contained in this user's manual. Do not use wireless devices such as cellular phones or transceivers in the vicinity of the SZ. The SZ is not designed to be explosion-proof. Never use it in the presence of flammable or explosive gases or elements. Do not use the SZ in the presence of substances, such as heavy smoke, particulate matter, or corrosive thatno may induce deterioration in inverter-type product quality. Install the SZchemical in such a agents, way so that direct or indirect light from fluorescent light lightss (rapid-start type lights, high-frequency operation type lights, etc.) enters the optical window window.. Be sure to absolutely confirm that there is nobody in the hazardous zone, before the interlock is released (i.e. the machine system restarts) by the interlock reset mechanism. Failure to follow this warning may result in a significant harm har m to the machine operators, including serious injury or death. Be sure to confirm that there is nobody in the hazardous zone, before the override is activated. Failure to follow this warning may result in a significant harm har m to the machine operators, including serious injury or death.

Target machine

Danger

•

•

• •

•

•

2

In order to operate the SZ correctly correctly,, the responsible personnel and machine operators must fulfill all of the procedures described in this user's manual. No person other than the responsible personnel and machine operators should be allowed to install or test the SZ. When performing electrical wiring, always fulfill the electrical standards and regulations for the country or region in which the SZ is used.

The SZ has not undergone the model certification examination examination in accordance with Article 44-2 of the Japanese Industrial Safety and Health Law. The SZ, therefore, cannot be used in Japan as a "Safety Device for Press and Shearing machines" as established in Article 42 of that law. The machine on which the SZ is to be installed must be susceptible to an emergency stop at all operating points during its operation cycle. Do not use the SZ for machines with irregular stop times. Do not use the SZ for power presses equipped with full-revolution clutches. The SZ cannot be used as a PSDI because it does not fulfill the requirements of OSHA 1910.217(h). Refer to OSHA 1910.217 for the PSDI mode. Do not use the SZ to control (stop forward motion, etc.) trains, cars and other transportation vehicles, aircraft, equipment for use in space, medical devices, or nuclear power generation systems. The SZ is designed to protect the people or objects approaching into the specified protection  zone against a machine's hazard or hazardous zone. It cannot provide a protection against objects or materials that are expelled from the machine’s hazard or hazardous zone, so you must establish additional safety measures such as installing safeguards when there is the possibility of such projectiles.

SZ-M-NO0-E

 

 

Installation

Danger

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

SZ-M-NO0-E

SZ must be installed in such a way that the screws do not loose due to vibration and/or shock. The screw loosen may cause the displacement of detection plane and SZ can not make a protection as intended. Failure to follow this warning may result in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death. The installation of the SZ must ensure the required safety distance in compliance with the requirements of laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or region in which the SZ is installed. When changing the minimum detectable object size and response time for SZ, the minimum safety distance must be recalculated, and the SZ must be reinstalled based on the result of recalculation to keep the required minimum safety distance.. The SZ must be installed so that the machine operator is able to go into or approach the hazardous zone or hazards only by passing through the protection zone of the SZ. Strictly avoid installation that allows the machine operator or a part par t of the machine operator's body to go into or approach the hazardous zone or hazards without passing through the protection zone of the SZ or to remain in a position between the protection zone of the SZ and the hazardous zone or hazard. You must always perform the pre-check tests after installing the SZ in accordance with the pre-check test procedures, such as the item specified in this user's manual, in order to verify that the test pieces can be detected in all of the protection zones. The interlock reset mechanisms (such as switches) must be installed so that the whole hazardous zone can be checked by the responsible personnel and that operations of the interlock reset mechanisms are not possible within the hazardous zone. Reference points monitoring function must be applied when the SZ is used for the access protection specified in IEC61496-3: 2008 Anne Annex x A.12 and A.13 (the application where the angle of the approach exceeds ±30° to the detection plane). The SZ-16V and the SZ-16D cannot be used for this application because they do not have the reference points monitoring function. The muting is a function to allow a temporary automatic suspension of the safety function while the SZ receives a signal from one or more muting devices (such as sensors or switches). Therefore, Therefore, additional safety measures are required for the whole machine on which the SZ is installed in order to ensure safety while the muting is activated. The muting devices, the installation of those devices and the procedure to activate the muting must fulfill the conditions specified in this user's manual and the requirements of the laws, rules, regulations, and standards in the country or region in which the SZ and those devices are used. Failure to follow this warning may result in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death. When you install the muting devices (such as sensors or switches), the following conditions must be fulfilled. (1) Muting devices must must be installed so that the muting cannot be activated activated if the ha hazard zard is still existing during machine cycle. (2) Muting devices must must be installed so that the muting cannot be activated if someone approaches into the protection zone of the SZ. The muting device must be installed such that only responsible personnel have access to that device to change its installation or orientation. Special tools must be required to ensure that only responsible personnel are capable of installation, orientation or change of muting device. Only the responsible personnel may be allowed to install in stall or wire the devices to activate the muting function, suspension in teaching mode, or override function. The installation of muting lamp may be required by the llaws, aws, rules, regulations, and standards in the country or region in which the SZ is used. It depends on the machine application or the result of your risk assessment. If it is i s necessary for you to provide the muting lamp, you must fulfill the requirements because you are fully responsible for installing the muting lamp. (Precautions on the suspension in teaching mode)

3

 

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

4

The suspension in teaching mode is a function to allow a temporary manual suspension of the safety function. Therefore, additional safety measures are required for the whole machine system on which the SZ is installed in order to ensure safety while the suspension in teaching mode is activated. The installation of the indication for the suspension in teaching mode may be required by the laws, rules, regulations, and standards in the country or region in which the SZ is used. It depends on the machine application or the result of your risk assessment. If it is necessary for you to provide such an indication, you must fulfill the requirements because you are fully responsible for installing such an indication. The override is a function to allow a temporary manual suspension of the SZ safety functions. Therefore, additional safety measures are required for the whole machine system on which the SZ is installed in order to ensure safety while the override is activated. The override devices, the installation of those devices, d evices, and the procedures to activate the override must fulfill the conditions specified in this user's manual as well as the requirements of the laws, rules, regulations, and standards in the country or region in which the SZ and those devices are used. Failure to follow this warning may result in significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury injur y or death. The override devices, which are used for activation of override, must be manual operating devices. When installing the devices to activate the override (override device), those devices must be installed so that the whole hazardous zone can be checked by responsible personnel and so that it is not possible possi ble for the device operators to operate those device in the hazardous zone. The installation of the indication for override may be required by the laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or region where the SZ is used. It depends on the machine application or the result of your risk assessment. If it is necessary for you to provide the indication for override, you must fulfill the requirements because you are fully responsible for installing the indication for override. The customer is fully responsible for complying with the requirements for the muting, suspension in teaching mode, and the override. KEYENCE accepts NO responsibility or NO liability for any damage or any injury due to the unauthorized installation, usage, or maintenance, which are not specified in this user's manual, and/or due to noncompliance with the laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or region in which the SZ is used. Securely tighten mounting brackets and cable connectors used for the installation of the SZ in accordance with the torque values specified in this user's manual. Do not put the additional housing, such as glass covers or clear polymeric covers, in front of the window of the SZ. This may lead to the loss of the detection capability of the SZ. Do not put the SZ into additional housing for any purpose. This may lead to the loss of the detection capability of the SZ.

SZ-M-NO0-E

 

 

Circuit design and wiring

Danger

• •

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

SZ-M-NO0-E

Always turn off the power to the SZ when performing electrical wiring. You must fulfill the electrical standards and regulations in the country or region in which the SZ is being used when you perform the electrical wiring. To avoid the risk of electric shock, do not connect any of the SZ inputs to DC p power ower sources outside of the range of 24 V DC +20% or to any AC power source. To avoid the risk of electric shock, the hazardous voltage must be isolated from all wiring of the SZ with the reinforced insulation or double insulation. If the power supply for the SZ is the converting type, the power supply for the SZ must meet the conditions listed below in order to meet the requirements specified in IEC61496-1, UL61496-1, and EN61496-1. (a) A rated output voltage voltage of 24 V D DC C (SEL (SELV V circuit, Ov Overvoltage ervoltage Category II) within ±10%. (b) Double insulation or reinf reinforced orced insulation between the primary and secondary circuits. (c) Outpu Outputt holding holding ttime ime of 20 ms or mo more. re. (d) A power supply supply must meet the requir requirements ements of the electrical electrical safety and electromag electromagnetic netic compatibility (EMC) regulations or standards in all countries and/or regions where the SZ is used. Do not install the electric wiring of the SZ together with or in parallel with the high-voltage electrical or power lines. For the wiring between SZ and a safety-related machine control system, both OSSD 1 and OSSD 2 must be always wired to a safety-related machine control system in order to ensure the safety. Similarly, both OSSD 3 and OSSD 4 must be always wired to a safety-related control system if you assign a function for OSSD 3/4. If one OSSD is only wired to a safetyrelated machine control system, it results in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death, due to OSSD mulfunction. When using PNP output type cable, do not cause short-circuit between the OSSD and +24 V. Otherwise, OSSDs keep staying at the ON-state and it causes a dangerous situation. When using PNP output type cable, be sure to connect the load between the OSSD and 0 V to avoid a dangerous situation. If the load is incorrectly connected between the OSSD and +24 V, V, the logic of OSSD operation will be reversed, and then OSSD will turn tur n to the ON-state when the SZ detects an object in the specified protection zone. This is a dangerous situation. When using NPN output type cable, do not cause ca use short-circuit between the OSSD and 0 V. Otherwise, OSSDs keep staying at the ON-state and it causes a dangerous situation. When using NPN output type cable, be sure to connect the load between the OSSD and + 24 V to avoid dangerous situation. If the load is incorrectly connected between the OSSD and 0 V, V, the logic of OSSD operation will be reversed, and then OSSD will turn tur n to the ONstate when the SZ detects an object in the specified protection zone. This is a dangerous situation. In case of wiring, regardless of PNP output type cable and NPN output type cable, you must fulfill the requirements of Clause 9.4.3 in IEC60204-1: 2005 in order for the protection against maloperation due to earth fault. The AUX output is not allowed to be used as a safety output for safety-related control systems. Usage of these functions as safety output may result in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death. The check input is not allowed to be connected to the safety output provided from the safety-related control system. If the check input is connected to the safety output, it may result in significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury injur y or death. The connector cable must have have a length less than or equal to the specification in this user's manual. Usage of connector cables longer than the specified length may cause the improper operation of safety functions and may cause a dangerous situation.

5

 

Testing Te sting and maintenance • You must always perform the pre-check test in accordance with the pr pre-check e-check test procedures, after maintenance, adjustment or alignment of the target machine or o r the SZ and before the machine startup. star tup. • If the SZ d does oes not operate properly properly when you perform pre-check test in accordance with the pre-check test procedures specified in this user's manual, do not operate the machine. • You must periodically examine the machine to verify that all b brakes, rakes, other stop mechanisms, and control devices operate reliably and correctly in addition to checking the SZ. • The responsible personnel must perform maintenance proced procedures ures as specified in this user's manual at least once every six months to ensure safety to the machine and SZ.

Standards and regulations 1 SZ is a "safety component" component" defin defined ed in the EU Machinery Directive Directive (2006/42/E (2006/42/EC) C) Annex V. V. SZ complies complies with the following EU Directives and EN Standards, and has been certified by TÜV SÜD Product SerService GmbH. EU Directives

• Machinery Machinery Directive Directive (2006/42/E (2006/42/EC) C) • EMC Directi Directive ve (2004/108/EC (2004/108/EC)) EN Standards

• • • • • • • •

EN61496-1 EN61496-3 EN61508 EN EN62061 EN EN ISO1 ISO138 3849 49-1 -1 EN5501 EN55011 1 EN60 EN60204 204-1 -1 EN60825-1

Type 3 ESPE Type 3 AOPDDR SIL2 SIL2 Cate Catego gory ry 3, 3, P PLd Ld Class Class A Class 1 Laser Product

2 SZ complies complies with the followi following ng North American American standards standards and and regulations, regulations, and has has received received UL certification and C-UL certification (CCN: NIPM/NIPM7). • IEC61496-1 Type 3 ESPE • IEC61496-3 Type 3 AOPDDR • UL50 UL508 8 • UL19 UL1998 98 • CDRH Part 1040.10 (Laser Notice No. 50: 2007/06/24), Class 1 Laser Product • CAN/CSA CAN/CSA 22.2 No14-05 No14-05 3 SZ also also complies complies with with the followi following ng North American American regulatio regulations. ns. • FCC Part 15 Subpart Subpart B, Class Class A Digital Device Device • ICES-003, ICES-003, Class Class A Digital Apparatus Apparatus 4 The SZ has not undergon undergone e the model certificati certification on examination examination in accordanc accordance e with Article Article 44-2 of the Japanese Industrial Safety and Health Law. Therefore, the SZ cannot be used in Japan as a "Safety Devices for Presses and Shearing Machines" as established in Article 42 of that law. la w.

6

SZ-M-NO0-E

 

5 The SZ has been been designed designed in consideration consideration of the following following standar standards ds and regulati regulations. ons. For details details regarding the following standards, contact the third-party certification organization, such as UL or TÜV. Corresponding standards

• • • •

OSHA OSHA 29 CFR 1910. 1910.212 212 OSHA OSHA 29 CFR 1910. 1910.217 217 ANSI ANSI B11.1 B11.1 - B.11.19 B.11.19 ANSI/RIA ANSI/RIA R15.06 - 1999

• SEMI SEM I S2-07 S2-0706 06 Ministry of Health, Labor and Welfare Welfare in Japan "Guidelines ffor or Comprehensive Safety Standards Standards of Machinery" (July 31, 2007, Notice No. 0731001)

SZ-M-NO0-E

7

 

Terms of License Agreement on Use of tthe he Software  

Software License Agreement NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE [Safety Device Configurator, GL-R Configurator, SL-V Configurator, SZ Configurator, SZ-V Configurator] (THIS “SOFTWARE”), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. Definition 1.1 “use” or “using” means to access, install, download, cop copy y or otherwise benefit from using the functionality of this Software. 1.2 “This Software” means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE. KEYENCE. 2. Grant of License. Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to install this Software on all computers used by your entity in order to use the KEYENCE product. You may make one copy of this Software for backup or archive purposes only. only. 3. Restrictions. 3.1 Except for installation of updates or new new functions provided by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, you may may not modify modify or add any function to this Software. 3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble tthis his Software. 3.3 You may not create create derivative derivative works based based on this Software. Software. 3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, retransfer, rent or otherwise redistribute this Software to any third parties. 4. Intellectual Property Rights Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and interest in this Software, and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and other intellectual property rights therein. 5. Disclaimer. Keyence is licensing this Software to you “AS IS” and without any warranty of any kind. In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for any damages, claims, costs or any lost profits caused by using this Software. 6. Termination. 6.1 Your license under this Agreement Agreement will terminate automatically if you you destroy this S Software oftware and the copy of this Software in your possession or voluntarily return re turn this Software to us. 6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any any notice from KEYENCE KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Promptly upon termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of this Software in your possession or control. 6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits profits caused by your violation or breach of any any term of this Agreement. 7. Governing Law. 7.1 This Agreement will be governed governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of Japan Japan without regards to the principles pr inciples of conflicts of law. 7.2 If any part of this Agreement is found found void and unenforceable, unenforceable, it will not affect affect the val validity idity of the balance of this Agreement, which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and conditions.

 

Trademarks • Windows XP/7/8/8.1/10 ar are e the rregistered egistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, U.S.A. U.S.A. • Adobe, the Adobe logo, and Reader are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe System Incorporated in the United States and other countries. • Other company or pr product oduct names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. The following marks are not used in this manual: TM, ®.

8

SZ-M-NO0-E

 

Table o off contents contents Introduction Safety headings

Safety precautions ................................................................................................................ 1 General precautions ...................................................... ........................................................................................................................ .................................................................. 1 Warning .............................................................. ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. ........ 2 Testing and maintenance ................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................ 6 Standards and regulations ........................................................ .............................................................................................................. ...................................................... 6

Terms of License Agreement Agreement on Use of the Softwar Software e ....................................................... 8 Table of contents................................................................................................................... 9

 Chapter 1 Before Use 1-1

Overview Overview of applicatio applications ns ............. ................... ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ...... 1-2 Application for stationary installation ......................................................... ........................................................................................... .................................. 1-2 Application for movable installation .......................................................................... ............................................................................................. ................... 1-4

1-2

Checking Checking the packag package e contents...... contents............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ....... 1-5

1-3

Options........ Options............... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ............ ...... 1-6 Connector cable...................................................................................... cable........................................................................................................................... ..................................... 1-6 Mounting bracket ............................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................................... ............. 1-7 Other........................................................................................................................................ Other................................................................. ............................................................................ ..... 1-9

1-4

Part descriptio description n ............ ................... ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ...... 1-10

 Chapter 2 Functions and Features 2-1

Functions Functions and features......... features............... ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ...... 2-2

2-2

Informati Information on display display and in indicato dicators.......... rs................ ............. ............. ............. .............. .............. ............. ............. ............. .......... .... 2-4 Information display ................................................................ ....................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 2-4 Indicator .......................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... ............................. 2-4

2-3

Protection zone ....................................................................................................... ............................................................................... ........................ 2-6

2-4

Warning Warning zone ........................................................................................................... ................................................................................ ........................... 2-8

2-5

OSSD ...................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................ ...................... 2-10

2-6

Response Response ttime ime an and d scan cycle cycle .............. .................... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .......... .... 2-11 Scan cycle and available response time ................................................................................... ................................................................................... 2-11

2-7

Interlock ............................................................................................... ................................................................................................................. .................. 2-12 Start/restart mode....................................................................................................... mode....................................................................................................................... ................ 2-12 Restart Delay (ON-delay) ................................................................................... ........................................................................................................... ........................ 2-15

2-8

External External device device mon monitori itoring ng function function ((EDM).... EDM)........... ............. ............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ............ ..... 2-16

2-9

Reference points monitoring function ................................................................ 2-17 Examples of applications for detection for area protection ....................................................... ....................................................... 2-17 Examples of applications for detection detection for access protection ................................................... 2-17

2-10 Multi-OSSD function ....................................................................... ............................................................................................. ...................... 2-18 2-11 Bank switching function ........................................................................... ....................................................................................... ............ 2-20

SZ-M-NO0-E

9

 

In case of SZ-04M ...................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................... 2-20 In case of SZ-16V and SZ-16D................................................................................... SZ-16D................................................................................................... ................ 2-23 Bank sequence monitoring ....................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................... 2-26 Laser Shutdown...................................................................................................... Shutdown.......................................................................................................................... .................... 2-26

2-12 Temporary emporary suspe suspensio nsion n of safety function function ............. ................... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ...... 2-27 Muting function................................................................................................ function........................................................................................................................... ........................... 2-27 Suspension in teaching teaching mode.................................................................................................... mode.................................................................................................... 2-30 Override function........................................................................................................ function........................................................................................................................ ................ 2-32

2-13 AUX AUX (auxil (auxiliary) iary) output output ............. ................... ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ........ 2-35 Overview of the AUX output .................................................................... ....................................................................................................... ................................... 2-35 Error output ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................ 2-36 Alert output ..................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................ ........................... 2-36 Error or alert output ................................................................ ................................................................................................................... ................................................... 2-37 OSSD state output ............................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................... ........................ 2-37 Output for detection in protection protection zone ..................................................................................... ..................................................................................... 2-38 Output for detection in the warning zone ............................................................... .................................................................................. ................... 2-38 Interlock-reset-ready output ....................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................... 2-39 Muted or override condition output output ......................................................... ............................................................................................ ................................... 2-39 Muting lamp output ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................... 2-40 State Information Output ........................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................... 2-41

2-14 Check Check inpu inputt function function ............ ................... ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. .......... .... 2-43 Laser shutdown .......................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................... 2-43 Check point monitoring .............................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................. 2-44

2-15 Monitorin Monitoring g function function ............. ................... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. .............. .......... ... 2-45 2-16 RS-422A RS-422A Commu Communicatio nication n Function Function ...... ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............ ..... 2-46

 Chapter 3 Installation to a Machine 3-1

Preca Precaution ution at install installation... ation......... ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ........ .. 3-2

3-2

Hint on installation.......... installation................. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .......... .... 3-3 Light interference ......................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................... 3-3 Mutual interference............................................................................................ interference....................................................................................................................... ........................... 3-3 High reflective reflective background background................................................................ .......................................................................................................... .......................................... 3-5 Zone with limited detection capability.......................................................................................... 3-6 Other........................................................................................................................................ Other................................................................. ............................................................................ ..... 3-6

3-3

Safety distances distances ............. ................... ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ........ 3-7 Example of area protection (Direction of approach parallel to the protection zone) ................... 3-7 Example of access protection 1 (Direction of approach normal to the protection zone)............. 3-9 Example of access protection 2 (In case of approaching of the body or parts par ts of the body to the hazardous area) ............................................................... ......................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 3-10 Example of installing to an AGV (automated (automated guided vehicle).................................................... 3-11

3-4

Moun Mounting ting for instal installation lation ............. .................... ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ............. ......... 3-13 Wall mounting........................................................... mounting ............................................................................................................................. .................................................................. 3-13 Mounting with horizontal horizontal mounting bracket (OP-86935)............................................................ 3-13 Mounting with vertical mounting bracket (OP-86936)................................................................ 3-14 Mounting with horizontal mounting bracket with angle alignment (OP-86937).......................... 3-14 Mounting with vertical mounting bracket with angle alignment (OP-86938).............................. 3-15 Mounting with L-shaped L-shaped mounting bracket with angle alignment (OP-86939).......................... 3-15

10

SZ-M-NO0-E

 

 Chapter 4 Wiring 4-1

Preca Precaution utions s on on wirin wiring........... g.................. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. .............. ............. ............. ............. .......... .... 4-2

4-2

Po Power wer supply supply ...... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ........... ..... 4-3

4-3

Mou Mounting nting the connector connector cable ...... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......... .. 4-4

4-4

Wire color color an and d assigned assigned funct function.... ion........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............ ..... 4-5 SZ-01S.......................................................................................................................................... 4-5 SZ-01S.......................................................................................................................................... SZ-04M ........................................................ ......................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. ................ 4-5 SZ-16V/SZ-16D............................................................................................................................. SZ-16V/SZ-16D................................................................................... .......................................... 4-8

4-5

Examp Examples les of of wiring... wiring.......... ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ........... ..... 4-9 SZ-01S.......................................................................................................................................... 4-9 SZ-01S.......................................................................................................................................... SZ-04M ........................................................ ......................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... .............. 4-10 SZ-16V/SZ-16D........................................................................................................................... SZ-16V/SZ-16D................................................................................... ........................................ 4-18

4-6

Inpu Inputt / outpu outputt circuit..... circuit........... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............ ..... 4-20

 Chapter 5 Manual Co Configuration nfiguration on the SZ 5-1 5-2

For chan changing ging the factory factory default default (P (Passw assword ord inpu input)...... t)............ ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ........ .. 5-2 Manu Manual al confi configura guration tion for SZ-01 SZ-01S S and and SZ-04M SZ-04M ............. .................... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......... ... 5-4 Preparation for configuration (Common procedure) ......................................................... .................................................................... ........... 5-4 Configuration and confirmation of safety-related functions .................................................... ......................................................... ..... 5-5 Configuration of Non-safety Non-safety Function................................................................................ Function......................................................................................... ......... 5-12 Configuration of Others .............................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................. 5-17 Reconfirmation Procedure.......................................................................... Procedure.......................................................................................................... ................................ 5-19

5-3

Manu Manual al confi configura guration tion for SZ-16V SZ-16V ............. .................... ............. ............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ............. ...... 5-20

5-4

Mon Monitori itoring......... ng................ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. .............. .......... ... 5-23 Preparation for monitoring (Common procedure) ................................................................ ...................................................................... ...... 5-23 I/O monitoring.......................................................................................................... monitoring............................................................................................................................. ................... 5-24 Wiring confirmation .................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................... 5-25 Protection zone monitoring...................................................................................... monitoring......................................................................................................... ................... 5-29 Warning zone monitoring ..................................................... ........................................................................................................... ...................................................... 5-30 OSSD OFF History...................................................................................................................... History...................................................................................................................... 5-31 Contrast settings (SZ-16D).............................................................................. (SZ-16D)......................................................................................................... ........................... 5-32

 Chapter 6 Configuration through the configuration configuration software software 6-1

Befo Before re using SZ configur configuration......... ation............... ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............ ..... 6-2 About the configuration software ................................................................................................. ................................................................................................. 6-2 System Environment..................................................................................................................... Environment..................................................................................................................... 6-2 SZ-16D Settings ........................................................................ ........................................................................................................................... ................................................... 6-3 Installing the configuration software.......................................................................... software............................................................................................. ................... 6-3 Starting and Exiting SZ Configurator............................................................................... Configurator............................................................................................ ............. 6-5 Connecting the SZ Series to the PC............................................................................................. 6-8

SZ-M-NO0-E

6-2

Part names names and funct functions ions ....... ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ............. ......... .. 6-9

6-3

Confi Configur guration ation tab ............ ................... ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......... ... 6-11

11

 

Property .............................................................. ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ ... 6-11 Safety 1............................................................................................................ 1....................................................................................................................................... ........................... 6-12 Safety 2............................................................................................................ 2....................................................................................................................................... ........................... 6-14 Non Safety-related Functions ..................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................... 6-23 Zone .......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ................. 6-25 Transfer....................................................................................................................................... ransfer....................................................................................................................................... 6-30

6-4

Mon Monitori itoring ng tab ...... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ...... 6-33 Background Hold ....................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... 6-34

6-5

Oper Operation ation menu............. menu................... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ........... ..... 6-35 File(F)............................................................................. File(F).......................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 6-35 Edit(E).......................................................... Edit(E) ........................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... .............. 6-37 View(V) ........................................................ ....................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... ................ 6-43 Image on canvas(I) .................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................... 6-48 Monitoring tools(M).................................................................................. tools(M)..................................................................................................................... ................................... 6-50 Communication(C) ........................................................ ..................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 6-54 Log-in authentication(A)................................................... authentication(A) ............................................................................................................. .......................................................... 6-56 Language(L)............................................................................................................................... Language(L)............................................................................................................................... 6-57 Help(H) ............................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ .... 6-58

 Chapter 7 Inspection and Maintenance Maintenance 7-1

Inspe Inspection ction ....... ............. ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ......... ... 7-2

7-2

Initia Initiall inspectio inspection n ...... ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ...... 7-3

7-3

Daily inspection....... inspection.............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ...... 7-6

7-4

Regu Regular lar (periodica (periodical) l) inspection. inspection........ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ...... 7-8

7-5

Cleani Cleaning ng the window.... window........... ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ........ 7-9

 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 8-1

Self-d Self-diagn iagnosis.......... osis................ ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ......... 8-2 Error state ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... 8-2

8-2

Alert state ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... 8-4 Trou roublesh bleshootin ooting g ............. ................... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ....... 8-5 Indication on information display ................................................................................................. ................................................................................................. 8-5 Troubleshooting on the OSSD operation.................................................................................... 8-11 Troubleshooting concerning USB connection............................................................................ connection............................................................................ 8-12

 Chapter 9 Specifications and Dimensions Dimensions 9-1

Mod Model el ............ ................... .............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............ ...... 9-2

9-2

Speci Specificatio fications ns ...... ............ ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............ ............. ............. ............. ............. ........... ..... 9-3

9-3

Dimen Dimensions........... sions................. ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. .............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ........ .. 9-5 SZ main unit............................................................................................................... unit.............................................. .................................................................................... ................... 9-7 9-5 When using the mounting mounting bracket ............................................................................................... .................................................... ...........................................

12

SZ-M-NO0-E

 

1 Before Use

SZ-M-NO1-E

1-1 1-2

Overvi Overview ew of of appli applicat cation ions s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Checki Checking ng tthe he p pack ackage age conten contents. ts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

11-3 3

Opti Option ons s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 1-6

1-4

Part Part des descrip criptio tion n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 1-10

1-1

 

1-1 1

Overview of applications

The applications introduced in this chapter should be considered just references. The customer (user) is fully responsible for performing the risk assessment, taking into account acco unt the machie application, and for using the SZ appropriately based on that result.

B  e f    o r   e  U  s  e

Application for stationary installation  

Protection against hazardous area (Area protection: Horizontal detection plane) (SZ-01S, SZ-04M, SZ-16V, SZ-16D) If the SZ detects an object in the specified protection zone, OSSD goes to the OFF-state to stop the machine hazard. If the SZ detects an object in the specified warning zone, the war warning ning information for the person approaching into the protection zone can be provided by the SZ before stopping the hazard.

SZ Protection zone

Warning zone

1-2

SZ-M-NO1-E

 

1-1

 

Overview of applications

One SZ can provide the protection against two different hazards (Area protection: Horizontal detection plane) (SZ-04M) You can specifty two protection zones: protection zone A and protection zone B. Both OSSD1 and OSSD2 go to the OFF-state if the th e SZ detects an object in the protection zone A, and then only h hazard azard A will be stopped. On the other hand, both OSSD3 and OSSD4 go to the OFF-state if the SZ detects an object in the protection zone B, and then t hen only hazard B will be stopped. For the war warning ning zone, you can also specify two warning zones as well as protection zone. Hazard B Hazard A

Protection zone A (OSSD1/2) SZ

Protection zone B (OSSD3/4)

Warning zone B

Warning zone A  

Protection against the approaching to the hazardous area (Access protection: Vertical detection plane) (SZ-01S, SZ-04M) If the SZ detects someone passing through the specified protection zone, zo ne, OSSD goes to the OFF-state to to stop the machine hazard. However, However, the SZ has no chance to detect the person in hazardous area after passing through that zone. "2-9 Reference points monitoring function" (page 2-17) 2-17)..

Protection zone SZ

Reference point (Six points are set in this figure)

SZ-M-NO1-E

1-3

1 B  e f    o r   e  U  s  e

 

1-1

1 B  e f    o r   e  U  s  e

Overview of applications

Application for movable installation  

Mounting on the AGV (automated guided vehicle) (SZ-04M, SZ-16V, SZ-16D) If the SZ detects on object, such as operator, operator, in the specified protection zone, OSSD goes to the OFFstate to stop the AGV. AGV. The SZ can monitor whether there is an object in the specified protection zone through switching between the several protection zones based on the external signal.

SZ

Bank 1 protection zone Bank 1 warning zone 1

1-4

SZ-M-NO1-E

 

1-2  Checking the package contents 1 SZ x 1

SZ-M-NO1-E

B  e f    o r   e  U  s  e

Instruction manual (English) x 1 Instruction manual ((Japanese) Japanese) x 1 Instruction manual manual (Chinese) x 1 Label for setting cover x1 (except the SZ-16D)

1-5

 

1-3  Options 1

Connector cable

B  e f    o r   e  U  s  e

There are two types of cables: the connector cable for SZ-01S (8-wire cable) and the connector cable for SZ-04M/SZ-16V/SZ-16D (18-wire cable). You You can select the connector cable according to the model of of "Chapter 2 Functions and Features" (page 2-1) 2-1).. For the SZ. For more information on the model of SZ, see the information about connecting the connector cable, see 4). 4).

Note

"4-3 Mounting the connector cable" (page 4-

• For PNP output type cable, the sh shielding ielding wire is connected to b blue lue wire (0 V line). Do Do not connect the shielding wire to +24 V. • For NPN output type cable, the shielding wire is connected to brown wire (+24 V line). Do no nott connect the shielding wire to 0 V.

Shape ø5.8 (for SZ-01S), ø6.2 (for SZ-04M/SZ-16V/SZ-16D), minimum bending radius: 5 mm    7  .    9    1

40.2

Length 5 to 30 m Brown, blue: AWG24 (nominal cross-sectional area 0.22 mm 2) Other colors: AWG26 (nominal cross-sectional area 0.14 mm2)

Nomenclature for connector cable

SZ-P 5 P S

(1) (1) (2) (3) (4) (4)  

(2) (3) (4)

Basic designati designation on for the SZ co connec nnector tor cabl cable e Length 5: 5 m Output type of OSSD P: PNP output Corr Corres espo pon nded ded SZ SZ typ types es S: For SZ-0 SZ-01S 1S

SZ-P5PS SZ-P10PS SZ-P20PS SZ-P30PS SZ-P5NS SZ-P10NS SZ-P20NS SZ-P30NS

Output type of OSSD

PNP

NPN

Length

5m 10 m 20 m 30 m 5m 10 m 20 m 30 m

No. of internal wires

8

SZ-04M/SZ-16V/SZ-16D Model

SZ-P5PM SZ-P10PM SZ-P20PM SZ-P30PM SZ-P5NM SZ-P10NM SZ-P20NM SZ-P30NM

1-6

30: 30 m

SZ-01S Model

 

10: 10 m 20: 20 m N: NPN output M: F For or SZ SZ-0 -04M 4M or SZ SZ-1 -16 6V o orr S SZZ-16 16D D

Output type of OSSD

Length

PNP

5m 10 m 20 m 30 m

NPN

5m 10 m 20 m 30 m

No. of internal wires

18

SZ-M-NO1-E

 

1-3

Options

1

Mounting bracket It is possible to perform the angle alignment up to ±7.5° vertically and ±7.5° horizontally if you use the mounting bracket with angle alignment (For the L-shaped mounting bracket with angle alignment, only the vertical angle alignment is possible). For the information about the dimensions of the mounting bracket, see "9-3 Dimensions" (page 9-5). 9-5) . For the information about assembling the mounting bracket, see "3-4 Mounting for installation" (page 3-13). 3-13) .  

Horizontal mounting bracket (Model: OP-86935) Hexagon socket bolt (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm) x 4

 

Vertical mounting bracket (Model: OP-86936) Hexagon socket bolt (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm) x 4

 

Horizontal mounting bracket with angle alignment (Model: OP-86937) Hexagon socket bolt (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm) x 8

SZ-M-NO1-E

1-7

B  e f    o r   e  U  s  e

 

1

1-3

Options

 

Vertical mounting bracket with angle alignment (Model: OP-86938) Hexagon socket bolt (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm) x 8

 

L-shaped mounting bracket with angle alignment (Model: OP-86939) Hexagon socket bolt (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm) x 8

B  e f    o r   e  U  s  e

1-8

SZ-M-NO1-E

 

1-3

Options

1

Other  

Configuration Software The configuration software can be downloaded from the KEYENCE website. http://www.keyence.com If you can not access the internet, call the nearest KEYENCE office.

 

USB cable (Model: OP-86941) This is the USB cable used for connecting the SZ to the PC. Cable length is 5 m.

 

RS-422A Communication Cable (Model: SZ-C5D) Connector cable for RS-422A communication via the th e SZ-16D.

SZ-M-NO1-E

B  e f    o r   e  U  s  e

1-9

 

1-4  Part description 1 B  e f    o r   e  U  s  e

Top view  

SZ-01S/SZ-04M/SZ-16V

SZ-16D

 

Setting cover Setting cover

1/2

3/4

A

B

RS-422A Communication port (M12 5-pin connector)

OSSD

SZ-04M

INTERLOCK WARNING

MUTING (SUSPENTION)

Esc

Enter

S AF E   N E R  N N E T  A N TY    LASER  S  C  CA

Protection zone origin

Protection zone origin

Front panel

Front panel

Front view 1 /2

3 /4

A

B

Side view

OSSD

SZ-04M

INTERLOCK WARNING

MUTING (SUSPENTION)

Esc

Enter

 R  E R  N E S AF  A N ET  E    Y   CA T     LASER   S C Y

Detection plane

Connector cable

Window Lower window

Details  

SZ-01S/SZ-04M/SZ-16V

USB port Mode switch   A : RUN/PC RUN/PC Communication Communication   B : Configuration Configuration on on SZ

A 

Information display

B 

OSSD indicator Interlock indicator

1/2

3/4

A

B

Up button

OSSD

SZ-04M

INTERLOCK WARNING

MUTING (SUSPENTION)

Esc

Warning indicator Muting indicator (SZ-04M only)

Escape button  

Down button

Enter

S AF E   N E R E T  TY      LASER  S  CA N Y

Enter button Right button

SZ-16D Setting cover (USB port inside)

Information display RS-422A Communication indicator OSSD indicator

RS-422A Communication port (M12 5-pin connector) Up button

Interlock indicator

Down button Warning indicator Escape button

1-10

Enter button Right button

SZ-M-NO1-E

 

2  Functions and Features

SZ-M-NO2-E

2-1 2-2

Functi Functions ons and fe featu atures res . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Inf Informa ormatio tion n displ display ay and ind indica icator tors s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2-3

Protec Protectio tion n zone zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-4

Warnin Warning g zone. zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

22-5 5

OSSD OSSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-10

22-6 6

Re Resp spon onse se tim time e and and scan scan cyc cycle le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 2-11

2-7

Int Interlo erlock. ck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 2-12

2-8

Externa Externall devic device em moni onitori toring ng func functio tion n (EDM) (EDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 2-16

2-9

Refere Reference nce points points monito monitoring ring functi function on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 2-17

2-10 2-1 0

Mul Multiti-OSS OSSD D fun functi ction on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 2-18

2-11 2-1 1

Ban Bank k switc switchin hing g functi function on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 2-20

2-12 2-1 2

Temp empora orary ry suspens suspension ion o off saf safety ety func functio tion n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 2-27

2-13 2-1 3

AUX (a (auxi uxilia liary) ry) outpu outputt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 2-35

2-14 2-14 2-15 2-1 5

Che Check ck iinpu nputt fun functi ction on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 2-43 Mon Monito itoring ring fun functi ction on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 2-45

2-16 2-1 6

RSRS-422 422A A Com Commun munica icatio tion n Functi Function on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 2-46

2-1

 

2-1

Functions and features

This chapter shows the functions and features of SZ. The following functions can be configured on the SZ itself or on the SZ configurator. There are four different types of models of SZ, which depends on the availability of functions; SZ-01S, SZ-04M, SZ-16V, and SZ-16D. In this chapter, the following four symbols are used for your reference. The definition is as follows.

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

S

Function available with SZ-01S

M

Function available with SZ-04M

V

Function available with SZ-16V

D

Function available with SZ-16D

Note

When the SZ Configurator is used to configure the SZ, you cannot change the setting through the manual configuration on SZ. Initialization (Updating the configuration data) must be performed in order to change the settings through the manual configuration on SZ in this situation. For the information about initialization with the SZ-01S or SZ-04M, see "Configuration of Others" (page 5-17). 5-17). For the information about initialization with SZ-16V SZ-16V,, see "5-3 Manual configuration for SZ-16V" (page 5-20). 5-20). Initialization from the main body is not possible with the communication type.

Reference

For information about configuration, "Chapter 5software" Manual (page Configuration 5-1)  andmore"Chapter 6 Configuration throughsee the configuration 6-1). 6-1). on the SZ" (page 5-1) 



:

Available -: Not a available vailable Manual configuration on SZ

Function

Configuration for safety-related function*1   Protection zone Minimum detectable object size for protection zone   Response time for protection zone Scan cycle   Interlock Restart delay (On-delay)   EDM Reference points monitoring Multi-OSSD Bank switching Muting Suspension in teaching mode Override Configuration for Non safety-related function *1 Warning zone   Minimum detectable object size for warning zone Response time for warning zone   AUX output   State Information Output Muting lamp output Check input Configuration for others Password change Initialization Turn off backlight   Adjustment of LCD contrast



SZ configurator

 (Configuration is limited.)  

 











   (Configuration is limited.)   -

  











-

 



 



-

 



 



 



 



 (Configuration is limited.)  



 











 (Configuration is limited.)      

 

   

*2



*2 







 



-

Reference page

2-6 2-6 2-11 2-11 2-12 2-15 2-16 2-17 2-18 2-20 2-27 2-30 2-32 2-8 2-8 2-11 2-35 2-41 2-40 2-43 5-17, 5-20 5-17, 5-17,, 5-20 5-17 6-24 5-17 5-17,, 5-20

*1 SZ-16V and the SZ-16D cannot be set from the main body. *2 SZ-16D cannot be set from the main body.

2-2

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-1

:

Function  

Detection in protection zone  

Detection in warning zone

SZ-16V/SZ-16D





1 zone

1 zone*1

1 zone







1 zone*1  

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2 zones





4 Banks*1

16 Banks



30 / 40 / 50 / 70 / 150 mm

 



60 - 480 ms (Scan cycle A) / 66 - 528 ms (Scan cycle B)

Interlock EDM Reference points monitoring Multi-OSSD Muting Suspension in teaching mode Override

RS-422A Communication

SZ-04M



 

Response time

State Information Output Muting lamp output Check input

SZ-01S

-

Minimum detectable object size

AUX output

Available -: Not available

1 zone

Bank switching

Functions and features

 



   

 

 

 







 



 



 



2 outputs -



-

  

6 outputs

4 outputs

 





 



-





-

-

 



SZ-16D only *1: The number of the selectable zones (protection (protection zone and wa warning rning zone) varies depending on the configuration on the Multi-OSSD function. The number of the banks also varies depending on the configuration on the Multi-OSSD function. "2-10 Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18)

SZ-M-NO2-E

2-3

 

2-2  Informati Information on display and indicators  SZ-01S

2

 

 SZ-04M

OSSD

1/2

3/4

A

B

OSSD

SZ-01S

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

SZ-04M

INTERLOCK

INTERLOCK

WARNING

WARNING

MUTING (SUSPENSION)

Enter

Esc

Indicators

Esc

Information

Enter

Indicators

display

display  SZ-16V

 

Information

 SZ-16D

OSSD

SZ-16V INTERLOCK 1

2

WARNING

Esc

Enter

Indicators

Information display

Indicators

Information display

Information display The information display shows a various text depending on the SZ state. "Chapter 5 on Manual Configuration the SZ" "Indication information display"on (page 8-5)(page 5-1) Reference

The information display can be turned turn ed off during normal operations. You can do the setting for turning tur ning off backlight through the SZ Configurator Configurator..

Indicator  

SZ-01S 

S

Description on label

OSSD 1/2

OSSD indicator

INTERLOCK

Interlock i nd ndicator

WARNING

2-4

Assigned function

Warning zzo one iin ndicator

Description

Light in green: OSSD1/2 is in the ON-state Light in red: OSSD1/2 is in the OFF-state Light in yellow: Interlock condition Light OFF: Other than above Light in orange: Detected in the warning zone Light OFF: Other than above

Reference page

"2-5 OSSD" (page 2-10) "2-7 Interlock" ( Interlock" (page page 2-12) 2-12) "2-4 Warning zone" (page 2-8)

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-2

 

SZ-04M 

M

Description on label

OSSD 1/2

INTERLOCK 1/2

INTERLOCK 3/4 WARNING A WARNING B

MUTING

Description

Light in green: OSSD1/2 is in the ON-state Light in red: OSSD1/2 is in the OFF-state Light in green: OSSD3/4 is in the ON-state OSSD3/4 indicator Light in red: OSSD3/4 is in the OFF-state Light in yellow: OSSD1/2 is in the Interlock Interlock indicator condition Light OFF: Other than above Light in yellow: OSSD3/4 is in the Interlock Interlock indicator condition Light OFF: Other than above Light in orange: Detected in warning zone A Warning zone A indicator Light OFF: Other than above Light in orange: Detected in warning zone B Warning zone B indicator Light OFF: Other than above Light in orange: In the state (1) or (2) below: (1 (1)) Mu Mutin ting g ffun unct ction ion works works.. (2) Suspension in teaching mode works. Muting indicator Blinking in orange: Override function works. Light OFF: Other than above

OSSD 1/2 INTERLOCK WARNING 1 WARNING 2

Assigned function

Description

Light in green: OSSD1/2 is in the ON-state OSSD indicator Light in red: OSSD1/2 is in the OFF-state Light in yellow: Interlock condition Interlock in indicator Light OFF: Other than above Light in orange: Detected in warning zone 1 Warning zone A indicator Light OFF: Other than above Light in orange: Detected in warning zone 2 Warning zone B indicator Light OFF: Other than above

Assigned function

Description

Light in green: OSSD1/2 is in the ON-state Light in red: OSSD1/2 is in the OFF-state

OSSD

OSSD indicator

COM.

RS-422A Communication Blinking in green: RS-422A communicates indicator Light OFF: Other than above Light in yellow: Interlock condition Interlock in indicator Light OFF: Other than above Light in orange: Detected in warning zone 1 Warning zone 1 indicator Light OFF: Other than above Light in orange: Detected in warning zone 2 Warning zone 2 indicator Light OFF: Other than above

WARNING 1 WARNING 2

SZ-M-NO2-E

"2-5 OSSD" (page 2-10) "Multi-OSSD function"  function"  (page 2-18) 2-18)

"2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12)

"2-4 Warning zone" (page 2-8)

"2-12 Temporary suspension of safety function" (page 2-27)

Reference page

"2-5 OSSD" (page 2-10) "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12)

"2-4 Warning zone" (page 2-8)

D

Description on label

INTERLOCK

Reference page

V

Description on label

SZ-16D

Assigned function

OSSD1/2 indicator

OSSD 3/4

SZ-16V

Information display and indicators

Reference page

"2-5 OSSD" (page 2-10) "SZ-16D Communication Manual" "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12)

"2-4 Warning zone" (page 2-8)

2-5

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

 

2-3  Protection zone

S

M

V

D

When the SZ detects an object (someone or something) in the protection zone, the OSSD goes to the OFF-state.

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

Danger

•

•

•

Reference

The protection zone must be configured so as to ensure the minimum safety distance, which has been calculated according to the laws, the  laws, regulations, and standards of the country and region in which the SZ is installed. "3-3 Safety distances" (page 3-7) When either multi-OSSD function or bank switching function is enabled, every protection zone must be configured so as to ensure the minimum safety distance, which has been calculated according to the laws, the laws, regulations, and standards standards of  of the country and region in which the SZ is installed. "3-3 Safety distances" (page 3-7) SZ cannot monitor anything behind the object that the SZ detects in the protection zone. (This is a blind area for the SZ.) The responsible personnel must perform the risk assessment with taking into account this factor in case of installation of the SZ. If necessary, the additional countermeasure must be taken by the responsible personnel.

• You can configure the protection protection zone through both the SZ C Configurator onfigurator and the manua manuall configuration on the SZ. But, you can only configure the quadrate and rectangular protection zone through the manual configuration. If the protection zone you want to configure is not quadrate or rectangular, you must use the SZ Configurator for configuration of protection zone "Chapter 5 Manual Configuration on the SZ" (page 5-1) •T wo protection zones ("protection zo zone ne A" and "protection zone B") can be configured when the Mode D is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4. See "Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18)

 

Protection zone (top view) Front 90

Maximum protection zone

O

P

Maximum protection distance

Protection zone origin

P

O

180 185

0 -5

O

O

225

 

-45

O

Minimum detectable object size and maximum protection distance As shown in the following table, the maximum protection distance varies depending on the minimum detectable object size. Minimum detectable object size (mm) ø30 ø40 ø50 ø70 ø150 Maximum distance (m)

2-6

O

O

-5° to 185° -45° to -5° 185° to 225°

1 .8

2 .4

3 .0

4.2

1 .2

1 .6

2 .0

2.8

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-3

Danger

Protection zone

As shown in the following figure, the detection may not be performed if the whole of minimum detectable object is not included in the protection zone. You must configure the protection zone so as to ensure that the whole of minimum detectable object is included everywhere in that protection zone. Minimum detectable object Protection zone

SZ

Note

SZ-M-NO2-E

Even if the object is smaller than the minimum detectable object size, it may be detected. But this is not guaranteed.

2-7

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

 

2-4  Warning zone

S

M

V

D

A warning zone can be configured co nfigured separately from the protection zone. Y You ou can prevent the unnecessary stop of machine if you configure the warning zone larger than the protection zone, because the SZ can make an alert to the outside, such as indicator, before the object (someone or something) approaches into the protection zone. You can make sure the state of detection in the warning zo zone ne through the AUX output. "2-13 AUX (auxiliary) output" (page 2-35)

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

Danger

Note

Reference

The warning zone is not a safety-related function. Do not use the output for detection in the warning zone as a safety output, which is connected to the safety-related part of a control system. Failure to follow this warning may result in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death.

OSSD does not go to the OFF-state even if the SZ detects an object in the warning zone

You can configure the warning zone through both the SZ Configurator and the manual configuration on the SZ. But, you can only configure the quadrate and rectangular warning zone through the manual configuration. If the warning zone you want to configure is not quadrate or rectangular, rectangular, you must use the SZ Configurator for configuration of warning zone. "Chapter 5 Manual Configuration on the SZ" (page 5-1)

 

Warning zone (top view) Front 90

Maximum warning zone

O

a

Maximum warning distance

Protection zone origin

a

O

180 185

0 -5

O

O

O

225

 

-45

O

Minimum detectable object size and maximum warning distance As shown in the following table, the maximum warning distance varies depending on the minimum detectable object size. Minimum detectable object size (mm) ø30 ø40 ø50 ø70 ø150 Maximum distance (m)

2-8

O

-5° to 185°

4 .5

6.0

7.5

10

-45°to -5° 185° to 225°

3 .0

4 .0

5 .0

7.0

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-4

 

Warning zone

Example of warning zone Warning zone

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

 

Note

• Even if the object is smaller than the minimum detectable detectable object size, it may be detected. But this is not guaranteed. • The detection may not be perf performed ormed in the warning zone if tthe he whole of minimum detectable object is not included in that warning zone. Y You ou must configure the warning zone so as to ensure that the whole of minimum detectable object is included everywhere in that warning zone. • The scan cycle for the warning zone cannot be set because the scan cycle for for the conf configured igured protection zone is always applied. "2-6 Response time and scan cycle" (page 2-11)

Reference

SZ-M-NO2-E

• The response tim time e and the minimum detectable object size for the warning warning zone can be different fr from om those for the protection zone. "2-6 Response time and scan cycle" (page 2-11) • When the Mode D is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4, two warning zon zones, es, "warning zone A" and "warning zone B", can be set individually. individually. "Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18) When 2-18) When the SZ detects an object in either warning zone, you can make sure such detection through the AUX output. "2-13 AUX (auxiliary) output" (page 2-35) • When using the multi-z multi-zone one sets (banks) ty type pe as well as the communication communication type, "warning zone 1" and "warning zone 2" can be set separately. separately. When the SZ detects an object in either warning zone, you can make sure such detection through the AUX output. "2-13 AUX (auxiliary) output" (page 2-35)

2-9

 

2-5  OSSD

S

M

V

D

When the SZ detects an object (someone or something) in the protection zone, the OSSD goes to the OFF-state. "2-3 Protection zone" (page 2-6) The OSSD is a safety output for safety-related part of a machine control system. OSSD 1/2 is a pair of safety outputs that performs the output of same state. Similarly, OSSD 3/4 is also a pair of safety outputs that performs the output of same state. The SZ generates self-diagnosis signals on its internal intern al control circuit to perform diagnostics on the

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

OSSD. These signals into a temporary OFF-st ate when the OSSD is in the ON-state (when the SZperiodically detects no force objectthe in OSSD the protection zone.). OFF-state The internal control circuit receives a feed-back signal (OFF-signal) based on the self-diagnosis, the SZ determines that its OSSD is in the normal operation. If the OFF-signal is not returned to the internal control circuit, the SZ determines that there is a problem in its OSSD or wiring and goes to the error state.

Danger

For the wiring between SZ and a safety-related part of a machine control system, both OSSD 1 and OSSD 2 must be always wired to a safety-related part of a machine control system in order to ensure the safety. Similarly, both OSSD 3 and OSSD 4 must be always wired to a safety-related part of a machine control system if you assign a function for OSSD 3/4. If one OSSD is only wired to a safety-related part of a machine control system, it results in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death, due to OSSD malfunction.

• For the SZ-01S, SZ-16V and SZ-16D, they have O OSSD1 SSD1 and OSSD2, which are are a pair of safety outputs that perform the output of same state. • For the SZ-04M, it has O OSSD1/2 SSD1/2 and OSSD3/4. OSSD 1/2 are a pair pair of safety outputs that perform the output of same state. Similarly, Similarly, OSSD 3/4 are also a pair of safety outputs that perform perfor m the output of same state. For more information about the OSSD3/4, see "Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18). 2-18). • The SZ has a function to m monitor onitor the state of external devices ((EDM EDM function) that are con connected nected to the OSSD. The OSSD can go to the OFF-state due to the error state of external devices if the SZ detects the

Reference

error on external devices in case of the enabling the EDM function. For more information about the external device monitoring function, see

 

"2-8 External device monitoring function (EDM)" (page 2-16) 2-16)..

Time chart for self-diagnosis pulse ON OSSD1 OFF

A

A B

A B

A B

B

ON OSSD2 OFF

A

A B

B

ON OSSD3 OFF

A

A B

B

ON OSSD4 OFF

A

A B

Approx. 780 ms

A : approx. 20 μs (If a capacitive load is connected, max. 200 μs can apply.) apply.)

Note

B : approx. 30 ms

The devices connected to the OSSD OSSD,, such as safety relay or contactor, should not respond to these temporary,, self-diagnostic OFF-signals. porary

Reference

2-10

OSSD 3/4 is only available for SZ-04M.

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-6  Response time and scan cycle

S

M

V

D

The response time of SZ is the time from when an object (someone or something) goes into the protection zone to when the OSSD goes to the OFF-state due to the detection of object. There are several options for response time. (The response time is selectable for user user.) .) Advant Adv antage age of of a fast fast respon response se time: time:

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

The safe safety ty dista distance nce can can be shorte shortened ned.. "3-3 Safety distances" (page 3-7)

Advantage Advant age of a slow slow response response time: time: due You can reduce redinterference uce problems problems that the OSSD OSSD goes to to theofOFF-state OFF-s to light or that instantaneous detection dust tate passing through the protection zone, because of the increasing in creasing the number of scans.

Danger

•

•

The necessary safety distance varies depending on the response time you specify. The protection zone must be configured so as to ensure the minimum safety distance, which has been calculated according to the laws, the laws, regulations, and standards of the country and region in which the SZ is installed. "3-3 Safety distances" (page 3-7) The response time must be 90 ms or less when the SZ is used for the detection for access protection (trip device using whole-body detection with normal approach). The SZ may not detect the person in the protection zone if the specified response time is more than 90 ms.

SZ has two different scan cycles. You can select either one. You can reduce the possibility of mutual interference between the SZs if you set the different scan cycle individually, individually, even if two t wo SZs are installed facing each other. other. The selectable response time varies depending on the scan cycle you specify. specify.

Scan cycle and available response time Response time (ms) Scan cycle A Scan cycle B

Reference

60 66

90 99

120 132

150 165

180 198

210 231

240 264

270 297

300 330

330 363

360 396

390 429

420 462

450 495

480 528

• Scan cycle A is 30 ms, wh while ile scan cycle B is 33 ms. (Res (Response ponse time = Scan cycle x the num number ber of scan) • Y ou can select thethrough response time configuration from a pull-down m menu enu throught the SZ Configurator Configurator,, or from a selectable menu manual on SZ. See "Safety 1" (page 6-12) or 6-12) or "Configuration and confirmation of safety-related functions" (page 5-5)

Note

• For m more ore information about pre preventing venting mutual mutual interf interference, erence, also see 3-3).. 3-3)

"3-2 Hint on installation" (page

• The response time and scan cycle is always the same for all banks when 2 or more banks are set w with ith the bank switching function. • When the Mode C or D is applied as the operation mode mode for OSS OSSD3/4, D3/4, the response time ffor or OSSD1/2 can be different from that for OSSD 3/4. However, However, the can cycle for OSSD3/4 is always the same as that for OSSD1/2. • Scan cycl cycle e A can only be set in ca case se of the manual manual conf configura iguration tion on the S SZ. Z. "Chapter 5 Manual Configuration on the SZ" (page 5-1)

SZ-M-NO2-E

2-11

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2 11  

2-7  Interlock

S

M

V

D

Interlock is a function to prevent that the OSSD automatically goes to the ON-state from the OFF-state. You can prevent the unintended start-up and/or the unintended restart of the machine if the interlock is applied to the SZ. It is necessary for to perform the reset operation in order that the SZ goes back to the normal operation from the interlock condition. The configuration for interlock is necessary through the manual configuration on the SZ or SZ Configurator. Furthermore, the reset switch must be connected conne cted to the reset

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

input terminal on the SZ. For more information about the configuration, see "Chapter 5 Manual Configuration on the SZ" (page 5-1) and 5-1)  and "Chapter 6 Configuration through the configuration software" (page 6-1) 6-1).. For more information about the wiring, see "Chapter 4 Wiring" (page 4-1) 4-1).. Reference

When the Mode D is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4, you can configure the interlock function to both OSSD 1/2 and OSSD 3/4. "2-10 Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18)

Start/restart mode You can determine whether the interlock function is enabled at start-up or at restart based on the setting of In start/restart this manual,mode. start-up and restart refer to the following. Start-up:

1) 2) 3)

when when the the pow power er is is supp supplilied ed (aft (after er SZ SZ load loadin ing) g),, when when the the SZ SZ is res resto tore red d from from err error or stat state e thor thorou ough gh res reset et inpu input, t, when when the config configurat uration ion is comp complet leted ed throu through gh the the SZ Confi Configur gurato atorr or the manu manual al config configura uratio tion n on the SZ.

Restart:

1)  

When When the the OSSD OSSD goes goes back back to the the ON-s ON-stat tate e from from OFF-st OFF-state, ate, except except for the start-up start-up

Start mode Automatic:

Interlock function not work.automatically The SZ startsifoperation automatically without reset operation. The OSSD goes todoes the ON-state the SZ detects no object in thethe protection zone at start-up. This mode can be used for machines where nobody can go into or approach the hazardous area by only passing through the protection zone, or if the safety-related part of a control system othe otherr than the SZ, such as a safety relay unit, can c an ensure the safety with other means. Manual:

Interlock function works. The SZ starts operation if the SZ receive the reset operation. The OSSD keeps the OFF-state at start-up (Interlock condition). It is necessary to perform the reset operation when the SZ detects no object in the protection zone, in order that the machine starts operation. Because of reset operation, the OSSD goes to the ON-state, and then interlock condition is terminated. Unexpected/Unintended start-up of the machine or machinery can be prevented.

SZ-M-NO2-E

2 12  

2-7

 

Interlock

Restart mode Automatic:

Interlock function does not work. The SZ starts operation automatically without the reset operation. The OSSD goes to the ON-state automatically at restart if the object detected by the SZ is removed from the protection zone. This mode can be used for machines where nobody can go into or approach the hazardous area by only passing through the protection zone, or if the safety-related part of a control system other than the SZ, such as a safety relay unit, can ensure the safety with other means. Manual:

Interlock function works. The SZ starts operation if the SZ receive the reset operation. The OSSD keeps the OFF-state even if the object detected by the SZ is removed from the protection zone. (Interlock condition). It is necessary to perform the reset operation when the SZ detects no object in the protection zone, in order that the machine starts operation. Because of reset operation, the OSSD goes to the ON-state, and then interlock condition is terminated. Reference

• There are thr three ee options on the configuration of start/restart start/restart through the SZ C Configurator: onfigurator: Automatic/  Automatic, Manual/Automatic, Manual/Manual. "Chapter 6 Configuration through the configuration software" (page 6-1)

• There are two op options tions on the configuration of start/restart start/restart through the manual config configuration uration on the SZ: Automatic/Automatic and Manual/Manual.

Input circuit and wiring For PNP output type cable Brown

Main circuit

Input resistance

For NPN output type cable Brown

+24 V Main circuit

*1 Yellow (reset input) Blue

"Chapter 5 Manual Configuration on the SZ" (page 5-1) 

Yellow (reset input)*1

Blue

0V

+24 V

0V

Input resistance

*1 • When theand Mode is applied as the for OSSD3/4, the reset input wire for for OSSD 1/2 is yellow theDreset input wire for operation OSSD 3/4mode is yellow/black. • In case of "Manual/Manual" "Manual/Manual" on the configuration of start/restart, the switch with N.O. typ type e should be used for reset operation. • In case of "Manual/Automatic" "Manual/Automatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the switch with N.C. typ type e should be used for reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/Automatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the switch for reset operation is not necessary. However, However, the switch with N.C. type should be used for reset operation if you want to restore the SZ to normal operation from error state with external switch. Switch is not necessary unless you restore the SZ to normal operation from error state with external switch. When using PNP output type cable, reset input wire must be short-circuited to +24 V. When using NPN output type cable, it must be short-circuited to 0 V. V.

SZ-M-NO2-E

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2 13  

2-7

Interlock

 

Time chart (Restart from interlock condition) ON Power supply

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

OFF

Detect no object SZ Detect object

Reset input

ON OFF Approx. 20 20 seconds (more than start-up time of SZ)*1 ON

100 ms min.

Start interlock condition

OSSD OFF 100 ms max.

*1 If the main body of the SZ is not Ver.2 Ver.2 or newer, newer, it will take t ake approximately 50 seconds.

Danger

•

•

Be sure to absolutely confirm that there is nobody in the hazardous zone before the interlock condition is terminated (i.e. the machine system restarts) by the interlock reset mechanism. Failure to follow this warning may result in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death. In case of "Automatic/Automatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the SZ cannot go to the interlock condition. You You must prevent the unintended start-up/restar start-up/restartt and ensure the safety with machine control system except for the SZ.

Note

• It is necessary to provide 20 m ms s or more betw between een the timing of reset input and the timing of other inputs. • The OSSD k keeps eeps the OFF-state during error state regar regardless dless of the configur configuration ation of interlock function. "8-2 Troubleshooting" Troubleshooting" (page 8-5) • In case of "Manu "Manual/Automatic" al/Automatic" or "Manual/Manual" on the configuration of start/restart, you have no chance to apply the check input function. "2-14 Check input function" (page 2-43)

SZ-M-NO2-E

2 14  

2-7

Interlock

Restart Delay (ON-delay) In case of "Automatic" on the configuration of restart mode, restar restartt delay (ON-delay) can be applied to the SZ. You can change the time from when the object detected by the SZ is removed from the protection zone to when the OSSD goes back to the ON-state. This is a delay time, which can be set from 2 seconds to 60 seconds on the second time scale. On the other hand, the OSSD goes back to the ON-state after passing the response time (ON to OFF) if the restart delay (ON-delay) is not applied. "2-6 Response time and scan cycle" (page 2-11)  

Time chart (Restarted from interlock condition) Detect no object SZ Detect object ON OSSD OFF Response Resp onse time (ON (ON to OFF) OFF)

Note

Response Resp onse time time (Off (Off to ON) ON) + Restart Restart delay delay time time

• The restart delay does not work even even if the OSSD goes back to the ON-state due to the termination of check input. "2-14 Check input function" (page 2-43) • The restart delay does not work e even ven if the OSSD OSSD goes back to the ON ON-state -state due to the ov override erride function. "Override function" (page 2-32)

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-15

SZ M NO2 E

 

2-8  External device monitoring function (EDM)

M

V

D

The SZ can monitor the state of o f external device, such a ass safety relay or contactor, that is connected to the OSSD in order to detect the failure on that external device. This function is the external device monitoring function (EDM function). Wiring between the SZ and external device (N.C. contact) c ontact) must be performed according to the following figures. EDM input must be open-circuit if the EDM is not applied to the SZ.

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

S

 

Input circuit and wiring For PNP output type cable

For NPN output type cable

Brown

Brown

+24 V

+24 V

Device 1 Main circuit

*1

Red

Main circuit

Device 2

Blue

Red

*1

Blue

0V

Device 1 Device 2 0V

Input resistance 2.2 k Ω

Input resistance 2.2 kΩ

*1 The EDM input wire for OSSD1/2 is red, and the EDM input wire for OSSD3/4 OSSD3/4 is red/black.

 

Time chart Detect no object SZ Detect object

ON

Error condition

OSSD OFF Response time (ON to OFF)

External device (B contact)

ON OFF

Response time (OFF to ON)

1

2

Tolerance time

Tolerance  time

0.3 s

0.3 s

(1) The SZ continues normal operation because the S SZ Z detects the operation of external device within the specified period of time (0.3 s) after the operation of OSSD 1/2 (ON to OFF). (2) The SZ detects the error on the e external xternal device and generates the error state of "EDM error" because the SZ does doe s not detect the operation of exte external rnal device within the specified period of time (0.3s). "8-2 Troubleshooting" Troubleshooting" (page 8-5) Reference

• When the OSSD3/4 ar are e enabled, EDM can also b be e applied to the OSSD 3/4. function" (page 2-18) • For more details about the EDM EDM error, error, see "Error state" (page 8-2). 8-2).

"2-10 Multi-OSSD

2-16

SZ M NO2 E

 

2-9  Reference points monitoring function

S

M

Reference points monitoring is a safety-related function where the SZ monitors the position change of the structure (such as protective guarding or door) located at the specified reference point. As well as the SZ detects an object in the protection zone, the OSSD goes to the OFF-state if th the e position of the structure (such as protective guarding or door) varies exceeding the specified tolerance. Reference

• SZ configurator must be used to apply the reference reference points monitoring to the SZ. • Maximum 30 reference reference points can be set. set.

Examples of applications for detection for area protection When the reference point is set on the position of movable part, such as a door, door, the OSSD goes to the OFF-state if the SZ detects the position change of the movable part. Door Reference point Protection zone

SZ

Examples of applications for detection for access protection When the SZ is used in combination with other protective structures as safety measures, the configured protection zone may not ensure the safety because the unintended area possible to approach would be generated due to the displacement of protective structures or the SZ itself. Because of reference points monitoring function, the SZ can monitor the position of the protective structure. Therefore, you can ensure the safety because the OSSD goes to the OFF-state in case of position change of the protective structure.

Example of reference points SZ

Protection zone

Protective structure 1 A

Protective F structure 2

B

E C

Floor

D

2 or more reference points must be set on one structure so as to ensure the detection of its position change.

As shown in the above "Example of reference point", two reference points are set on three structures (protective structure 1, protective structure 2 and the floor) for a total of six points (A to F).

Danger

Reference points monitoring function must be applied when the SZ is used for the access protection specified in IEC61496-3:2008 Annex A.12 and A.13 (the application where the angle of the approach exceeds ±30º to the detection plane.). In this case, the tolerance for reference points must be ±100 mm or less and the response time must be 90 ms or less.

Additional countermeasures for protection must be provided if there is the unprotected space between the protection zone and the protective structure that the minimum detectable object is not detected by the SZ.

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-17

SZ M NO2 E

 

2-10  Multi-OSSD function

M

The SZ-04M has an OSSD 3/4. The following functions (four modes: mode A to mode D) can be assigned to the OSSD 3/4.

2

Note

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

• When the Mode D is applied as the operation mode ffor or OSSD3/4, you have no chance to apply the temporary suspension of the safety function to the SZ. "2-12 Temporary Temporary suspension of safety function" (page 2-27) • Bank switching function can be applied to the SZ if you apply the multi-OSSD function, function, but the number number of settable banks varies depending on the mode of OSSD 3/4. For Mode A:3 banks For Mode B:3 banks For Mode C:3 banks For Mode D:2 banks

Danger

Reference

If you realize the safety-related control to the two hazards independently under the Mode D, you must take into full account the positioning and orientation of SZ in case of installation. If there is unprotected space where the operator can approach into the hazardous area, you must take additional countermeasure against the hazard.

SZ configurator must be used to assign the function to OSSD 3/4.

 

Mode A: OSSD 3/4 performs completely the same operation for the detection as OSSD 1/2. You can establish the same control to the two machines through one SZ if you use the OSSD 1/2 and OSSD 3/4.

 

Mode B: OSSD 3/4 performs the same operation for the detection as OSSD 1/2. As well as mode A, you can establish the same control to the two machines through one SZ if you use the OSSD 1/2 and OSSD 3/4. But, the interlock and temporary suspension of safety function does not work for the OSSD 3/4 under mode B. "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12) "2-12 Temporary Temporary suspension of safety function" (page 2-27) More specifically, specifically, the following functions are not enabled for the OSSD 3/4. • Sta Start rt interl interlock ock • Res Restart tart inter interloc lockk • Restart delay (ON-delay) (ON-delay) • Mu Mutiting ng • Susp Suspension ension in in teaching teaching mode mode • Ov Over erri ride de

2-18

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-10

 

 

Multi-OSSD function

Mode C: OSSD 3/4 performs different operation for the detection from OSSD 1/2, especially the minimum detectable object size and response time, but the protection zone is completely the same as OSSD 1/2. The minimum detectable object size and response time for OSSD 3/4 are to be less than or equal to those for OSSD 1/2. In this mode, OSSD 3/4 always goes to the OFF-state if the OSSD 1/2 goes to the OFF-state. If you assign a faster response time time to the OSSD 3/4 than OSS OSSD D 1/2, it becomes possible that only OSSD 3/4 goes to the OFF-state even if the OSSD 1/2 does not go to the OFF-state. When you use the OSSD 3/4 for the purpose of reducing speed of machine and use the OSSD 1/2 for the purpose of stopping the machine, the machine can stop only if the SZ detects a person in the protection zone (in case of hazardous haza rdous situation), while the machine just reduces the speed if the SZ detects a dust or spatter in the protection zone. Mode C is useful for such an application because you can prevent the unnecessary stop of machine. Mode D: OSSD 3/4 performs the non-related (independent) (i ndependent) operation from OSSD1/2. Therefore, all of parameters related to OSSDs, including the protection zone, can be different from OSSD 1/2. For information about the items that can be set,

"When "Mode D" is selected" (page 6-17). 6-17). Additionally, two warning zones can also be set.

It is possible to configure two protection zones, such as protection zone A and protection zone B. Furthermore, Fur thermore, it is also possible to configure two warning zones, such as warning zone A and warning zone B.

The OSSD 1/2 goes to the OFF-state OFF-st ate if the SZ detects an object in the protection zone A. On the other hand, the OSSD 3/4 goes to the OFF-state if the SZ detects an object in the protection zone B.  

"2-3 Protection zone" (page 2-6) Example of protection zones A and B You can configure two protection zones, such as protection zone A and protection zone B. The OSSD 1/2 goes to the OFF-state if the SZ detects an object in the protection zone A. Then, hazard A just stops the operation. On the other hand, the OSSD 3/4 goes to the OFF-state if the SZ detects an object in the protection zone B. Then, hazard B just stops the operation. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure two warning zones, such as warning zone A and warning zone B.

Hazard B Hazard A

Protection zone A (OSSD1/2) SZ

Protection zone B (OSSD3/4)

Warning zone B Warning zone A  

Not used OSSD3/4 are always in the OFF-state.

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-19

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-11 Bank switching function 2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

M

V

D

You can set the number of zones z ones in the SZ. Bank switching function is the function to switch a number of zones (Bank) according to the external input (bank input). The bank refers to the combination with protection zone, warning zone and reference points. The maximum number of banks and the number of warning zones per one bank varies depending on the model. SZ-01S

SZ-04M *1

SZ-16V/SZ-16D

1 1 1

4 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2)

16 1 2

Maximum number of banks Number of protection zones per one bank Number of warning zones per one bank

*1. The numbers are as indicated in the parentheses if mode D is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4. You can switch the banks according to the signal combination of bank inputs (ON/OFF state combination). 

Appropriate protection zone can be selected if you configure the SZ to switch the banks corresponding to the hazard and/or hazardous area. Note

For the SZ-04M, the maximum number of the selectable banks varies depending on the configuration assigned to OSSD 3/4. "2-10 Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18)

Reference

SZ configurator must be used to apply the bank switching function to the SZ. For the information of reference points monitoring, see

"2-9 Reference points monitoring function" (page 2-17)

In case of SZ-04M For the SZ-04M, you can set the four fou r banks at maximum. As shown in the following table, bank 1 to bank 4 can be switched according to the signal combination of bank inputs (bank input 1 to 4). In other words, SZ-04M switches the banks based on the signal state stat e (ON/OFF) of four bank inputs. Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 Bank 4

Bank input 1 ON OFF OFF OFF

Bank input 2 OFF ON OFF OFF

Bank input 3 OFF OFF ON OFF

Bank input 4 OFF OFF OFF ON

Table 2-11 (A) Reference

Bank switching works only if a certain bank input is in the ON-state and the other bank inputs are in the OFF-state.

Bank No. is the same as the bank input No. that is in the ON-state. Note

• The SZ does not start operation if tthe he signal combination of bank inputs is diff different erent from the combination as shown in Table 2-11 (A) at star start-up, t-up, because the SZ goes to the state of "Waiting for bank input". The SZ starts operation if the signal combination of bank inputs becomes the same as the combination as shown in Table Table 2-11 (A). "Star "Start-up" t-up" means 1) when the power is supplied, 2) when the SZ is restored from error state thorough reset input, and 3) when the configuration is completed through the SZ Configurator or the manual configuration on the SZ. • The SZ goes to the error state of "Bank error" if the signal combination of bank inputs becomes different from the combination as shown in Table Table 2-11 (A) after start-up. (Example: All bank inputs go to the OFF-state, or two or more bank inputs go to the ON-state simultaneously.) • Bank switching must be perf performed ormed according to the bank transition time you specified through the SZ Configurator.. The SZ goes to the error state of "Bank error" if the time does not meet the specified bank Configurator transition time. (Example: When the signal combination of bank inputs is diff different erent from the combination as shown in Table Table 2-11 (A) when the specified bank transition time has been passed.) • For mo more re inf informatio ormation n about the error error state, state, see "Error state" (page 8-2) 8-2)..

2-20

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-11

 

Bank switching function

Application example in a robot cell One SZ has 2 protection zones because the machine operator works in 2 area. You You can activate only one protection zone and one warning zone in which the robot (hazard) exists, because of bank switching.

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

Warning zone for bank 1 Protection zone for bank 1

SZ

Protection zone for bank 2 Warning zone for bank 2

 

Wiring for SZ-04M For PNP output type cable Brown

Light blue

+24 V Switch for bank 1 Switch for bank 2

(Bank input 1) Light blue/Black

Switch for bank 3

(Bank input 2) SZ Yellow/Black

Switch for bank 4

(Bank input 3) Red/Black (Bank input 4) Blue

0V

For NPN output type cable Brown

+24 V

Light blue (Bank input 1) Light blue/Black SZ

Switch for bank 1

(Bank input 2) Yellow/Black

Switch for bank 2

(Bank input 3) Switch for bank 3

Red/Black (Bank input 4) Switch for Blue

bank 4

0V

2-21

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-11

 

Bank switching function

Time chart for SZ-04M Bank input 1

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

Bank input 2

Bank input 3

(1)

ON OFF

(2)

ON OFF ON OFF

Bank input 4

ON OFF 1

Bank

2 T1

4

3 T1

T1

T1

2

T1

T1

1 T1

Error

SZ state

Normal

Detection state

interrupted Interrupted

ON

OSSD

OFF Reset input

ON OFF T1: Delay time for the bank input

100 ms max.

100 ms max.

(1) Since the bank input 2 and bank input 4 go to the O ON-state N-state after T1 is passed, SZ goes to the error state (Bank error). (2) Since all bank inputs go to the OFF-state after T1 is passed, SZ goes to the error state (Bank error). Reference

Note

You can select the delay time for bank inputs (T1). Option is "0.02", "0.05", "0.1", "0.25", "0.5", "1.0", "2.5" and "5.0. (Initial condition of 0.1 seconds. 0.02 seconds and 0.05 seconds can only be chosen with a SZ Configurator Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0 or newer.)

• It is necessary to provide 20 ms or more betw between een the timing for for bank sw switching itching and the timing of reset input. • If the bank s switching witching function is applied to the SZ, y you ou have no chance to apply the temporary suspension of safety function to the SZ. "2-12 T Temporary emporary suspension of safety function" (page 2-27)

• For the SZ-0 SZ-04M, 4M, the maximu maximum m number of banks vari varies es dependin depending g on the function assi assigned gned to OSSD3/ OSSD3/4. 4.   "Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18)

Danger

Someone may be able to approach the hazard and/or hazardous area without passing through the SZ protection zone if the bank switching is performed at unintended timing. Therefore, you must perform the risk assessment on your own responsibility, taking into account the delay time of bank input, in order to establish the appropriate control system for bank switching.

2-22

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-11

Bank switching function

In case of SZ-16V and SZ-16D For the SZ-16V and SZ-16D, you can set sixteen banks at maximum. As shown in the following table, bank 0 to bank 15 can be switched according to the signal combination of bank inputs (bank input A to D / bank input a to d). In other word, SZ-16V and SZ-16D switches the banks based on the signal state (ON/OFF) of eight bank inputs. Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 Bank 4 Bank 5 Bank 6 Bank 7 Bank 8 Bank 9 Bank 10 Bank 11 Bank 12 Bank 13 Bank 14 Bank 15 Reference

Ba Bank nk in inpu putt A Bank Bank iinp nput ut B Bank Bank iinp nput ut C Bank Bank in inpu putt D Ba Bank nk iinp nput ut a Bank Bank iinp nput ut b Ba Bank nk inp input ut c Bank Bank iinp nput ut d OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Table 2-11 (B) The logic for bank input a is the opposite of bank input A. The same goes for bank input b to d and bank input B to D. Bank No. is represented with binary code consisting of the signal combination of bank input A, B, C and D.

For the bank input a, b, c and d, these are inverted signals from bank input A, B, C and D.

Note

• The SZ does not start operation if the signal combination of bank inputs is different from the combination as shown in Table 2-11 (B) at star start-up, t-up, because the SZ goes to the state of "Waiting for bank input". The SZ starts operation if the signal combination of bank inputs becomes the same as the combination as shown in Table Table 2-11 (B). "Star "Start-up" t-up" means 1) when the power is supplied, 2) when the SZ is restored from error state thorough reset input, and 3) when the configuration is completed through the SZ Configurator or the manual configuration on the SZ. • The SZ goes to the error state of "Bank error" if the signal combination of b bank ank inputs becomes different different from the combination as shown in Table 2-11 (B) after start-up. (Example: All bank inputs go to the OFF-state. All bank inputs go to the ON-state.) • Bank switching must be perf performed ormed according to the b bank ank transition time you specified through the SZ Configurator.. The SZ goes to the error state of "Bank error" if the time does not meet the specified bank Configurator transition time. (Example: When the signal combination of bank inputs is diff different erent from the combination as shown in Table Table 2-11 (B) when the specified bank transition time has been passed.) • If the total number of banks is eight or less (ie. Wh When en bank 0 to ban bank k 7 are enab enabled), led), the SZ does not check the state of bank input D and bank input d because they are not related to the bank switching.

• If the total number of banks is four or less (ie. When bank 0 to bank 3 are enabled), enabled), the SZ does not check the state of bank input C/D and bank input c/d because they are not related to the bank switching. • If the total number of banks is tw two o or less (ie (ie.. When bank 0 to bank 1 are enab enabled), led), the SZ does not check the state of bank input B/C/D and bank input b/c/d because they are not related to the bank switching. • For mo more re inf informatio ormation n about the bank bank error error,, see

"Error state" (page 8-2). 8-2).

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-23

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-11

 

2

Bank switching function

Application example for AGV (automated guided vehicle) If the SZ detects an object (someone or something) in the protection zone, the AGV stops because the OSSD goes to the OFF-state. The SZ monitors whether there is an object in the protection zone with bank switching corresponding to the surrounding situation of the SZ.

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

SZ

Bank 1 protection zone Bank 1 warning zone 1

 

Wiring for SZ-16V and SZ-16D For PNP output type cable Brown

Input resistance: 4.4 kΩ +24 V

Light blue (Bank input A) Gray (Bank input B) Pink (Bank input C) Green (Bank input D) SZ

AGV control unit OUT

Light blue/Black (Bank input a) Gray/Black (Bank input b) Pink/Black (Bank input c) Green/Black Green/Blac k (Bank input d)

Blue

0V

For NPN output type cable Brown

Input resistance: 4.4 kΩ

Light blue (Bank input A) Gray (Bank input B) Pink (Bank input C) Green (Bank input D) SZ

+24 V

AGV control unit OUT

Light blue/Black (Bank input a) Gray/Black (Bank input b) Pink/Black (Bank input c) Green/Black Green/Blac k (Bank input d)

Blue 0V

2-24

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-11

 

Bank switching function

Time chart for SZ-16V and SZ-16D Bank input A

ON OFF

Bank input B

ON OFF

Bank input C Bank input c

2

OFF

Bank input a

Bank input b

(1)

ON

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

ON OFF

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

ON OFF ON OFF

Bank input D

ON OFF

Bank input d

ON OFF

Bank

1

Error SZ state

6 T1

13 T1

10

T1

2 T1

Normal

Not Detection interrupted state  Interrupted ON

OSSD

OFF Reset input

ON OFF T1: Delay time for the bank input

100 ms max.

(1) Since the bank input C and bank input c go to the O OFF-state FF-state after T1 is passed, SZ goes to the error state (Bank error). Reference

Note

You can select the delay time for bank inputs (T1). Option is "0.02", "0.05", "0.1", "0.25", "0.5", "1.0", "2.5" and "5.0. (Initial condition of 0.1 seconds. 0.02 seconds and 0.05 seconds can only be chosen with a SZ Configurator Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0 or newer.)

It is necessary to have 20 ms or more between the timing for bank switching and the timing of reset input.

Danger

Someone may be able to approach the hazard and/or hazardous area without passing through the SZ protection zone if the bank switching is performed at unintended timing. Therefore, you must perform the risk assessment on your own responsibility, responsibility, taking into account the delay time of bank input, in order to establish the appropriate control system for bank switching.

2-25

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-11

Bank switching function

Bank sequence monitoring 

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

M

V

D

The SZ can monitor the sequence of bank switching so that the OSSD may go to the OFF-state due to the error state if the SZ detects the signal combination of bank inputs in the unexpected sequence. You can prevent the machine operation with an unintended protection zone selected because of the bank sequence monitoring. For each bank, you can assign 3 bank numbers to be followed. The SZ goes to the error state of "Bank error" if the bank number indicated by the signal combination of bank inputs is different from the specified bank number that is to be followed under the bank sequence monitoring function. Keyence Corporation strongly recommends enabling the bank sequence monitoring function if you can specify the bank sequence in your machine application. Reference

SZ configurator must be used to apply the bank sequence monitoring function to the SZ. For more information about the bank error, see "Error state" (page 8-2). 8-2).

Application example When the AGV on which mounts the SZ moves a certain path as shown in the following figure, the SZ can switch the bank in the following sequence, bank 1 ⇒ bank 2 ⇒ bank 3 ⇒ bank 1. The AGV can stop because the SZ goes to the error state of "Bank error" if the bank number indicated by the signal combination of bank inputs is different from the specified bank number that is to be followed under the bank sequence monitoring function. SZ Bank 1

Bank 2

Bank 3

Laser Shutdown

V

Bank 1

D

For the SZ-16V and SZ-16D, the OSSD can go to the OFF-state because of the laser shutdown due to the signal combination of bank inputs. This is "laser shutdown" sh utdown" function for the SZ. You can assign the laser shutdown function to a certain bank among bank 0 to bank 15. For example, if you assign this function to the bank number 0, the OSSD goes to the OFF-state because of the laser shutdown when the bank number 0 is selected based on the signal combination of bank inputs. The SZ goes back to the normal no rmal operation if the other bank number is selected. The SZ goes to the temporary standby state due to this function, and then AGV can stop. Reference

If you want to carry out the laser shutdown for SZ-01S and SZ-04M, you can apply the input function" (page 2-43). 2-43).

"2-14 Check

2-26

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-12  Temporary suspension of safety function

M

SZ-04M has a function that can temporarily suspend the safety function when the specific conditions are fulfilled. While the specific signals, which fulfill that condition, are activated, the OSSD keeps the ON-state even if the SZ detects something or someone in the protection zone, or if the SZ detects the change of position monitored through the reference points monitoring function. The following 2 functions are temporary suspension of safety function in the SZ. • Mu Mutiting ng • Susp Suspension ension in in teaching teaching mode mode

Danger

Reference

The customer is fully responsible for complying with the requirements for the temporary suspension of safety function. KEYENCE accepts NO responsibility or o r NO liability for any damage or any injury due to the unauthorized unauthor ized installation, usage, or maintenance, which are not specified in this user's manual, and/or due to noncompliance with the laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or region in which the SZ is used.

• SZ configurator must be used to apply the temporary temporary suspension of safety function. • You can make sure the state of suspension of safety function through through the muting indicator and AUX output signal. The configuration of AUX output is necessary if you want to make sure the state of suspension through AUX output signal. "2-13 AUX (auxiliary) output" (page 2-35) • The AUX output on the SZ can control the muting indicator if yyou ou want to make sure sure the state of suspension of safety function through through the muting indicator. indicator. AUX 6 must be configured for the muting lamp output and the indicator as shown in below must also be connected to AUX 6. • In case of incandescent lamp:DC24 lamp:DC24 V, V, 1.0-5.5 W • In case of LED indicator:current consumption consumption 10-230 mA

Note

• The temporary suspension of safety function does not work when the bank switching function is applied to the SZ. "2-11 Bank switching function" (page 2-20) • Mode D as the operation mode ffor or OSSD 3/4 cannot be applied if the temporary suspension of safety function is applied. "2-10 Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18)

Muting function You can configure any muting zone in the protection zone. The SZ goes to the muted condition when the conditions for initiation of muting are fulfilled. The OSSD keeps the ON-state even if the SZ detects an object in the muting zone. (Even if the conditions for initiation of muting are fulfilled, the OSSD goes to the OFFOFF-state state when the SZ detects an object in the protection zone that the muting zone is not conf configured.) igured.) For example, it is not necessary necessar y to stop the machine when the AGV goes into the hazardous area if you configure the muting zone in the protection zone where the AGV would pass through. The muting input terminals on the SZ must be connected to the muting devices if you want to use the muting function.

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-27

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-12

 

Temporary suspension of safety function

Input circuit and wiring For PNP output type cable

2

Brown

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s

Light blue SZ

For NPN output type cable Brown

+24 V Muting device 1

Light blue Muting device 2

(Muting input 1)

(Muting input 1) SZ

Light blue/Black

(Muting input 2) Light blue/  Muting Black device 2

(Muting input 2)

 a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

+24 V

Blue

0V

Muting device 1

Blue

0V

The input circuit for muting input 1 and 2 is as follows. For PNP output type cable For NPN output type cable Brown

Main circuit

Light blue Light blue/Black

Brown Main circuit

Blue Input resistance 4.4kΩ

 

Blue Input resistance 4.4kΩ

Limitation  

 

Light blue Light blue/Black

Muting device

• The muting device device output output must be N.O. (normally (normally open). • The muting device is required to be PNP output when using the PNP output typ type e cable, while the muting device is required to be NPN output when using the NPN output type cable. • Do not use one muting device with multiple outputs iin n place of two or more more muting devices. (One muting device may only provide one output.) • If the muting device has a timer function that can adjust the output timing, do not use that function.

Conditions for initiation of muting Muted condition is initiated if all of the following conditions are met. • Muting inputs go to the ON-state with the specified se sequence quence and within the specified time between them. • The SZ dete detects cts no object object in the protection protection zone. zone. • The OS OSSD SD is in in the ON-state. ON-state.  

Configuration to the conditions for initiation of muting

For the sequence of muting inputs (muting input 1 and muting input 2) and the time between muting inputs, you can change them as shown in the following.

 For the sequence of muting inputs • Muting input 1 to Muting input 2 (default) • Muting input 2 to Muting input 1 • Not specified   For the time between m muting uting inputs (Unit: second) • 0.04 to 3.0 (default) • 0.04 to 5.0 •• 0.04 0.04 to to 10.0 (not specified)

2-28

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-12

 

Temporary suspension of safety function

Conditions for termination of muting The muted condition is terminated if one of the following conditions is met. • Either of muting inputs goes to the OFF-state at least for more than 0.03 sec. • The SZ goes to the error error state. state. • Check in input put goes goes to the ON-state. ON-state. "2-14 Check input function" (page 2-43) • The power sup supply ply is interrupted interrupted or restored restored.. • Maximum mu muting ting period of time has been been passed. Configuration to the conditions for termination of muting

 

For the maximum muting period of time, you can change cha nge it as shown in the following. • Approx Approx.. 1 minute minute • Approx. Approx. 5 minutes minutes (Default) (Default) • Approx Approx.. 10 minutes minutes • Not specif specified ied

Danger

Note

The responsible personnel must perform the risk assessment based on the machine application in order to appropriately determine the risk if "Not specified" is selected for the maximum muting period of time. Failure to follow this warning may result in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death.

Muted condition is terminated approx. 5 minutes later when the time between muting inputs exceeds 3 seconds, even if "Not specified" is selected for both maximum muting period of time and time between muting inputs.

Time chart (Default) ON

Muting input 1

OFF Less than 0.03 s

ON

Muting input 2

OFF No limit

T1

Muted condition

T1

Less than 0.03 s

Not muted condition

Muting lamp

Light ON Within approx. 5 min.

Light OFF 3 ms max. SZ

30 ms max.

Within approx. 5 min.

30 ms max.

Detect no object Detect object

OSSD

ON OFF

T1: Within 0.04 to 3 seconds

Response time (ON to OFF)

Response time (OFF to ON)

30 ms max.

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-29

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-12

Temporary suspension of safety function

Suspension in teaching mode

2

Suspension in teaching mode is a temporary suspension su spension of safety function while the industrial robot (hereinafter called as "robot") is in the teaching mode. Generally,, the operation mode of the robot would be switched to the teaching mode in order to configure Generally the robot. After that, the operator or responsible personnel can go into the hazardous area (ie. inside of safety guarding). The SZ is connected to both the signal from switch to change the operation mode to teaching mode and the signal from the robot indicating that the robot is in the teaching mode. The safety function is suspended only if the SZ recognizes that the robot is in the teaching mode (manual operation mode for a robot that has sufficiently reduced speed). The whole of protection zone goes to the suspended condition during the suspension in teaching mode. (It is not possible to suspend the safety function to a part of the protection zone.)

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

Input circuit and wiring For PNP output type cable Brown

Light blue SZ

For NPN output type cable Brown

+24 V Robot operation mode switch

+24 V

Light blue Teach ready signal

(Teach mode input)

(Teach mode input) SZ

Light blue/Black (Teach ready input) Blue

(Teach ready input) Light blue/  Black

Blue

0V

Teach ready signal

Robot operation mode switch 0V

The input circuit for teach mode input and an d teach ready input is as follows. For PNP output type cable For NPN output type cable Brown

Main circuit

Light blue Light blue/Black

Brown Main circuit

Blue Input resistance 4.4kΩ

 

Light blue Light blue/Black

Blue Input resistance 4.4kΩ

Conditions for initiation of suspension in teaching t eaching mode Suspended condition (Temporary (Temporary suspension of safety function) is initiated if all of the following conditions are met. • Teach ready input goes to the ON-state within the specified time after the teach mode goes to the ON-state. • The SZ dete detects cts no object object in the protection protection zone. zone. • The OS OSSD SD is in in the ON-state. ON-state.  

Configuration to the conditions for initiation of suspension in teaching mode

For the time between teach mode input and teach ready input, you can cha change nge it as shown in the following (Unit:second). • 0.04 to 3.0 3.0 (defaul (default) t) • 0.04 0.04 to to 5.0 5.0 • 0.04 0.04 to to 10.0 10.0

2-30

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-12

 

Conditions for termination of suspension in teaching mode Suspended condition (Temporary (Temporary suspension of safety function function)) is terminated if one of the following conditions is met. • Either of teach mode inpu inputt or teach ready input goes to the OFF-state at least for more than 0.03 sec. • The SZ goes to the error error state. state. • Check in input put goes goes to the ON-state. ON-state. "2-14 Check input function" (page 2-43) • The power sup supply ply is interrupted interrupted or restored restored.. Reference

 

Temporary suspension of safety function

There is no specification for maximum suspended period of time in case of suspension in teaching mode.

Time chart Teach mode input

ON OFF Less than 0.03 s

Teach ready input

ON OFF T1

No limit

T1

Less than 0.03 s

Suspended Not suspended Muting lamp

Light ON Light OFF

SZ

Detect no object

30 ms max.

Detect object

OSSD

ON OFF

T1: Within 0.04 to 3 seconds

30 ms max.

30 ms max.

30 ms max.

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-31

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-12

Temporary suspension of safety function

Override function

2

Under the temporary suspension of safety function activated, such as muting or suspension in teaching mode, the OSSD goes to the OFF-state if that suspension is interrupted for any reason while an object is still in the protection zone. In this case, the machine continues to stop because the muting or suspension in teaching mode never works again for the reason that the SZ detects an object in th the e protection zone. The override is a helpful function suitable for such a situation. The SZ goes to the override condition when the conditions for initiation of override are met. Under the override activated, you can easily remove an object in the protection zone. The whole of protection zone goes to the override condition during override activated. (It is not possible to suspend the safety function to a part of the protection zone.)

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

 

Input circuit and wiring For PNP output type cableFor NPN output type cable Brown

Brown

+24 V

+24 V

*1 Yellow

Yellow

(Reset input)

(Reset input)

SZ

SZ

Yellow/Black

(Override input)

(Override input)

Yellow/Black

Blue

*1

Blue

0V

0V

The input circuit for reset input and override input is as follows. For PNP output type cableFor NPN output type cable Brown

Main circuit

Yellow Yellow/Black

Brown Main circuit

Blue Input resistance 4.4kΩ

*1

Yellow Yellow/Black

Blue Input resistance 4.4kΩ

In case of "Manual/ "Manual/Auto Automatic" matic" or "Automati "Automatic/A c/Automa utomatic" tic" on the configu configuratio ration n of start/resta start/restart, rt, the switch with N.C. type N.C.  type should be used for reset op operation. eration. "Start/restart mode" (page 2-12)

2-32

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-12

 

Temporary suspension of safety function

Under the muting function activated

Conditions for initiation of override

Override condition is initiated when the reset input goes to the ON-state (*2) within 0.04 to 1 sec. after the override input goes to the ON-state, if all of the following conditions are met. • Either of muting inputs or both both muting inputs inputs go to the ON-state. • The SZ is n not ot in the error error state. state. • The SZ dete detects cts an object object in the protection protection zone. zone. • The OSSD is in the OFF-state. (Includ (Including ing interlock interlock condition) condition) configuration of start/restart, the reset input *2 In case of "Manual/Automatic" or "Automatic/Automatic" "Automatic/Automatic" on the configuration must be the OFF-state for initiation of override. Additionally, in case of applying the check input function, check input must be the ON-state for initiation of override.

Conditions for termination of override

The override condition is terminated ter minated if one of the following conditions is met. • All muti muting ng inputs inputs go to the OFF-state. OFF-state. • Either override input or reset input input goes to the OFF-state. • The SZ goes to the error error state. state. • Maxim Maximum um override override period of time has been been passed. Reference

 

You can select the maximum override period of time. Option is "1 minute", "5 minutes" and "10 minutes". (Default: 1 minute)

Under the suspension in teaching mode activated

Conditions for initiation of override

Override condition is initiated when the reset input goes to the ON-state (*3) within 0.04 to 1 sec. after the override input goes to the ON-state, if all of the following conditions are met. • Both teach mode input and teach ready input go to the ON-state. • The SZ is n not ot in the error error state. state. • The SZ dete detects cts an object object in the protection protection zone. zone. • The OSSD is in the OFF-state. (Includ (Including ing interlock interlock condition) condition) *3

In case of "Manual/Automatic" or "Automatic/Automatic" "Automatic/Automatic" on the configuration configuration of start/restart, the reset input must be the OFF-state for initiation of override. Additionally, in case of applying the check input function, check input must be the ON-state for initiation of override.

Conditions for termination of override

The override condition is terminated ter minated if one of the following conditions is met. • Either of teach mode inpu inputt or teach ready input, or both of them go to the OFF-state. • Either override input or reset input input goes to the OFF-state. • The SZ goes to the error error state. state. • Maxim Maximum um override override period of time has been been passed. Reference

You can select the maximum override period of time. Option is "1 minute", "5 minutes" and "10 minutes". (Default: 1 minute)

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-33

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-12

 

Temporary suspension of safety function

Time chart (Initial settings when the Muting Function is used) Muting input 1

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

Muting input 2

ON OFF ON

Detect no object Detect object

SZ Override input *4

Reset input

Muting lamp

*4

Not limited

ON OFF ON OFF

Override condition Not override condition

OSSD

Not limited

OFF

0.04 to 1 s

Blinking Light OFF ON OFF

100 ms max.

Within approx. 60 s

If the st start/rest art/restart art mode se setting tting is A Auto/A uto/Auto uto,, then the rreset eset inp input ut logic is reversed. reversed.

100 ms max.

2-34

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-13  AUX (auxiliary) output 

S

M

V

D

Overview of the AUX output AUX output is informative output to inform the user of the SZ operations. The number of outputs and applicable information varies depending on the model. AUX output

SZ-01S 2 outputs

SZ-04M 6 outputs

SZ-16V/SZ-16D 4 outputs

SZ-01S: Two outputs (AUX1, 2) SZ-04M: Six outputs (AUX1 to 6) SZ-16V SZ16V/SZ /SZ-16 -16D: D: Four Four outp outputs uts (A (AUX1 UX1 to 4)

: Available -: Not available



Error   Alert Error or alert OSSD state Detection in protection zone Detection in warning zone Interlock-reset-ready output State information Muted or override condition  

         

Muting lamp

Danger

SZ-01S

SZ-04M

SZ-16V/SZ-16D











































-

 





 



-

-

 



-

The AUX output is not allowed to be used as a safety output for safety-related part par t of a control system. Usage of this function as safety output could result in the significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death.

Output circuit and wiring For connecting a PNP input device Brown

For connecting an NPN input device Brown

+24 V

+24 V

Input device Main

Main

(AUX1 to 6)

circuit

circuit

Input device Blue

0V

(AUX1 to 6) Blue

0V

Output rating: 50 mA or lessOutput rating: 50 mA or less Note

Regardless of selection between PNP output type cable and NPN output type cable, AU AUX X output can be connected to 0 V common or +24 V common. But, the operation of load connected to the AUX output varies depending on the cable type and common to be connected. The following description is based on the below assumption. 1) The AUX AUX output is used as PNP output because the connector cab cable le is PNP outpu outputt type cable. 2) The AUX AUX output is used as NPN output because the connector cab cable le is NPN o output utput type cable. If the AUX output is used as NPN output even though the connector cable is PNP output type cable, the explanation related to the operation of load (ON/OFF state) must be completely inverted. Similarly Similarly,, if the AUX output is used as PNP output even though the connector cable is NPN output type cable, the explanation related to the operation of load (ON/OFF state) must be also completely inverted.

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-35

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-13

AUX (auxiliary) output

When muting lamp output is assigned to AUX 6 Brown

2

+24 V Muting lamp

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

Main circuit

(AUX6) Green/Black Blue

0V

For information about the lamp to be connected, see Note

Reference

"Muting lamp output" (page 2-40). 2-40).

If you assign the AU AUX X 6 to the muting lamp output, the AUX 6 is always NPN output regardless of selection between PNP output type cable and NPN output type cable.

The configuration for the AUX output through the manual configuration on the SZ is limited. For information about the available information, see "Configuration of Non-safety Function" (page 5-12) 5-12)..

Error output 

S

M

V

D

You can make sure whether there is an error in the SZ or not. Error output goes to the ON-state during normal operation, while it goes to the OFF-state in case of error state.

"Error state" (page 8-2)

 

Time chart Normal

SZ state

Error condition

ON OSSD

ON or OFF OFF ON

Error output OFF

Note

The operation (ON/OFF state) of the load connected to the AUX output varies depending on the selected connector cable and connection with the external device. For more information, see "Overview of the AUX output" (page 2-35). 2-35).

Alert output 

S

M

V

D

You can make sure whether there is an alert in the SZ or not. The alert output goes to the OFF-state if the SZ detects any of the following condition. • Light polluti pollution on on the window window • Light Light interfer interference ence • High-refle High-reflective ctive backgro background und • Overcu Overcurre rrent nt on AUX • Muting Muting lamp failure (disconnecti (disconnection on or overcurrent overcurrent)) state" 8-4) You can"Alert prevent the(page unnecessary machine stop because you can find the countermeasure before the OSSD goes to the OFF-state during the normal operation, if you use this output.

2-36

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-13

 

AUX (auxiliary) output

Time chart SZ state

Normal

Alert state

Normal

2

ON OSSD

ON or OFF OFF ON

Alert output OFF

Note

The operation (ON/OFF state) of the load connected to the AUX output varies depending on the selected connector cable and connection with the external device. For more information, see "Overview of the AUX output" (page 2-35). 2-35).

Error or alert output 

S

M

V

D

You can make sure whether there is an error or alert in the SZ or not. The error/alert output goes to the OFF-state if the SZ detects an error or alert. For the timing chart in case of error state, see "Error output" (page 2-36) 2-36).. For the timing chart in case of the alert state, see "Alert state" (page 8-4). 8-4).

OSSD state output 

S

M

V

D

OSSD state output operates corresponding to the operation of OSSD. You can make sure the OSSD operation through the external device, such as PLC. When the Mode B, C or D is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4, you can select either the OSSD 1/2 state output corresponding to the OSSD 1/2 operation or the OSSD 3/4 state output corresponding to the OSSD 3/4. "Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18)  

Time chart ON OSSD OFF

ON OSSD state output OFF

Note

The operation (ON/OFF state) of the load connected to the AUX output varies depending on the selected connector cable and connection with the external device. For more information, see AUX output" (page 2-35). 2-35).

"Overview of the

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-37

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-13

AUX (auxiliary) output

Output for detection in protection zone  

2

S

M

V

D

You can make sure the operation for detection in the protection zone and at the reference points. The AUX output assigned for detection in protection zone goes to the OFF-state if the SZ is in any of the following situation.

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

• In case where the SZ detects an object (someone or som something) ething) in the protection zone • In case where the SZ detects nothing nothing at the re reference ference point

"2-9 Reference points monitoring function" (page 2-17)

• In case wher where e the check input input goes to the ON-state ON-state "2-14 Check input function" (page 2-43) • In case wh where ere the SZ SZ is in the error error state "Error state" (page 8-2) Note

When the Mode C is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4 and muting or suspension in teaching mode is also applied to the SZ, you cannot assign the output for detection in protection zone to the AUX output. "2-10 Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18)

Reference

 

• You can define that the SZ is in the the interlock condition if this output indicates "Nothing detected in the protection zone" with the OFF-state of OSSD. You can also define that the SZ detects an object (someone or something) in the protection zone under the temporary suspension of safety function activated if this output indicates "Something detected in the protection zone" with the ON-state of OSSD. See "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12) and 2-12) and "2-12 Temporary Temporary suspension of safety function" (page 2-27). 2-27). • When the Mode D is ap applied plied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4, two outputs for detection in protection zone, "detection in protection zone A" and "detection in protection zone B", can be set individually. individually. "Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18)

Time chart SZ

Detect no object Detect object

Output for detection in protection zone

ON OFF Res espo pons nse e tim time e (O (OFF to ON ON))

Note

Res espo pons nse e tim time e (O (OFF to ON ON))

The operation (ON/OFF state) of the load connected to the AUX output varies depending on the selected connector cable and connection with the external device. For more information, see "Overview of the AUX output" (page 2-35) 2-35)..

Output for detection in the warning zone 

S

M

V

D

You can make sure the operation for detection in the warning zone. The AUX output assigned for detection in warning zone goes to the OFF-state if the SZ is in any of the following situation. • In case where the SZ detects an object (someone or som something) ething) in the warning zone • In case wher where e the check input input goes to the ON-state ON-state "2-14 Check input function" (page 2-43) • In case wh where ere the SZ SZ is in the error error state "Error state" (page 8-2) Reference

• When the Mode D is ap applied plied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4, two outputs for detection in warning zone, "detection in warning zone A" and "detection in warning zone B", can be set individually. individually. "Multi-OSSD (page 2-18) • In case of SZ-16Vfunction" and SZ-1 SZ-16D, 6D, two outputs for detection in warning zone, "detection in warning zone 1" and "detection in warning zone 2", can be set individually. individually.

The time chart is the same for

"Output for detection in protection zone" (page 2-38). 2-38).

2-38

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-13

Interlock-reset-ready output

S

M

V

AUX (auxiliary) output

D

You can make sure whether the SZ is ready for start/restart during interloc interlockk condition or not. The interlock-reset-ready output goes to the ON-state if the SZ is ready for the start/restart star t/restart during interlock condition. At this moment, the SZ can starts/restarts the operation due to the termination of interlock condition if the reset operation is performed. The SZ is ready for the start/restart star t/restart if the following conditions are fulfilled. The SZ SZ detects de detects tects no object (someone (som eone or something) the protection pr zone •• The something at the reference point (inincase ofotection reference points monitoring monitoring activated) "2-9 Reference points monitoring function" (page 2-17) • The check iinput nput is in the the OFF-state OFF-state "2-14 Check input function" (page 2-43) • The SZ is not in the error error state "Error state" (page 8-2)  

Time chart SZ

Detect no object Detect object

ON

Interlock-resetready output

OFF

ON Reset input OFF 100 ms min. ON

Interlock condition

OSSD OFF Response time (ON to OFF)

Note

100ms max.

The operation (ON/OFF state) of the load connected to the AUX output varies depending on the selected connector cable and connection with the external device. For more information, see "Overview of the AUX output" (page 2-35) 2-35)..

Muted or override condition output

M

You can make sure whether the SZ is under the temporary suspension of safety function or not. The muted or override condition output goes to the ON-state if the SZ is under the temporary suspension of safety function, such as muting, suspension in teaching mode and override,  

Time chart ON OSSD

Suspended

Not suspended

OFF

Muted or override condition output

Note

ON OFF

The operation (ON/OFF state) of the load connected to the AUX output varies depending on the selected connector cable and connect.ion with the external device. For more information, see "Overview of the AUX output" (page 2-35) 2-35)..

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-39

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-13

AUX (auxiliary) output

Muting lamp output

2

M

The SZ can inform that it i t is under temporary suspension o off safety function through an exter external nal indicator, which is called the muting lamp. Since the SZ can assign the AUX 6 to the output for muting lamp, the SZ itself can control the muting lamp. The following conditions must be fulfilled if the muting lamp is connected connect ed to the AUX 6 assigned to the muting lamp output. - In case of incandescent lamp:DC 24 V, 1.0-5.5 W - In case of LED indicator:Current consumption 10-230 mA

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

You can receive alerts about muting lamp failure, such as the blowout of the lamp, disconnection or "State Information Output" overcurrent, through the alert output, error output or state information output. (page 2-41). 2-41).

You can define the performance of SZ under the muting lamp failure as either error (muting lamp error) or alert. The SZ goes to the error state in case of muting lamp failure in accordance with the default configuration. Note

You can assign the muting lamp output only to the AUX6. If you assign the AU AUX X 6 to the muting lamp output, the AUX 6 is always NPN output regardless of selection between PNP output type cable and NPN output type cable.

 

Time chart ON OSSD

Te mp mp or or ar ar ilil y s us us pe pe nd nde d

N ot ot te tem po po ra ra riri ly ly su sus pe pen de ded

OFF

Muting lamp output

ON OFF

For information about output circuit and a nd the wiring method, see 2-35).. 2-35)

"Overview of the AUX output" (page

2-40

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-13

State Information Output

M

V

AUX (auxiliary) output

D

The state information output is a function to inform the external device of the current state of the SZ through the two AUX outputs. The state information output 1 is assigned to the AUX output 1, while the state information output 2 is assigned to the AUX output 2. The state information output 1 is the strobe signal for information output. The state information output 2 is the informative pulse signal for exact state of the SZ. The state information output 1 goes to the ON-state if the SZ has a change on its state. While the state information output 1 is in the ON-state, the SZ generates the pulse signals on the state information output ou tput 2. If you count the pulses on the state information outputs, you can get the current state of the SZ. (The state information output 1 goes back to the OFF-state when the SZ is completed to generate the pulses on the state information output 2.) The following table shows the relationship between the th e number of pulse and the state of the SZ. You can use this function for monitoring the SZ operation through the PLC. Number of pulses from the state information output 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

SZ-04M

SZ-16V/SZ-16D

Normal operation Override condition Muted condition Suspension in teaching mode state Switch to bank1 Switch to bank2 Switch to bank3 Switch to bank4

Interlock condition

-

Bank switching*1 -

Waiting for bank input Alert for window Alert for light interference or high-reflective background Alert for muting lamp OSSD error EDM error Reset error Bank error Window error Check point error Muting lamp error Window calibration error System error State in configuration Configuration data error MI error Communication monitoring error (only for the SZ-16D)

*1 For the SZ-16V SZ-16V and SZ-16D, pul pulse se number 4 is gener generated ated in case of ban bankk switchin switching g and start. "Start-up" means 1) when the power is supplied, 2) when the SZ is restored from error state thorough reset input, and 3) when the configuration is completed through the SZ Configurator or the manual configuration on the SZ. Reference

For more information about the error state, see alert state, see "Alert state" (page 8-4). 8-4).

"Error state" (page 8-2) 8-2).. For more information about the

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-41

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-13

 

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

AUX (auxiliary) output

Time chart In case of muted condition (Same as in case of override and suspension in teaching mode) ON OSSD

Muted condition

Not muted condition

OFF

State information output 1

ON OFF

120 ms

120 ms A

State information output 2

A

ON OFF

A

A

A

Pulse 2 (Muted condition)

A

A

Pulse 1 (nor mal condition)

You can select the pulse width (A). Option is "20", "40", "60", "80", "100", "200" and "300". (Unit: millisecond, Default: 20 ms)

Note

The operation (ON/OFF state) of the load connected to the AUX output varies depending on the selected connector cable and connection with the external device. For more information, see AUX output" (page 2-35). 2-35).

Reference

"Overview of the

SZ Configurator must be used to assign the state information infor mation output to the AUX 1 and AUX 2, and to select the pulse width (A) of state information output 2.

2-42

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-14  Check input function

S

M

You can make sure whether the machine stops as intended or not because the OSSD can go to the OFF-state through the external signal (check input). There are two options, such as laser shutdown and check points monitoring. You must select either if you apply this function to the SZ. The yellow wire is assigned to the check input function. Note

In case of "Manual/Automatic" " Manual/Automatic" or "Manual/Manual" on the configuration of start/restart, you have no chance to apply the check input function to the SZ. "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12)

 

Input circuit and wiring For PNP output type cableFor NPN output type cable Brown

Brown

+24 V Main circuit

Main circuit

+24 V

Yellow (check input)

Yellow (check input) Blue

Blue

0V

0V

Input resistance 4.4 k Ω

Input resistance 4.4 kΩ

SZ configurator must be used to apply the check input function to the SZ.

Reference

Laser shutdown The laser radiation from the SZ stops while the OSSD is in the OFF-state due to the check input function.  

Time chart Detect no object SZ Detect object

Check input

ON OFF

ON Laser OFF 100 ms max.

ON OSSD OFF 100 ms max.

Reference

Response time (OFF to ON)

When trying to stop the laser projection of the multi-bank type (SZ-16V) and the communication type (SZ-16D), see "Laser Shutdown" (page 2-26). 2-26).

2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-43

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-14

Check input function

Check point monitoring

2

The check points monitoring works while the OSSD is in the OFF-state due to the check input function. You can make sure su re the displacement of the surrounding structure (ex. protective safeguarding), the displacement of the SZ itself and the detection of the SZ. The check input function has three of following features. • You can make sure the state of the specified check points while the check input is in the ON-state. • The SZ goes to the error state of "check point error" unless the SZ detects detects something at the check point while the check input is in the ON-state. • The OSSD goes to tthe he OFF-state while the check input is in the ON-state. (Laser radiation continues.)

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

 

Check point The point that the SZ check the positioning of the surrounding structure is named as "Check point". The Th e following figure is an example that the 2 check points (A and B) is set to the surrounding structure. Setting example for check points Protection zone A Structure B

SZ

Note

In case of check point monitoring applied, you have no chance to apply the reference points monitoring function.

"2-9 Reference points monitoring function" (page 2-17) Reference

 

• SZ configurator must be used used to apply the check input function to the SZ. • Max Maximum imum 30 30 check points points can be set. set. • For mor more e information about about the error error state, see "Error state" (page 8-2). 8-2).

Time chart In case where the SZ does not go to the error state of "Check point error" Detect no object SZ Detect object Dectect no structure Detection of check point

Detect structure ON

Check input OFF ON OSSD OFF

100 ms max.

100 ms max.

In case where the SZ goes to the error state of "Check point error" SZ

Detect no object Detect object Dectect no structure

Detection of check point

Detect structure ON

Check input OFF

100 ms min.

ON

Check point error condition

OSSD OFF

100 ms max.

100 ms max.

2-44

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-15  Monitoring function 

S

M

V

D

You can monitor the state of SZ operation through the information display on the SZ or the SZ Configurator.

: Available -: Not available



Function

I/O monitoring Wiring check

 

 

Protection zone monitoring Warning zone monitoring OSSD OFF History

 

SZ

SZ configuration software









  *1



  *1







Real-time ranging

-

 



AUX output test

-

 



2 You You can check the ON/OFF state on each inputs and AUX outputs. You You can check the pin No., color and function on connector cable. You can check whether the S SZ Z detects an object in the protection zone. You can check whether the S SZ Z detects an object in the warning zone. You can check the time and reason for the OSSD OFF. Maximum 20 events can be checked in the history after power-on. You You can check the surrounding structures detected by SZ in real time. You can check the operation of AUX output through the switching between ON-state and OFF-state with the simulation basis.

*1 The multi-bank type (SZ-16V) ( SZ-16V) and the communication type (SZ-16D) cannot be monitored from the main body.

Note

Reference

If both protection zone and warning zone are a re configured through the SZ Configurator, Configurator, you cannot perform the protection zone monitoring and warning zone monitoring on the SZ itself.

For more information about use, see "Chapter 5 Manual Configuration on the SZ" (page 5-1) and 5-1) and "Chapter 6 Configuration through the configuration software" (page 6-1). 6-1).

F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

2-45

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

2-16  RS-422A Communication Function 2 F   u n  c  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  F   e  a  t    u r   e  s

D

Using the RS-422A communication, information such as the measuring distance data, the OSSD output ON/OFF status, or the error status from within the measuring range of the SZ-16D can be received. Also, the warning area can be changed.. The SZ-16D has a maximum of 4 multi-drop connections. For details on the communication function of the RS-422A, refer to the "SZ-16D communication manual".

Danger

Note

All of the data received from the communication of the RS-422A cannot be used from the safety control system. When used in error, there is a possibility that the operator of the device may be threatened with major injury injur y or even death.

If using the USB port, information such as the measuring distance information (measured distance data) from within the measuring range of the SZ-16D, the OSSD output ON/OFF status, or the error condition will not be received. Also, the warning range cannot be changed. For models other than the SZ-16D, the RS-422A communication function is not possible.

External devices such as the computer

SZ-16D (Up to 4 units can have a multi-drop connection)

2-46

SZ-M-NO2-E

 

3  Installation to a Machine

33-1 1

Prec Precau auti tion on at at inst instal alla lati tion on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-2

3-2

Hint Hint on instal installat lation ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

33-3 3

Safe Safety ty dis dista tanc nces es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 3-7

3-4

Mounti Mounting ng for for inst install allati ation. on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3-13

3-1

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-1

Precaution at installation

Danger

3

•

I   n

 a  t    s l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

•

•

•

•

•

The protection zone must be configured so as to ensure the minimum safety distance, which has been calculated according to the laws, regulations, and standards of the country and region in which the SZ is installed. "3-3 Safety distances" (page 3-7) When either multi-OSSD function or bank switching function is enabled, every protection zone must be configured so as to ensure the minimum safety distance, which has been calculated according to the laws, regulations, and standards of the country and region in which the SZ is installed. "3-3 Safety distances" (page 3-7) The necessary safety distance varies depending on the minimum detectable object size and the response time you specify specify.. The protection zone must be configured so as to setensure the minimum safety distance, which has been calculated according to the laws, regulations, and standards of the country and region in which the SZ is installed. "3-3 Safety distances" (page 3-7) SZ cannot monitor anything behind the object that the SZ detects in the protection zone. (This is a blind area for the SZ.) The responsible personnel must perform the risk assessment with taking into account this factor in case of installation of the SZ. If necessary, the additional countermeasure must be taken by the responsible personnel. The SZ must be installed so that the machine operator is able to go into or approach the hazardous zone or hazards only by passing through the protection zone of the SZ. Strictly avoid installation that allows the machine operator or a part of the machine operator's body to go into or approach the hazardous zone or hazards without passing through the protection zone of the SZ or to remain in a position between the protection zone of the SZ and the hazardous zone or hazard. You must prepare the test piece with the intended minimum detectable object size in order to verify the protection zone in accordance with the pre-check test procedures, such as the item specified in this manual, after installing the SZ.

3-2

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-2  Hint on installation Light interference Although there is no object in the protection zone, the OSSD might go to the OFF-state if the ambient light source as shown in below is located at the detection plane, because the SZ performs the false detection. • Inc Incand andesc escent ent lamp lamp • Sunl Sunlig ight ht • Flu Fluore oresce scent nt light • Strobe Strobe light light • Other infrared light sources (infrared photoelectric sensor sensor,, infrared laser, laser, etc.) In order to avoid this situation, the ambient light source should not be located within ±5° of the detection plane. Ambient light source

Protection zone origin

o

5  or more o

Detection plane

5  or more Ambient light source

Mutual interference The OSSD might go to the OFF-state due to mutual interference if you insta installll multiple SZ. The SZ should be installed according to the following countermeasures in order to avoid mutual interference. (1) A shielding plate should be installed like below. Shielding plate

A

B

(1-2) 2)

(3- 4) 3-4)

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

( 1- 2) ( 3- 4)

OSSD INTERLOCK

OSSD

IS-053M

INTERLOCK

MARNING

IS-053M

MARNING

MUTING (SUSPENTION)

MUTING (SUSPENTION)

Esc S AF  E   E T  

Enter Y 

LASER

 R A N N E  S CA  S C

Esc S AF S A FE    T  Y  E T   Y 

Enter LASER

 R A N N E  CA  S C

3 I   n

 a  s  t   l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

3-3

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-2

Hint on installation

(2) The height of installation installati on should be changed like below.

Detection plane

3

o

5  or more I   n

 a  t    s l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

1 / 2 3 / 4 OSSD

SZ-04M

INTERLOCK A

B

WARNING MUTING (SUSPENTION)

Esc

Detection plane

S AF E  T 

Enter Y 

LASER

 E R  CA A N N  S  C

1/23/4 OSSD

SZ-04M

INTERLOCK NTERLOCK A

B

WARNING MUTING (SUSPENTION)

Esc S AF   S AF E T E  T  Y    Y 

Enter LASER  S

 N N ER  CA  CA

o

5  or more

(3) The angle of installation should be changed like below. Detection plane

5 o o  orr m ore

5 o or more

The following countermeasures may be taken into account in order to reduce the possibility of the mutual interference. • The scan cycle can can be changed. changed. "2-6 Response time and scan cycle" (page 2-11) • The respo response nse time can be slower slower. "2-6 Response time and scan cycle" (page 2-11) • The minimum detectable object size can be smaller. smaller. "2-3 Protection zone" (page 2-6) • The prote protection ction zone can be smaller smaller.. "2-3 Protection zone" (page 2-6)

Danger

You must calculate the minimum safety distance again in order to reinstall the SZ with appropriate safety distance if you want to apply the above countermeasure .

3-4

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-2

Hint on installation

High reflective background The SZ performs false detection for the actual distance to the object if there is a high reflective background at the detection plane. In this case, the SZ falsely recognizes that the object is located farther than the actual distance to the object. Therefore, if there is a high reflective background within 1.5 m from the boundary of the protection zone, you must take a countermeasure, such as reducing the reflectance or removing the background itself. However, if you cannot take the above-mentioned countermeasures, another 200 mm must be added as supplementary necessary distance to the protection zone in case of calculation of the minimum safety distance. Protection zone Supplementary necessary distance of another 200 mm is needed if there is a high reflective background in this area. SZ

Danger

1.5m

If there is a high reflective background within 1.5 m from the boundary of the protection zone, you must take a countermeasure, such as reducing the reflectance or removing the background itself. If you cannot take the above-mentioned countermeasures, another 200 mm  must be added as supplementary necessary distance to the protection zone in case of calculation of the minimum safety distance.

The SZ goes to the alert aler t state (Alert for high-reflective background) if it detects the high reflective background. For more information about the alert state, see "Alert state" (page 8-4). 8-4). Reference

Examples of high reflective backgrounds Metallic glossy surface Retro-reflective Retro-reflectiv e sheet Retro-reflective plate etc… • •

•

3 I   n

 s  t    a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

3-5

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-2

Hint on installation

Zone with limited detection capability SZ might not detect an object with low reflectance located loc ated at the distance of 85 mm or less from the protection zone origin. This is the zone with limited detection capability. capability.

3 I   n  t    s  a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

Protection zone origin

85 mm

Danger

In case of installation of the SZ, the responsible personnel must perform the risk assessment with taking into account the possibility that an object might go into the zone with limited detection capability. If it is possible, the additional countermeasure must be taken by the responsible personnel.

Other When the reflection of the detection object or the background area that cannot be detected exceeds 60°, an error will occur and [MI Error] will be displayed. This function is to prevent the detection of people from interfering with the objects that emit very little reflection when very close to the SZ.

3-6

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-3  Safety distances The protection zone must be configured so as to ensure the minimum safety distance, which has been calculated according to the laws, regulations, standards of the country countr y and region in which the SZ is installed as well as the specification specified in this user's manual.

Example of area protection (Direction of approach parallel to the protection zone) Top view of the machine

Side view of the machine

Machine

Hazardous zone

A S

Machine B

P2

Hazardous zone

Detection plane W1 H W2 Floor, etc.

P3 Hazar-

S

When there is cover above the SZ  

dous zone A

Machine

P1

D B

S

A

B Detection plane

H

Protection zone

Floor, etc.

S = K x T + C + A < According According to ISO13855 (2005) and IEC61496-3 (2008) > S: Safety distance K: Approach speed of the body or parts of the body in millimeters millimeters per second T: Overall Response time in second (t1 + t2) t1: SZ response response time in second t2: Max. time in second required to stop the machine after receiving the OSSD signal from SZ C: 1200 - 0.4 x H (850 mm or higher) H: Height of detection plane (protection zone) above the reference plane in millimeters, millimeters, for example the floor. 1000 mm ≥ H ≥ 15 x (d-50) d: SZ minimum detectable object size in millimeters millimeters A: Supplementary necessary distance for SZ in millimeters P1, P2, P3: Protection distances to be be configured as the protection protection zones W1, W2: Width of the hazardous area B: Distance between the edge of the hazardous area and protection zone origin on the SZ D: Unprotected space

3 I   n  s  t    a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

3-7

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-3

Safety distances

Danger

•

3 I   n  t    s  a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

•

•

 

The unprotected space (D) between the protection zone and the protective structure must be less than the minimum detectable object size when the SZ is installed, in order to prevent the machine operators from approaching into the hazardous area through this space (D). Additional countermeasures for protection must be provided if there is a space (D) between the protection zone and the protective structure that the minimum detectable object is not detected by the SZ.

There a risk of inadvertent undetected beneath detection plane zone), is if the height "H" of detection plane access (protection zone)the is greater than 300(protection mm (200 mm for non-industrial application, for example in the presence of children). The responsible personnel must perform the risk assessment with taking into account this factor in case of installation of the SZ. If necessary, the additional countermeasure must be taken by the responsible personnel. If you select the minimum detectable object size of 150 mm, "H" (Height of detection plane) exceeds 1,000 mm. You must select the minimum detectable object size of 70 mm or less if you want to configure the area protection (direction of approach parallel to the protection zone.).

Example of safety distance calculation K = 1600 mm/sApproach speed of the body or parts of o f the body (Constant) T = t1+t2 = 0.59 sOverall sOverall response time time  t1 = 0.09 secondsSZ response time (Changeable)  t2 = 0.5 secondsMax. time required to stop the machine after receiving the OSSD signal from SZ C = 1200-0.4 x H = 1080 mm H = 300 mmLowest allowable height of detection plane (protection zone). This must be calculated using the following formula: H ≥ 15 (d – 50 mm) d = 70 mmMinimum detectable object size (Changeable) A = 100 mmSupplementary necessary distance for SZ B = 59 mmDistance between the edge of the hazardous area and protection zone origin on the SZ W1 = W2 = 1000 mmWidth of the hazardous area Safety Distances S=KxT+C+A   = 1600 x 0.59 + 1080 + 100 = 2124 mm Protection distances to be configured as the protection zones P1 = S - B = 2065 mm P2 = S + W1 = 3124 mm P3 = S + W2 = 3124 mm If there is a high reflective background within 1.5 m from the boundary of the protection zone, another 200 mm must be added as supplementary necessary distance to the P1, P2 and P3 respectively. "High reflective background" (page 3-5) We recommend you should have a marking on the floor for indicating the specified protection zone.

3-8

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-3

Safety distances

Example of access protection 1 (Direction of approach normal to the protection zone)

Danger

•

•

•

Reference points monitoring function must be applied when the SZ is used for the access protection specified in IEC61496-3:2008 Annex A.12 and A.13 (the application where the angle of the approach exceeds ±30° to the detection plane.). In this case, the tolerance for refer"2-9 reference enceReference points must be ±100 mm or function" less and (page the respons response points monitoring 2-17) e time must be 90 ms or less. The unprotected space between the protection zone and the protective structure must be less than the minimum detectable object size when the SZ is installed, in order to prevent the machine operators from approaching into the hazardous area through this space. Additional countermeasures for protection must be provided if there is a space between the protection zone and the protective structure that the minimum detectable object is not detected by the SZ. According to GB 19436.3-2008, "if the maximum distance between the AOPDDR and the reference boundary is greater than 4.0 m, displacement of the detection zone greater than 100 mm shall be detected." In order to comply with this requirement for SZ, this may be achieved by limiting the width of the objects of the reference point to ≤200 mm. For the case where the maximum protection distance of the protection zone is over 4.0 m, this limitation must be followed.

Front view of the machine SZ Enclosure protection 1

Side view of the machine

Protection zone Enclosure protection 2

Protection zone

Enclosure protection

S

Floor

Hazardous zone

Unprotected space Reference Points (6 points)

S = (K x T) + C < According to ISO13855 (2005) and IEC61496-3 (2008)> S: K: T: t1: t2: C:  

Minimu Minimum m safet safetyy dista distance nce in in milli millimet meters ers Approach Approach speed speed of the the body body or parts parts of the body in in millimete millimeters rs per second second Overall Overall respon response se time time in secon second d (t1 (t1 + t2) t2) SZ response time in second Max. time in second required to stop the machine after receiving the OSSD signal from SZ. Additiona Additionall distance in millim millimeters, eters, taking taking into accounts accounts the intrusion intrusion prior to actuation actuation of protective protective equipment.

Example of safety distance calculation K = 1600 mm/sApproach speed of the body or parts of o f the body T = t1+t2 = 0.59 sOverall response time t1 = 0.09 secondsSZ response time (Changeable) t2 = 0.5 secondsMax. time required to stop the machine after receiving the OSSD signal from SZ C = 850 mm detectable S = dK =x 70 T +mmMinimum C = 1600 x 0.59 + 850 =object 1794 size mm

3 I   n  s  t    a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

3-9

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-3

Safety distances

Example of access protection 2 (In case of approaching of the body or parts of the body to the hazardous area)

Danger

3 I   n  t    s  a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

•

•

•

Reference points monitoring function must be applied when the SZ is used for the access protection specified in IEC61496-3:2008 Annex A.12 and A.13 (the application where the angle of the approach exceeds ±30° to the detection plane). In this case, the tolerance for reference points must be ±100 mm or function" less and (page the response "2-9 Reference points monitoring 2-17) time muse be 90ms or less. If you configure the protection zone in order to protect the opening of the machine through which the machine operator can approach the hazardous area (hereinafter called as "opening to the hazard"), you must configure the protection zone with the additional width indicated by "a", "b" and "c" as shown in below figure, which is to be larger than the opening to the hazard. In case of the application for detection of hand and arm approaching into the hazardous area, the minimum detectable object size must be 30 mm or 40 mm.

Front view of the machine a

Side view of the machine b

SZ

Protection Hazard

zone

S

Hazard

c

Reference Points (6 points)

S = (K x T) + C < According to ISO13855 (2005) and IEC61496-3 (2008)> S: Minim inimum um safe safety ty dis ista tanc nce e iin n mil millilim met eter erss K: Appr Approa oach ch spe speed ed of of the the body body or or parts parts of of the the body body in in mill millim imet eters ers per per seco second nd T: Over Overal alll res respo pons nse e ttim ime e iin n sec secon ond d (t1 (t1 + t2) t2) t1: SZ response response time time in second second t2: Max. time in in second required required to stop the machine after receiving the OSSD OSSD signal from SZ. C: Additional Additional distance distance in millimete millimeterr, taking into accounts accounts the intrusion intrusion prior to actuation actuation of protective protective equipment. {8 x (d-14)} d: SZ minim minimum um detectab detectable le object object size size in millimeter millimeters. s. a, b, c:Width of protection zone in millimeters that covers the outside of opening to the hazard.This must be more than {100-d/2} mm.  

Example of safety distance calculation K = 2000 mm/sApproach speed of the parts of the body, body, such as hand and arm. ar m. T = t1+t2 = 0.18sOverall 0.18sOvera ll response time t1 = 0.06 secondsSZ response time (Changeable) t2 = 0.12 secondsMax. time required to stop the machine after receiving the OSSD signal from SZ C = 8 x (d-14) = 128 mm d = 30 mmMinimum detectable object size S = K x T + C = 2000 x 0.18 + 128 = 488 mm Note If "S" is found to be greater than 500 mm using this formula, you can use "K=1,600 mm/s". However, However, the minimum value of "S" shall not be less than 500 mm.

3-10

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-3

Safety distances

Example of installing to an AGV (automat (automated ed guided vehicle) S

3

Z

B

Z

AGV AGV SZ

Detection plane

W1

P2

SZ

D H

W2

h

P3

Floor Z P1

S = V x T + S brake x L + Z S: Minimu Minimum m safet safetyy dista distance nce in in milli millimet meters ers V: Maximum Maximum appr approach oach speed speed of the AGV AGV in millimeter millimeterss per second second T: Overall Overall respon response se time time in secon second d (t1 (t1 + t2) t2) t1: SZ response time in second t2: Max. time in second that AGV responds after receiving the OSSD signal from SZ. Sbrake: Required distance for braking AGV in millimeters L: Safety Safety coefficien coefficientt for requir required ed distance distance based on the wear of of braking braking Z: Additi Additiona onall dista distance nce in in milli millimet meters ers,, ZSZ+ZG (mm) ZSZ:Supplementary necessary distance for SZ in millimeters ZG:Supplementary necessary distance in millimeters, if "h" is not enough. h:Space between the reference plane (floor) and the bottom of AGV. AGV. If the "h" is not enough ensured, you must take into account the risk that the toe or toe tip is caught between the ground (floor) and the AGV. AGV. The relationship between "h" and "ZG" is as follows. h (mm) 120

60 50

0

50

100

150

Z G (mm)

P1, P2, P3: Protection distances to be configured as the protection zones W1, W2: Width of the AGV B: Distance between the front edge of the SZ and protection zone origin on the SZ D: Unprotected space H: Height of detection plane (protection zone) above the reference plane in millimeters, for example the floor.. "H" must be less than 200 floor 20 0 mm.

I   n  s  t    a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

3-11

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-3

Safety distances

Danger

•

3 I   n  t    s  a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

•

The unprotected space (D) between the protection zone and the protective structure must be less than the minimum detectable object size when the SZ is installed, in order to prevent the machine operators from approaching into the hazardous area through this space (D) when the AGV stops. Additional countermeasures for protection must be provided if there is a space (D) between the protection zone and the protective structure that the minimum detectable object is not detected by the SZ. There is a risk of inadvertent undetected access beneath the detection plane (protection zone), if the height "H" of detection plane (protection zone) is greater than 200 mm. However, the height "H" should be 150 mm or more in order to detect the object with the height of 150 mm. The responsible personnel must perform the risk assessment with taking into account this factor in case of installation of the SZ. If necessar necessary y, the additional countermeasure must be taken by the responsible personnel.

Example of safety distance calculation V = 1500 mm/s T = t1+t2 = 0.19 sOverall response time t1 = 0.09 secondsSZ response time (Changeable) t2 = 0.1 secondsMax. time in second that AGV responds after receiving the OSSD signal from SZ. Sbrake = 1,300 mmRequired distance for braking AGV in millimeters L 1. 1 +ZG = 100+100 Safet afetyy coe coef ffi fici cien ent t ffor or requi equirreddistance di dist stan ance ceinba base sed d on on the the(mm), wear ear of of b bra raki king ng Z= = 1.1 ZSZ = 200 mmAdditional millimeters ZSZ = 100 mmSupplementary necessary distance for SZ in millimeters ZG = 100 mmSupplementary necessary distance in millimeters, if "h" is not enough. h = 60 mm Space between the reference plane (floor) and the bottom bottom of AGV. AGV. B = 45 mm mm Distan Distance ce betw between een the front front edge edge of the the SZ SZ and and pr protec otectio tion n zone zone orig origin in on on the the SZ SZ W1 = W2 = 1,000 mmWidth of AGV

Safety Distances S = V x T + Sbrake x L + Z = 1,500 x 0.19 + 1,300 x 1.1 + 200 = 1,915 mm Protection distances to be configured as the protection zones P1 = S + B = 1,960 mm P2 = W1 + Z = 1,200 mm P3 = W2 + Z = 1,200 mm If there is a high reflective background within 1.5 m from the boundary of the protection zone, 200 mm must"High be added as supplementary necessary reflective background" (page 3-5) distance to the P1, P2 and P3 respectively.

3-12

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-4  Mounting for installation Danger

Reference

Losing the screw caused by the vibration or shock to the SZ must be avoided. It may cause the displacement of detection plane of the SZ. Failure to follow this warning may result in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death.

For more information about the dimensions of SZ or the mounting bracket, see . (page 9-5)

"9-3 Dimensions"

Wall mounting You can use four screw holes on the backside of the SZ for installation. Purchase the appropriate screws separately.  (Recommended tightening torque: 3 N·m) 4-M5 x 0.8, Depth 9 mm

Mounting with horizontal mounting bracket (OP-86935) You can install the SZ with horizontal ho rizontal mounting bracket, which is suitable for the place with low height. (1) You can use four hexagon socket bolts (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm, attached with the bracket.) in case where the horizontal mounting bracket is mounted to the SZ as shown in below figure.  (Recommended tightening torque: 3 N·m)

(2) You You can install the SZ with horizontal hor izontal mounting bracket to the intended place. The M6 screws (4 screws) are necessary for installation of SZ itself, which can be prepared on your side.

3 I   n  s  t    a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

3-13

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-4

Mounting for installation

Mounting with vertical mounting bracket (OP-86936)

3 I   n  t    s  a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

You can install the SZ with vertical ver tical mounting bracket, which is suitable for the place with narrow width. (1) You You can use four hexagon he xagon socket bolts (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm, attached with the bracket.) in case where the vertical ver tical mounting bracket is mounted to the SZ as shown in below figure. (Recommended tightening torque: 3 N·m)

(2) You can install the SZ with vertical mounting bracket to the intended in tended place. The M6 screws (2 screws) are necessary for installation of SZ itself, which can be prepared on your side.

Mounting with horizontal mounting bracket with angle alignment (OP-86937) You can install the SZ with horizontal mounting bracket with angle alignment, which is suitable for the place with low height. Additionally, you can align the vertical angle of detection plane with ±7.5 degrees and the horizontal angle of detection plane with ±7.5 degrees. (1) You You can use four hexagon he xagon socket bolts (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm, attached with the bracket.) in case where the mounting bracket 1 is mounted to the SZ as sshown hown in below figure. (Recommended tightening torque: 3 N·m) You should care the mounting direction to the SZ for the mounting bracket 1. (2) You can use four hexagon hexa gon socket bolts (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm, attached with the bracket.) in case where two mounting bracket 2 are mounted to the mounting bracket 1 as shown in below figure. (Temporary (Temporary joint) (3) You can install the SZ with this mounting bracket to the intended place. The M6 screws (4 screws) are necessary for installation of SZ itself, which can be prepared on your side. (Temporary joint) (4) You can align the vertical and/or horizontal angle of detection plane, and then tighten the all screws accordingheight to thefrom specified tightening torque. You sure the detection plane keeps the intended the reference plane overYou themust wholemake protection zone.(Recommended tightening torque: 3 N·m) Front view

Rear view

Mounting bracket 2 Mounting bracket 1

3-14

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-4

Mounting for installation

Mounting with vertical mounting bracket with angle alignment (OP-86938) You can install the SZ with vertical mounting bracket with angle alignment, which is suitable for the place with narrow width. Additionally, Additionally, you can align the ver vertical tical angle of detection plane with ±7. ±7.5 5 degrees and the horizontal angle of detection plane with ±7.5 degrees. (1) You can use four hexagon socket bolts (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm, attached with the bracket.) in case where the mounting bracket 1 is mounted to the SZ as shown in below figure. (Recommended tightening torque: 3 N·m) You should care the mounting direction to the SZ for the mounting bracket 1.

(2) You can use four hexagon socket bolts (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm, attached with the bracket.) in case where the mounting bracket 2 is mounted to the mounting bracket 1 as shown in below figure. (Temporary joint)

(3) You can install the SZ with this mounting bracket to the intended place. The M6 screws (4 screws) are necessary for installation of SZ itself, which can be prepared on your side. (Temporary joint) (4) You can align the vertical and/or horizontal angle of detection plane, and then tighten the all screws according to the specified tightening torque. You You must make sure the detection plane keeps the intended height from the reference plane over the whole protection zone. Front view

Rear view

Mounting bracket 2

Mounting bracket 1

Mounting with L-shaped mounting moun ting bracket with angle alignment (OP-86939) You can install the SZ with L-shaped mounting bracket with angle alignment, which is suitable for the installation on the reference plane, such as a floor. Add Additionally itionally,, you can align the vertical angle of detection plane with ±7.5 degrees. (1) You can use eight hexagon socket bolts (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm, attached with the bracket.) in case where the mounting bracket 1 is mounted to the SZ as shown in below figure. (Recommended tightening torque: 3 N·m) You should care the mounting direction to the SZ for the mounting bracket 1.

(2) You You can use four hexagon he xagon socket bolts (M5, length: 10 mm, width across flats: 4 mm, attached with the bracket.) in case where two mounting bracket 2 are mounted to the mounting bracket 1 as shown in below figure. (Temporary (Temporary joint) (3) You You can install the SZ with this mounting bracket to the intended place. The M6 screws (4 screws) are necessary for installation of SZ itself, which can be prepared on your side. (4) You You can align the vertical ver tical angle of detection plane, and then tighten the all screws according to the specified tightening torque. You must make sure the detection plane keeps the intended height from from the reference plane over the whole protection zone. (Recommended tightening torque: 3 N·m) Front view

Rear view

Mounting bracket 2 Mounting bracket 1

3 I   n  s  t    a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

3-15

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

3-4

Mounting for installation

MEMO

3 I   n  t    s  a l   l    a  t   i    o n  t    o  a M  a  c h  i   n  e

3-16

SZ-M-NO3-E

 

4  Wiring

44-1 1

Prec Precau auti tion ons s on wi wirin ring g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4-2

44-2 2

Power ower sup suppl ply y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4-3

44-3 3

Moun Mounti ting ng the the c con onne nect ctor or c cab able le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4-4

44-4 4

Wire Wire col color or a and nd ass assig igne ned d fu func ncti tion on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 4-5

44-5 5

Exam Exampl ples es of of wirin wiring g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 4-9

4-6

Input Input / out output put cir circui cuitt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 4-20

4-1

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-1

Precautions on wiring

Danger

4

W i   r  i   n  g

• Alwa Always ys turn off the pow power er to the SZ when perf performing orming ele electrical ctrical wi wiring. ring. • You must fulfill the electrical standards and regulations in the country or region in which the SZ is being used when you perform the electrical wiring. • To avoid the risk of electric shock, do not connect any of the SZ inputs to DC power power sources outside of the range of 24 V DC +20% or to any AC power source. • To avoid the risk of electric shock, be sure that the hazardous voltage voltage must be isolated fr from om all wiring of the SZ with the reinforced insulation or double insulation. • Do not install the electric wiring of the SZ togeth together er with or in parallel parallel with the high-v high-voltage oltage electrical or power lines. • For the wiring between SZ and a safetysafety-related related machine control system, both OSSD 1 and OSSD 2 must be always wired to a safety-related machine control system in order to ensure the safety. safety. Similarly, both OSSD 3 and OSSD 4 must be always wired to a safety-related control system if you assign a function for OSSD 3/4. If one OSSD is only wired to a safetyrelated machine control system, it results in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death, due to OSSD malfunction • When using P PNP NP output type cable, do not cause short-circuit between the OSSD and and +24 V. V. Otherwise, OSSDs keep staying at the ON-state and it causes a dangerous situation. • When using PNP output type cable cable,, be sure to connect the load between the OSSD and

• •

•

•

•

•

Note

0 V to avoid a dangerous situation. If the load is incorrectly connected between the OSSD and +24 V, V, the logic of OSSD operation is reversed, and then OSSD turns to the ON-state. This is a dangerous situation. When using NPN output type cable, do not cause short-circuit between between the OSSD and 0 V. Otherwise, OSSDs keep staying at the ON-state and it causes a dangerous situation. When using NPN output type cable cable,, be sure to connect the load between the OSSD a and nd + 24 V to avoid dangerous situation. If the load is incorrectly connected between the OSSD and 0 V, V, the logic of OSSD operation is reversed, and then OSSD turns to the ON-state. This is a dangerous situation. In case of wiring, regardless of PNP output type cable and NPN output type cable, you must fulfill the requirements of Clause 9.4.3 in IEC60204-1: 2005 in order for the protection against maloperation due to ear th fault of the OSSD. The A AUX UX output is not allowed to be used as a saf safety ety output for safety-related contr control ol systems. Usage of these functions as safety output could result in the serious injury i njury or death. The check input is not allowed to be connected to the safety output pro provided vided from the safety-related control system. If the check input is connected to the safety output, it may result in significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury injur y or death. The connector cab cable le must hav have e a length less than or equal to the specification in this user's manual. Usage of connector cables longer than the specified length may cause the improper operation of safety functions and may cause a dangerous situation.

• The NPN out output put cable shield is con connected nected to +24 V inside the SZ. W When hen wiring, do not connect the shield to 0 V.  is connected to 0 V inside the SZ. When wiring, do not connect the shield • The PN PNP P out output put ca cable ble shie shield ld is to + 24 V.

4-2

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-2  Power supply supply If the power supply for the SZ is the converting type, the power supply for the SZ must meet the conditions listed below in order to meet the requirements specified in IEC61496-1, UL61496-1, and EN61496-1. • A rated output voltage of 24 V DC (SELV (SELV circuit, Overvoltage Category Category II) within ±10% . • Double insulation or reinforced insulation between the primary primary and secondary circuits. • Output ho holding lding time time of 20 ms or more. more. • A power supply must meet the requirements requirements of the electrical safety and electromagnetic compatibili compatibility ty (EMC) regulations or standards in all countries and/or regions where the SZ is used. Note

If the power supply for the SZ is shared with the one for the machine or the other electronic devices, voltage reduction to the SZ or noise influence to the SZ may occur due to the temporary increasing of the current consumption on the machine or the other electronic devices. Since the SZ may go to the error state in such case, the power supply for the SZ should only be shared with the one for the load and muting devices. We do not recommend the power supply for the SZ is shared with the one for the machine or the other electronic devices.

4

W i   r  i   n  g

4-3

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-3  Mounting the connector cable Reference

Note

For more information about the shape or model of the connector cable, see "Connector cable" (page 1-6). 1-6).

Do not remove the gray gasket mounted on the connector. con nector. The specification of IP65 cannot be fulfilled without this gasket.

4

W i   r  i   n  g

 

How to mount As shown in the figures below, you can use the M2.6 screws s crews (2 screws) to mount the connector cable, and tighten the screws according to the specified tightening torque. (Recommended tightening torque: 0.3 N·m) 1.

2.

M2.6 screws Recommended tightening torque: 0.3 N.m Minimum cable bending radius: 5 mm

PNP output type cable: Black NPN output type cable: Gray

 

Removal You can perform perfor m the removal of the connector cable ca ble in reverse order.

4-4

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-4  Wire color and assigned function SZ-01S Wire color

Brown Blue Black White Yellow Red Orange Orange/Black

Function

+24 V 0V OSSD1 OSSD2 Input 1:Reset input / Check input Input 2:EDM input AUX output 1 AUX output 2

SZ-04M  

Multi-OSSD function: Mode D (1) In case of applying the bank switching function Wire color

Brown Blue Black White Gray Gray/Black Yel ello low w Red Light Blue Ligh Li ghtt Blu Blue/ e/Bl Blac ackk Yel ello low/ w/Bl Blac ackk Red/B d/Black Orange Orange/Black Pink Pink/Black Green Green/Black

Function

+24 V 0V OSSD1 OSSD2 OSSD3 OSSD4 In Inpu putt 1: 1:R Rese eset inpu inputt (f (for or OS OSSD SD1/ 1/2) 2) / Ch Chec eckk inpu inputt Input 2:EDM input (for OSSD1/2) Input 3:Bank input 1 Inpu Inputt 4:B 4:Ban ankk in inpu putt 2 Inpu Inputt 5 5:R :Res eset et in inpu putt (fo (forr O OSS SSD3 D3/4 /4)) Input 6: 6:EDM iin nput ((ffor O OS SSD3/4) AUX output 1 AUX output 2 AUX output 3 AUX output 4 AUX output 5 AUX output 6

4

W i   r  i   n  g

4-5

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-4

Wire color and assigned function

(2) In case of NOT applying applying the bank switching switching function Wire color

Brown Blue Black White Gray Gray/Black Yel ello low w Red Light Blue Ligh Li ghtt Blu Blue/ e/Bl Blac ackk Yel ello low/ w/Bl Blac ackk Red/B d/Black Orange Orange/Black Pink Pink/Black Green Green/Black

4

W i   r  i   n  g

 

Function

+24 V 0V OSSD1 OSSD2 OSSD3 OSSD4 In Inpu putt 1: 1:R Reset eset inpu inputt (f (for or OS OSSD SD1/ 1/2) 2) / Ch Chec eckk inpu inputt Input 2:EDM input (for OSSD1/2) Input 3:Not use Inpu Inputt 4:N 4:Not ot use use Inpu Inputt 5 5:R :Res eset et in inpu putt ((fo forr O OSS SSD3 D3/4 /4)) Input 6: 6:EDM iin nput ((ffor O OS SSD3/4) AUX output 1 AUX output 2 AUX output 3 AUX output 4 AUX output 5 AUX output 6

Multi-OSSD function: Mode A, B, C and Not use (1) In case of applying the bank switching function Wire color

Brown Blue Black White Gray Gray/Black Yellow Red Light Blue Ligh Li ghtt Blu Blue/ e/Bl Blac ackk Yellow low/Black Re Red/ d/Bl Blac ackk Orange Orange/Black Pink Pink/Black Green Green/Black

Note

Function

+24 V 0V OSSD1 OSSD2 OSSD3 OSSD4 Input 1:Reset input / Check input Input 2:EDM input (for OSSD1/2) Input 3:Bank input 1 Inpu Inputt 4:B 4:Ban ankk in inpu putt 2 Input 5:Bank in input 3 Inpu Inputt 6:ED 6:EDM M in inpu putt (f (for or OSSD OSSD3/ 3/4/ 4/Ba Bank nk in inpu putt 4 4)) AUX output 1 AUX output 2 AUX output 3 AUX output 4 AUX output 5 AUX output 6

When "Not use" is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4, the gray and gray/black wire is always the OFF-state. Further, red/black is assigned to bank input 4 in this case.

4-6

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-4

Wire color and assigned function

(2) In case of applying applying the muting muting function Wire color

Brown Blue Black White Gray Gray/Black Yellow Red Light Blue Ligh Lightt Blue Blue/B /Bla lack ck Yel ello low/ w/B Black lack Red/B d/Black Orange Orange/Black Pink Pink/Black Green Green/Black

Note

Function

+24 V 0V OSSD1 OSSD2 OSSD3 OSSD4 Input 1:Reset input / Check input Input 2:EDM input (for OSSD1/2) Input 3:Muting input 1 Inpu Inputt 4:Mu 4:Mutiting ng in inpu putt 2 In Inpu putt 5: 5:Ov Over erri ride de inpu inputt Input 6: 6:EDM iin nput ((ffor O OS SSD3/4) AUX output 1 AUX output 2 AUX output 3 AUX output 4 AUX output 5 AUX output 6

When "Not use" is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4, the gray and gray/black wire is always the OFF-state.

(3) In case of applying the suspension in teaching mode Wire color

Function

Brown Blue Black White Gray Gray/Black Yellow Red Lig igh ht Blue lue Ligh Lightt Blue Blue/B /Bla lack ck

+24 V 0V OSSD1 OSSD2 OSSD3 OSSD4 Input 1:Reset input / Check input Input 2:EDM input (for OSSD1/2) Input 3:Teach mode input Inpu Inputt 4:T 4:Tea each ch re read adyy in inpu putt

Yel ello low/ w/B Black lack Red/B d/Black Orange Orange/Black Pink Pink/Black Green Green/Black

In Inpu putt 5: 5:Ov Over erri ride de inpu inputt Input 6: 6:EDM iin nput ((ffor O OS SSD3/4) AUX output 1 AUX output 2 AUX output 3 AUX output 4 AUX output 5 AUX output 6

Note

When "Not use" is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4, the gray and gray/black wire is always the OFF-state.

4

W i   r  i   n  g

4-7

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-4

Wire color and assigned function

(4) In case of NOT applying bank switching, muting function and the suspension in teaching mode Wire color

Brown Blue Black White Gray Gray/Black

4

W i   r  i   n  g

Yellow Red Light Blue Ligh Li ghtt Blu Blue/ e/Bl Blac ackk Yellow/Black Red/B d/Black Orange Orange/Black Pink Pink/Black Green Green/Black

Function

+24 V 0V OSSD1 OSSD2 OSSD3 OSSD4 Input 1:Reset input / Check input Input 2:EDM input (for OSSD1/2) Input 3:Not use Inpu Inputt 4:N 4:Not ot use use Input 5: 5:Not us use Input 6: 6:EDM iin nput ((ffor O OS SSD3/4) AUX output 1 AUX output 2 AUX output 3 AUX output 4 AUX output 5 AUX output 6

Note When "Not use" is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4, the gray and gray/black wire is always the OFF-state.

SZ-16V/SZ-16D Wire color

Brown Blue Black White Yellow dlue LigR hteB Gray Pink Green Li Ligh ghtt Blu Blue/ e/Bl Blac ackk Gray/Black Pink/Black Green/Black Orange Orange/Black Yellow/Black Red/Black

Function

+24 V 0V OSSD1 OSSD2 Input 1:Reset input IIn puutt 32::E np BD anMk iinnppuutt A Input 4:Bank input B Input 5:Bank input C Input 6:Bank input D Inpu Inputt 7:B 7:Ban ankk in inpu putt a Input 8:Bank input b Input 9:Bank input c Input 1 10 0:Bank in inpu putt d AUX output 1 AUX output 2 AUX o ou utput 3 AUX output 4

4-8

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5  Examples of wiring SZ-01S Note

• The NPN out output put cable shield is con connected nected to +24 V inside the SZ. Wh When en wiring, do not con connect nect the shield to 0 V. • The PNP ou output tput cable shield is connected to 0 V inside the SZ. When wiring, do not connect the shield

4

to + 24 V.

 

Configuration of start/restart mode: Manual/Manu Manual/Manual al  

For the PNP output type cable K1, K2:External device (Safety relay, magnet contactor, etc.) K3: Solid state contactor S1: Switch for reset operation (N.O.) PLC: Used ffor or monitoring, not ffor or control systems related to safety.

   d    l    i   e    h    S

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   g   n   a   r    O    )    2    X    U    A    (

  e   g   n   a   r    O    )    1    X    U    A    (

  n   w   o   r    B    )    V

  e   u    l    B

   4    2   +    (

   )    V    0    (

   k   c   a    l    B    )    1    D    S    O    (

K1

  w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    t   u   p   n    i    t   e   s   e    R    (

  e    t    i    h    W    )    2    D    S    O    (

   d   e    R    )    t   u   p   n    i

• In case of ""Manu Manual/A al/Automat utomatic" ic" on the conf configurat iguration ion of st start/  art/  restart, the switch with N.C. type (S1) should be used for reset

   M    D    E    (

•

K1

K2

•

K2 S1

• • IIN N

operation. In case of "A "Automatic utomatic/Auto /Automatic" matic" on the con configur figuration ation of start/  restart, the yellow wire should be short-circuited to +24 V. In case of N NOT OT applyin applying g the ED EDM M funct function, ion, th the e red wire wire must be insulated (open-circuit). In case of NO NOT T applyin applying g the A AUX UX outp output, ut, the wir wire e for AUX AUX must be insulated (open-circuit). K3 and PLC are NO NON N SAFETY SAFETY-RELATED syst systems. ems.

O OFUFT K1

K2

K3

PLC PLC M

 

For the NPN output type cable K1, K2:External device (Safety relay, magnet contactor, etc.) K3: Solid state contactor S1: Switch for reset operation (N.O.) PLC: Used ffor or monitoring, not ffor or control systems related to safety.

   d    l   e    i    h    S

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   g   n   a   r    O    )    2    X    U    A    (

  e   g   n   a   r    O    )    1    X    U    A    (

  n   w   o   r    B    )    V    4    2   +    (

  e   u    l    B    )    V    0    (

   k   c   a    l    B    )    1    D    S    S    O    (

  e    t    i    h    W    )    2    D    S    S    O    (

K1

K2

  w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    t   u   p   n    i    t   e   s   e    R    (

   d   e    R    )    t   u   p   n    i    M    D    E    (

• In case of ""Manu Manual/A al/Automat utomatic" ic" on the conf configurat iguration ion of st start/  art/  restart, the switch with N.C. type (S1) should be used for reset operation. • In case of "A "Automa utomatic/A tic/Automat utomatic" ic" on the con configu figuratio ration n of start/  restart, the yellow wire should be short-circuited to 0 V. V. • In case of N NOT OT applyin applying g the ED EDM M funct function, ion, th the e red wire wire must be insulated (open-circuit). • In case of NO NOT T applyin applying g the A AUX UX outp output, ut, the wir wire e for AUX AUX must be insulated (open-circuit).

K1

K2 S1

• K3 and PLC are NO NON N SAFETY SAFETY-RELATED syst systems. ems. IN

OUT K1 K2

PLC M

K3

W i   r  i   n  g

4-9

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5

Examples of wiring

SZ-04M Note

• The NPN out output put cable shield is con connected nected to +24 V inside the SZ. W When hen wiring, do not connect the shield to 0 V.  is connected to 0 V inside the SZ. When wiring, do not connect the shield • The PN PNP P out output put ca cable ble shie shield ld is to + 24 V.

4

W i   r  i   n  g

 

Multi-OSSD function: Mode D Configuration of start/restart mode: Manual/Manu Manual/Manual al  

For the PNP output type cable

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k   c   a    l    B    /   e   e   g   g   n   n   a   r   a   r    O    O    )    )    1    2    d    X    X    l   e    U    U    i    A    h    A    S    (    (

   k   n    i    P    )    3    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k   n    i    P    )    4    X    U    A    (

  n   e   e   r    G    )    5    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   n   e   e   r    G    )    6    X    U    A    (

   k   w   o    l   c    l   a   e    l    Y    B    )    k    t   e   y    /   y    2   c    i    /   n   a   a    h   a   r   r    1    l   w    t   o    B    W    G    G   u   r    )    )    )    )    p    B   e    n   u    1    2    3    4    i    )    l    D    D    D    t    V    B    D    S    S    S    S    e    4    )    S    S    S    s    e    2    V    S    O    O    O    O    R   +    0    (    (    (    (    (    (    (

K1

K2

   d   e    R    )    2    /    1    M    D    E    (

K3 K4 S1

IN

  w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    4    /    3    t   u   p   n    i    t   e   s   e    R    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    d   e    R    )    4    /    3    M    D    E    (

   k   c    l   a    B    /   e   e   u    l   u    l    B    B    t    t    h    h   g    i   g    i    L    L    )    )    1    2    k    k   n   n   a   a    B    (    B    (

K1

K3

K2

K4

S2

S S 3-1 3-2

OUT K1 K2

K5

K3 K4

K6

PLC M

K1, K2, K3, K3, K4: K5, K6: S1: S2: PLC: S3-1, S S3 3-2: M:

M

Extern External al devi device ce (Safety (Safety rela relay y, magnet co contacto ntactor, r, etc.) etc.) Solid state contactor Switch for resetting OSSD1/2 (N.O.) Switch for resetting OSSD3/4 (N.O.) Used sed for mon oniitoring, not for con control systems related to safety. Switc itch ffo or b ba ank s sw witching 3-phase motor

• In case of "Manual/Automatic" on the conf configuration iguration of start/restart, the switch w with ith N.C. type (S1, S2) should be used for reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/A "Automatic/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration of start/restart, both yellow and yellow/black yellow/black w wire ire should be short-circuited to +24 V V.. • In case of NOT applying the ED EDM M function, both red wire and red/blac red/black k must be insulated (open-circuit). • In case of NO NOT T applying the A AUX UX output, the w wire ire for A AUX UX must be insulate insulated d (open-circuit). • K5, K6 and PLC are NON SAFETY SAFETY-RELA -RELATED TED systems.

4-10

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5

 

Examples of wiring

For the NPN output type cable

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   e   g   g   n   n   a   a   r   r    O    O    )    )    1    2    d    l   e    X    X    i    U    h    U    S    A    (    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k    k   n    i   n    i    P    P    )    )    3    4    X    X    U    U    A    (    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   n   n   e   e   e   e   r   r    G    G    )    )    5    6    X    X    U    U    A    (    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    k    t   e   y    /   y   c    i   n   a   a   a    h   r   r    l   w   o    B    W    G    G   r    )    )    )    )   e    B   u    1    2    3    4    )    l    D    D    D    D    V    B    S    S    S    S    4    )    S    S    S    2    V    S    O    O    O    O   +    0    (    (    (    (    (    (

K1 K2

  w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    2    /    1    t   u    p    n    i    t    e    s    e    R    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    4    /    3    t   u   p   n    i    t   e   s   e    R    (

   d   e    R    )    2    /    1    M    D    E    (

K3 K4

   k   c   a    l    B    /    d   e    R    )    4    /    3    M    D    E    (

  e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L    )    1    k   n   a    B    (

K1

K3

K2 K4 S1

IN

S2

S S 3-1 3-2

OUT K5

K6

K1 K2

PLC M

K1, K2, K3, K3, K4: K5, K6: S1: S2: PLC: S3-1, S S3 3-2: M:

4

W i   r  i   n  g

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L    )    2    k   n   a    B    (

K3 K4 M

Externa Externall devic device e (Saf (Safety ety rela relay y, magnet co contact ntactor, or, tc.) tc.) Solid state contactor Switch for resetting OSSD1/2 (N.O.) Switch for resetting OSSD3/4 (N.O.) Used for monitoring, not for con control systems related to safety. Switc itch ffo or b ba ank s sw witching 3-phase motor

• In case of "Manual/Automatic" on the conf configuration iguration of start/restart, the switch with N.C. type (S1, S2) should be used for reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/A "Automatic/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration of start/restart, both yellow and yellow/black yellow/black wire should be short-circuited to 0 V V.. • In case of NOT applying the ED EDM M function, bot both h red wire and red/blac red/black k must be insulated (open-circuit). (open-circuit). • In case of NO NOT T applying the A AUX UX output, the w wire ire for A AUX UX must be insulated (open-circuit). • K5, K6 and PLC are NON SAFETY SAFETY-RELA -RELATED TED systems. systems.

4-11

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5

Examples of wiring

 

Multi-OSSD function: Mode A, B, C and Not use Configuration of start/restart mode: Manual/Manu Manual/Manual al In case of applying the bank switching function  

For the PNP output type cable

4

W i   r  i   n  g    k   c   a    l    B    /   e   e   g   g   n   n   a   a   r   r    O    O    )    )    1    2    d    l   e    X    X    i    U    h    U    S    A    (    A    (

   k   n    i    P    )    3    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k   n    i    P    )    4    X    U    A    (

   k    k   c   c   a   a    l    l    B    B    /    /    k   e    t   y   y   n   n   n   c    i   a   a   e   e   w   a    h   r   r    l   e   e   o   r   r   r    B    W    G    G   e    G    G    B   u    )    )    )    )    )    )    )    l    1    2    3    4    5    6    V    B    D    D    D    D    X    X    4    )    S    S    S    S    U    U    2    V    S    S    S    S    A   +    0    (    A    (    (    (    O    (    O    (    O    (    O    (

K1 K2

  w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    t   u   p   n    i    t   e   s   e    R    (

   d   e    R    )    2    /    1    M    D    E    (

  e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L    )    1    k   n   a    B    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L    )    2    k   n   a    B    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    3    k   n   a    B    (

K1 K3

K3 K4

K2 K4

S1

IN

   k   c   a    l    B    /    d   e    R    )    4    /    3    M    D    E    (

S S S 3-1 3-2 3-3

OUT K1 K2

K5

K3 K4

K6

PLC M

M

K1, K2, K3, K3, K4: Extern External al devi device ce (Safety (Safety rela relay y, magnet co contacto ntactor, r, etc.) etc.) K5, K6: Solid state contactor S1: Switch for reset operation (N.O.) PLC: Used sed for mon oniitoring, not for con control systems related to safety. S3-1, S3-2, S3-3: Switch for bank s switching witching M: 3-phase motor • In case of "Manual/A "Manual/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration configuration of start/restart, the sw switch itch with N.C N.C.. type (S1) should be used ffor or reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/A "Automatic/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the yellow wire should be short-circuited to +24 V. • When "Not use" is applied as the operation mode for O OSSD3/4, SSD3/4, red/b red/black lack is assigned to ba bank nk input 4 in this ca case. se. • When "Not use" is applied as the operatio operation n mode for OSSD3/4, the gray and gray/blac gray/black k wire must be insulated (open-circuit) • In case of NOT applying the ED EDM M function, both red wire and red/blac red/black k must be insulated (open-circuit). • In case of NO NOT T applying the A AUX UX output, the w wire ire for A AUX UX must be insulat insulated ed (open-circuit). • K5, K6 and PLC are NON SAFETY SAFETY-RELA -RELATED TED systems.

4-12

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5

 

Examples of wiring

For the NPN output type cable

   d    l    e    i    h    S

   k    c    a    l    B    /    e    e    g    g    n    n    a    r    a    r    O    O    )    )    1    2    X    X    U    U    A    A    (    (

   k    c    a    l    B    /    k    k    n    n    i    i    P    P    )    )    3    4    X    X    U    U    A    (    A    (

   k    c    a    l    B    /    n    n    e    e    e    r    e    r    G    G    )    )    5    6    X    X    U    U    A    (    A    (

   n   w    o    r    B    )    V    4    2   +    (

   k    k    c    c   w    a    a    l    l    o    l    l    B    B    /    /    e    k    e    t   y   y    Y    d    d    c    i    e    e    )    a    a    t    a    h    r    r    l    R   u    R    W    G    G    p    )    )    e    B    )    )    )    n    2    /    4    /   u    )    l    1    2    3    4    i    1      3      B    D    D    D    D    t    )    S    S    S    S    e    M    M    s    V    S    S    S    S    e    D    D    0    (    O    (    O    (    O    (    O    (    R    (    E    (    E    (

K1

K2

K1

K3 K4

   e   u    l    B    t    h    g    i    L    )    1    k    n    a    B    (

4

W i   r  i   n  g

   k    c    a    l    B    /   w    o    l    l    e    Y    )    3    k    n    a    B    (

K3

K2 K4 S1

IN

   k    c    a    l    B    /    e   u    l    B    t    h    g    i    L    )    2    k    n    a    B    (

S S 3-1 3-2

S 3-3

OUT K1 K2

K5

K3 K4

K6

PLC M

M

K1, K2, K3, K3, K4: Extern External al devi device ce (Safety (Safety rela relay y, magnet co contacto ntactor, r, etc.) etc.) K5, K6: Solid state contactor S1: Switch for reset operation (N.O.) PLC: Used for monitoring, not for con control systems related to safety. S3-1, S3-2, S3-3: Switch for bank s switching witching M: 3-phase motor • In case of "Manual/A "Manual/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration configuration of start/restart, the switch with N.C. type (S1) should be used for reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/A "Automatic/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the yellow wire should be short-circuited to 0 V. • When "Not use" is applied as the operation mode for O OSSD3/4, SSD3/4, red/b red/black lack is assigned to ban bank k input 4 in this case. case. • When "Not use" is applied as the operation mode for O OSSD3/4, SSD3/4, the g gray ray and gray/blac gray/black k wire must be insulated (open-circuit) • In case of NOT applying the ED EDM M function, bot both h red wire and red/blac red/black k must be insulated (open-circuit). (open-circuit). • In case of NO NOT T applying the A AUX UX output, the w wire ire for A AUX UX must be insulated (open-circuit). • K5, K6 and PLC are NON SAFETY SAFETY-RELA -RELATED TED systems. systems.

4-13

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5

Examples of wiring

 

Multi-OSSD function: Mode A, B, C and Not use Configuration of start/restart mode: Manual/Manu Manual/Manual al In case of applying the muting function  

For the PNP output type cable

4

W i   r  i   n  g

   d    l    e    i    h    S

   e    g    n    a    r    O    )    1    X    U    A    (

   k    c    a    l    B    /    e    g    n    a    r    O    )    2    X    U    A    (

   k    c    a    l    B    /    k    k    n    n    i    i    P    P    )    )    3    4    X    X    U    U    A    A    (    (

   n    e    e    r    G    )    5    X    U    A    (

   k    c    a    l    B    /    n    e    e    r    G    )    t   u    p    t   u    o    6    X    U    A    (

   k    c    a    l    B    k    e   y    /    t   y    n    c    i   w    a    h    a    r    r    a    l    o    r    B    W    G    G    B    e    )    )    )   u    )    1    2    3    4    )    l    V    B    D    D    D    D    S    S    S    S    4    )    2    V    S    S    S    S   +    (    0    O    O    (    (    O    (    O    (    (

K1

L

K2

K3

  w    o    l    l    e    Y    )    t   u    p    n    i    t    e    s    e    R    (

   k    c    a    l    B    /    e    e   u    l   u    l    B    B    t    t    h    h    g    i    g    i    L    L    )    )    1    2    t    t   u   u    p    p    n    n    i    i    g    g    n    n    i    i    t    t   u   u    M    M    (    (

   k    c    a    l    B    /    d    d    e    e    R    R    )    )    2    4    /    /    1    3        M    M    D    D    E    E    (    (

K4 S1

K1

K3

K2

K4

   k    c    a    l    B    /   w    o    l    l    e    Y    t   u    p    n    i    e    d    i    r    r    e   v    O

S2 Brown Black Blue

P1

Brown Black Blue IN

P2

OUT K1 K2

K5

K3 K4

K6

PLC M

M

K1, K2, K3, K3, K4: K5, K6: S1: S2: PLC:

Extern External al devi device ce (Safety (Safety rela relay y, magnet co contacto ntactor, r, etc.) etc.) Solid state contactor Switch for reset operation (N.O.) Switch for override (N.O.) Used sed for mon oniitoring, not for con control systems related to safety.

P1, P2: P2: M: L:

Mu Muti ting ng de devi vice ces s (e (ex. x. PZ ser serie ies sw wit ith hP PN NP ou outp tput ut,, K Ke eyence ence Corp orp.) 3-phase motor Muting lamp

• In case of "Manual/A "Manual/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration configuration of start/restart, the sw switch itch with N.C N.C.. type (S1) should be used ffor or reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/A "Automatic/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the yellow wire should be short-circuited to +24 V. • When "Not use" is applied as the operatio operation n mode for OSSD3/4, the gray and gray/blac gray/black k wire must be insulated (open-circuit) • In case of NOT applying the ED EDM M function, both red wire and red/blac red/black k must be insulated (open-circuit). • In case of NO NOT T applying the A AUX UX output, the w wire ire for A AUX UX must be insulat insulated ed (open-circuit). • K5, K6 and PLC are NON SAFETY SAFETY-RELA -RELATED TED systems.

4-14

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5

 

Examples of wiring

For the NPN output type cable

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   e   g   g   n   n   a   r   a   r    O    O    )    )    2    d    l    1   e    X    X    i    U    h    U    A    (    A    S    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k    k   n    i   n    i    P    P    )    )    3    4    X    X    U    U    A    A    (    (

  n   e   e   r    G    )    5    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   n   e   e   r    G    )    t   u   p    t   u   o    6    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k    t   e   y   y   n   c    i   a   w   a    h   a   r   r    l   o   r    B    W    G    G   e    B   u    )    )    )    )    )    l    1    2    3    4    V    B    D    D    D    D    S    S    S    S    4    )    2    V    S    S    S    S   +    (    0    O    O    (    (    O    (    O    (    (

K1

L

K2

  w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    t   u   p   n    i    t   e   s   e    R    (

   d   e    R    )    2    /    1    M    D    E    (

K3 K4

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   e   u    l   u    l    B    B    t    t    h    h   g    i   g    i    L    L    )    )    1    t    2    t    k   u   u   c   p   p   a    i   n    i   n    l    B   e   y    /    d    d    d   e   o   a    R   m   e   r    )   g    4   g    /   n    i   n    3    i    h    h   c    M   c   a    D   a   e   e    E    T    (    T    (    (

K1

K3

K2

K4

4

W i   r  i   n  g

   k   c   a    l    B    /   w   o    l    l   e    Y    t   u   p   n    i   e    d    i   r   r   e   v    O

S2

S1

Brown Black Blue Brown Black Blue

IN

P1

P2

OUT K1 K2

K5

K3 K4

K6

PLC M

K1, K2, K3, K4: K5, K6: S1: S2: PLC: P1, P2: P2: M: L:

M

External device (Safety relay, magnet contactor, etc.) Solid state contactor Switch for reset operation (N.O.) Switch for override (N.O.) Used for monitoring, not for con control systems related to safety. Mu Muti ting ng de devi vice ces s ((e ex. PZ se seri rie es wit with hN NP PN ou outp tput ut,, K Ke eyence ence Corp orp.) 3-phase motor Muting lamp

• In case of "Manual/A "Manual/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration configuration of start/restart, the switch with N.C N.C.. type (S1) should be used for reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/A "Automatic/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the yellow wire should be short-circuited to 0 V. • When "Not use" is applied as the operation mode for O OSSD3/4, SSD3/4, the g gray ray and gray/blac gray/black k wire must be insulated (open-circuit) • In case of NOT applying the ED EDM M function, bo both th red wire and red/blac red/black k must be insulated (open-circuit). (open-circuit). • In case of NO NOT T applying the A AUX UX output, the w wire ire for A AUX UX must be insulated (open-circuit). • K5, K6 and PLC are NON SAFETY SAFETY-RELA -RELATED TED systems.

4-15

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5

Examples of wiring

 

Multi-OSSD function: Mode A, B, C and Not use Configuration of start/restart mode: Manual/Manu Manual/Manual al In case of applying the suspension in teaching mode  

For the PNP output type cable

4

W i   r  i   n  g

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   e   g   g   n   n   a   a   r   r    O    O    )    )    2    d    l    1   e    X    X    i    U    h    U    S    A    (    A    (

   k   n    i    P    )    3    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k   n    i    P    )    4    X    U    A    (

  n   e   e   r    G    )    5    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   n   e   e   r    G    )    t   u   p    t   u   o    6    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k    t   e   y   y   n   c    i   a   w   a    h   a   r   r    l   o   r    B    W    G    G   e    B   u    )    )    )    )    )    l    1    2    3    4    V    B    D    D    D    D    S    S    S    S    4    )    2    V    S    S    S    S   +    0    (    (    O    (    O    (    O    (    O    (

K1 K2

L

  w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    t   u   p   n    i    t   e   s   e    R    (

   d   e    R    )    2    /    1    M    D    E    (

K3 K4

   k   c   a    l    B    /    d   e    R    )    4    /    3    M    D    E    (

  e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L    )    1    t   u   p   n    i   e    d   o   m    h   c   a   e    T    (

K1

K3

K2

K4

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L    )    2    t   u   p   n    i   y    d   a   e   r    h   c   a   e    T    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   w   o    l    l   e    Y    t   u   p   n    i   e    d    i   r   r   e   v    O

S2

S1 Teach mode input Teach ready input IN

OUT K1 K2

K5

K3 K4

K6

PLC M

M

K1, K2, K3, K3, K4: K5, K6: S1: S2: PLC: M:

Extern External al devi device ce (Safety (Safety rela relay y, magnet co contacto ntactor, r, etc.) etc.) Solid state contactor Switch for reset operation (N.O.) Switch for override (N.O.) Used sed for mon oniitoring, not for con control systems related to safety. 3-phase motor

L:

Muting lamp

• In case of "Manual/A "Manual/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration configuration of start/restart, the sw switch itch with N.C N.C.. type (S1) should be used ffor or reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/A "Automatic/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the yellow wire should be short-circuited to +24 V. • When "Not use" is applied as the operatio operation n mode for OSSD3/4, the gray and gray/blac gray/black k wire must be insulated (open-circuit) • In case of NOT applying the ED EDM M function, both red wire and red/blac red/black k must be insulated (open-circuit). • In case of NO NOT T applying the A AUX UX output, the w wire ire for A AUX UX must be insulat insulated ed (open-circuit). • K5, K6 and PLC are NON SAFETY SAFETY-RELA -RELATED TED systems.

4-16

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5

 

Examples of wiring

For the NPN output type cable

   d    l   e    i    h    S

  e   g   n   a   r    O    )    1    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   g   n   a   r    O    )    2    X    U    A    (

   k   n    i    P    )    3    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k   n    i    P    )    4    X    U    A    (

  n   e   e   r    G    )    5    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   n   e   e   r    G    )    t   u   p    t   u   o    6    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k   e   y    t   y   n   c    i   a   w   a    h   a   r   r    l   o   r    B    W    G    G    B   e    )    )    )    )   u    l    1    2    3    4    )    V    B    D    D    D    D    S    S    S    S    4    )    2    V    S    S    S    S   +    0    O    (    (    O    (    O    (    O    (    (

K1

L

K2

  w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    t   u   p   n    i    t   e   s   e    R    (

   d   e    R    )    2    /    1    M    D    E    (

K3 K4

  e   u    l    B    k    t   c    h   a    i   g    l    B    L    /     )    d    t    1   e    u    p    R     i    )    n    e    4    /     d    3    o    m    M     h    c    D    a    e    E     (     T    (

K1

K3

K2

K4

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L

    )    2    t    u    p    n     i    y     d    a    e    r     h    c    a    e     T     (

4

W i   r  i   n  g

   k   c   a    l    B    /   w   o    l    l   e    Y    t   u   p   n    i   e    d    i   r   r   e   v    O

S2 S1

Teach mode input

Teach ready input IN

OUT K1 K2

K5

K3 K4

K6

PLC M

K1, K2, K3, K3, K4: K5, K6: S1: S2: PLC: M: L:

M

Extern External al devi device ce (Safety (Safety rela relay y, magnet co contacto ntactor, r, etc.) etc.) Solid state contactor Switch for reset operation (N.O.) Switch for override (N.O.) Used for monitoring, not for con control systems related to safety. 3-phase motor Muting lamp

• In case of "Manual/A "Manual/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration configuration of start/restart, the switch with N.C. type (S1) should be used for reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/A "Automatic/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the yellow wire should be short-circuited to 0 V. • When "Not use" is applied as the operation mode for O OSSD3/4, SSD3/4, the g gray ray and gray/blac gray/black k wire must be insulated (open-circuit) • In case of NOT applying the ED EDM M function, bot both h red wire and red/blac red/black k must be insulated (open-circuit). (open-circuit). • In case of NO NOT T applying the A AUX UX output, the w wire ire for A AUX UX must be insulated (open-circuit). • K5, K6 and PLC are NON SAFETY SAFETY-RELA -RELATED TED systems. systems.

4-17

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5

Examples of wiring

SZ-16V/SZ-16D Note

• The NPN out output put cable shield is con connected nected to +24 V inside the SZ. W When hen wiring, do not connect the shield to 0 V. • The PNP ou output tput cable shield is connected to 0 V inside the SZ. When wiring, do not connect the shield to + 24 V.

4

W i   r  i   n  g

 

Configuration of start/restart mode: Manual/Manu Manual/Manual al  

For the PNP output type cable

   d    l   e    i    h    S

   k   c    l   a    B    /   e   e   g   g   n   n   a   a   r   r    O    O    )    )    1    2    X    X    U    U    A    (    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    3    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    d   e    R    )    4    X    U    A    (

  e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L    )    A    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

  y   a   r    G    )    B    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

   i    k   n    P    )    C    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

  n   e   e   r    G    )    D    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L    )   a    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   y   a   r    G    )    b    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

   k   c    k    l   c   a    B   a    /    l    B   n    /   e    k   n   r   e    i    P    G    )    )   c    d    t    t   u   u   p   p   n    i   n    i    k    k   n   n   a   a    B    (    B    (

  w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    t   u   p   n    i    t   e   s   e    R    (

   k   c   a    l    d    B   e    )    R    1    )    D    M    S    D    S    E    (    O    (

  e    t    i    h    W    )    2    D    S    S    O    (

K1 K1

K2

  n   w   o   r    B    )    V    4    2   +    (

  e   u    l    B    )    V    0    (

K2 S1

IN

OUT K1 K2

AGV control unit

K3

M

K1 K2: K3: S1:

Externa rnal devic vice (Safety relay, magnet contactor, etc.) Solid state contactor Switch ffo or rre eset o op peration ((N N.O.)

• In case of "Manual/A "Manual/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration configuration of start/restart, the sw switch itch with N.C N.C.. type (S1) should be used ffor or reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/A "Automatic/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the yellow wire should be short-circuited to +24 V. • In case of NOT applying the ED EDM M function, the red wire must be insul insulated ated (open-circuit). • In case of NO NOT T applying the A AUX UX output, the w wire ire for A AUX UX must be insulat insulated ed (open-circuit). • K3 is NON S SAFET AFETY Y-RELATED system. system.

4-18

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-5

 

Examples of wiring

For the NPN output type cable

   d    l   e    i    h    S

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   e   g   g   n   n   a   a   r   r    O    O    )    )    1    2    X    X    U    U    A    (    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   w   o    l    l   e    Y    )    3    X    U    A    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    d   e    R    )    4    X    U    A    (

  e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L    )    A    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

  y   a   r    G    )    B    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

   k   n    i    P    )    C    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

  n   e   e   r    G    )    D    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   e   u    l    B    t    h   g    i    L    )   a    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   y   a   r    G    )    b    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /    k   n    i    P    )   c    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

   k   c   a    l    B    /   n   e   e   r    G    )    d    t   u   p   n    i    k   n   a    B    (

4

  w   o    l    l   e    Y    t   u   p   n    i    t   e   s   e    R

W i   r  i   n  g    d   e    R    M    D    E

   k   c   a    l    B    )    1    D    S    S    O    (

  e    t    i    h    W    )    2    D    S    S    O    (

  n   w   o   r    B    )    V    4    2   +    (

  e   u    l    B    )    V    0    (

K1 K1

K2

K2 S1

IN

OUT K1 K2

AGV control unit

K3

M

K1 K2: K3: S1:

Externa rnal devic vice (Safety relay, magnet contactor, etc.) Solid state contactor Switch ffo or rre eset o op peration ((N N.O.)

• In case of "Manual/A "Manual/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration configuration of start/restart, the switch with N.C. type (S1) should be used for reset operation. • In case of "Automatic/A "Automatic/Automatic" utomatic" on the configuration of start/restart, the yellow wire should be short-circuited to 0 V. • In case of NO NOT T applyin applying g the EDM functi function, on, the red wir wire e must be insula insulated ted (open (open-circ -circuit). uit). • In case of NO NOT T applying the A AUX UX output, the w wire ire for A AUX UX must be insulated (open-circuit). • K3 is NON S SAFET AFETY Y-RELATED system. system.

4-19

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

4-6  Input / output circuit OSSD output circuit (Safety output)

For the PNP output type cable

For the NPN output type cable

+24 V

4

Main circuit

W i   r  i   n  g

Output

+24 V

Main circuit

0V

Output

0V

AUX output circuit (Non-safety output)

Common for the PNP output type cable / NPN output type cable +24 V Main circuit

Output

0V

Muting lamp output

Common for the PNP output type cable / NPN output type cable +24 V Main circuit

Output

0V

Input circuit

For the PNP output type cable

For the NPN output type cable

+24 V

Main circuit

Input

0V

+24 V

Main circuit

Input

0V

4-20

SZ-M-NO4-E

 

5  Manual Configuration on the SZ

5-1

Fo Forr chang changing ing the fa facto ctory ry de defa fault ult (P (Pass asswor word d input input). ). . . . . . . . . . 5-2

55-2 2

Manu Manual al con confi figu gura rati tion on for for SZSZ-01 01S S an and d SZ-0 SZ-04M 4M . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5-4

5-3

Manual Manual confi configur gurati ation on for for SZ-1 SZ-16V 6V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 5-20

5-4

Monito Monitoring ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 5-23

5-1

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-1

For changing the factory default (Password input)

Note

Reference

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

1

The SZ cannot perform the normal nor mal operation with factory default. Password Password input and the configuration are required to start normal operation. Functions for SZ-16V and SZ-16D must be configured through SZ Configurator because the system does not provide for manual configuration on the SZ.

See

"Configuration of Others" (page 5-17) for 5-17) for setting password on the SZ-01S and SZ-04M, or "5-3 Manual configuration for SZ-16V" (page 5-20). 5-20) . Password settings and changes cannot be made from the main body of the communication type.

Tw Two o screws must be loosed to open the setting cover cover.. (The setting cover must be closed after completing the configuration, and then two screws must be tightened. (Recommended tightening torque: 0.3 N·m)) S   w  e e  A  h e   i  n  B  : : R  U  n  s e s t  r  u   P  C  N   t  t  i  c t  i   - I   Ie    /  P  C  n  g   i  o n  m  s s  C  s  c  a n   s e  o m  a r   u   t  t  i  n  m  r  i  e  a l    g   u  n i  d   o  c a  u  t  . t  i  o  n  

Mode Switch A : Run/PC Communication B : Configuration on SZ

S   w  e e  A  h e  i  n s  B  :  : R  U  n s e t  r  u  c  P  C   N   t  t  i   t  i  o  - I  e  /  P  C  n  g  i  n m  s s  C   s c  a n  s e  o m  a r  r   u  a  t  t  i  n  m u  i  e d  l    g   n i  c  o  a t  i  u  t  . o n 

Note The specification of IP65 cannot be fulfilled unless the screw for setting cover is tightened with recommended torque.

2

The following is the procedure after power is supplied to the SZ. You can operate this process through the front panel and information display. Start-up display 1

Start-up display 2

KEYENCE  SZ Series Safety Laser Scanner

Initial display

Now Loading

Waiting For Configu  ration

This appears if the power is supplied while the mode switch is set to "A: Run/PC Communication". The next process is shown if the mode switch is changed to "B: Configuration on SZ".

Approx. 20 seconds (text blinks) *1 Display for selection of what you want to do 1. Setting

: You can configure/change something.

2. Reconfirm

: You can confirm the configuration.

Display for "Input Password" You should enter a password with 4 to 8 characters.

Parameter 1.Setting 2.Reconfirm

Input Password   ________

The followings are acceptable characters: numbers 0

Press Press

or Enter 

to select "1. Setting".

to set

Press the  the Press

keys for character selection and

key to change the digit. Enter 

to set.

through 9, letters "a" through "z", or a hyphen. For changing the factory default, you must enter "1111" as default password.

Display for Password acceptance *2 If the password is not acceptable, this does not appear. Display for "Input Password" appears again in this situation.

 

OK

  Password   Accepted

Display for Setting 1. Safety : You can configure safety-related functions 2. Non-Safety : You can configure non-safety functions 3. Others

: You can configure other functions

You can see next display if you leave the SZ untouched or press

Enter 

or  

ESC

.

You must configure the safety-related function. For more Setting 1.Safety 2.Non-Safety 3.Others

information about the configuration, see

" Configuration and confirmation of safety-related functions" (page 5-5). 5-5).

5-2

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-1

For changing the factory default (Password input)

*1 If the main body of the SZ is not Ver.2 Ver.2 or ne newer, wer, it will will take approximately 50 seconds seconds.. *2 If you don’t change the default password, password, the following following display appears. You can change the default password password to anything you want. See " Configuration of Others" (page 5-17) 5-17) for  for setting password on the SZ-01S and SZ-04M, or "5-3 Manual configuration for SZ-16V" (page 5-20) for 5-20)  for the SZ-16V.   OK Recommend to   Change   Password

 

If the password is not acceptable, such as incorrect pass password, word, th the e following following displa display y appears. Display for "Input "Input Password" Passw ord" appears again in this situation.  

Failed

  Wrong   Password

Note

The configuration for safety-related functions and the others cannot be performed without the password (ex. when you forget password). Store the password carefully. carefully. "When you forget the password" (page 6-57)

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

5-3

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2  Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M Note

• If the SZ Configurator is used to configure the SZ, you cannot move the configuration process forward. The following display display appears when you select either "1. Safety" or "2. Non-safety" at "Display for setting".  Unacceptable  Operation

If you want to perform the manual configuration on the SZ, such as the configuration for "1. Safety" or "2. Non-Safety", you must initialize the configuration that was carried car ried out through the SZ Configurator. For more information, see " Configuration of Others" (page 5-17). 5-17). • It is necessary for the SZ-16V and the SZ-16D to configure the functions through tthe he SZ Configurator, Configurator, because it does not provide the system for the manual configuration on the SZ.

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

Preparation for configuration (Common procedure) You can configure the function and confirm confir m the configured function if you set the mode switch to "B: Configuration on SZ". The mode switch must be set back to the "A: RUN/PC Communication" in order to restart the normal operation. Normal

Display for normal operation

 Operation

If you change the mode switch to the "B: Configuration on SZ" after opening the setting cover, the following display appears.

"1-4 Part description" (page 1-10)

Display for selection of what you want to do 1. Setting : You can configure/change something. 2. Reconfirm

: You can confirm the configuration.

Display for "Input Password" You can enter a password with 4 to 8 characters. The followings are acceptable characters: numbers 0 through 9, letters "a" through "z", or a hyphen. For changing the factory default, you must enter "1111" as default password.

Parameter 1.Setting 2.Reconfirm

Input Password   ________

Password is

Press Press

or Enter 

to set.

Press the the Press

keys for character selection and

key to change the digit. Enter 

to set.

Password is wrong.

acceptable. Display for Password acceptance If the password is not acceptable, this does not appeared. Display for "Input "I nput Password"

  OK   Password   Accepted

to select "1. Setting".

Display for "Input Password"   Failed   Wrong   Password

appears again after a while.

appears again in this situation.

You can see next display if

you leave the SZ untouched  or press Enter  or  ESC .

Display for Setting 1. Safety

: You can configure the safety-relate safety-relatedd functions

2. Non-Safety

: You can configure the non-safety functions

3.Others

: You can configure the other functions

Setting 1.Safety 2.Non-Safety 3.Others

Press Press

or Enter 

to select the item.

to set and change displays.

You should select "1. Safety" to configure

You should select "2. Non-Safety" to

You should select "3. Others" to

the safety-related functions.

configure the non-safety functions.

configure the other functions.

5-4

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

Configuration and confirmation of safety-related functions Note

If the SZ Configurator is used to configure the SZ, the following display appears and you cannot move the configuration process forward. Unacceptable  Operation

If you want to perform the manual configuration on the th e SZ, you must initialize the configuration that was carried out through the SZ Configurator. For more information, see " Configuration of Others" (page 5-17)  

Configuration procedure From

" Preparation for configuration (Common procedure)" (page 5-4)

Display for Setting 1. Safety : You can configure safety-related functions. 2. Non-Safety : You can configure non-safety functions. 3. Others : You can configure other functions.

Setting 1.Safety 2.Non-Safety 3.Others

Display for configuration of start/restart mode*1 Manual : Manual start / Manual restart Automatic : Automatic start / Automatic restart

11.Start/   Restart   Manual

Press Press

Enter 

or to select "1. Safety". to set.

Press , and then the third row blinks. Use the keys to change the start/restart mode. Press to set. Enter 

Enter 

Display for configuration of EDM Enable : EDM EDM function enabled Disable : EDM function function disabled

 

Press , and then the third row blinks. Use the keys to  change  the   EDM configuration. Press to set. Enter 

12.EDM Enable

Enter 

Display for the configuration of minimum detectable object size 30, 40, 50, 70 and 150 mm are options

13.Detection   Capability   70mm

Press , and then the third row blinks. Use the keys to change the minimum detectable object size. Press to set. Enter 

Enter 

Display for the configuration of response time* 2 60 to 480 ms are options

14.Response   Time   120ms

Press , and then the third row blinks. Use the keys to change the response time. Press to set. Enter 

Enter 

Display for the configuration of protection zone*3 "Details of display for the   to  Refer

configuration configura tion of protection zone" (page 5-7) (1) to (3) : The distance of protection zone   0 to maximum distance in units of 10 mm

0

180 (1) Protection zone

Display for saving the configuration Yes: You save the configuration to the SZ No: You don't save the configuration to the SZ

Enter 

Enter 

(1)

(4)

16.Zone    Left 700 M 700



Press , and then the item 2 blinks. Use the keys to change the distance (2) of protection zone. Press to set. Enter 

Enter 

(2) (3) (4) to (6) : 90 (2) The SZ indicates the measured distance value in the direction of arrow in the display. It indicates that the distance to the object located at the direction of 90 degrees (to front boundary), 180 degrees (to left boundary) and 0 degree (to right boundary). Units are "mm" or "inch". You can configure the protection zone based on the measured distance value, which is the distance to something you prepare, such as flat board.

Press , and then the item 1 blinks. Use the keys to change the distance (1) of protection zone. Press to set.

15.Zone      Front   1400 M1350

(5)

Press , and then the item 3 blinks. Use the keys to change the distance (3) of protection zone. Press to set. Enter 

17.Zone



Right  700 M 750 M  750

Enter 

(3)

(6)

In case of "Yes", press   No

Enter 

.

Save? Yes

In case of "No", press

ESC

.

To "Confirmation procedure" (page 5-9)

Return to the Display for configuration of start/restart mode

*1 The configuration for restart-delay (ON-delay) function cannot be performed through the manual configuration on the SZ. *2 The configuration for scan cycle cannot be performed through the manual configuration on the SZ.

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

  "2-6 Response time and scan cycle" (page 2-11) *3 You can only configure the quadrate and rectangular protection zone through the manual manual configuration on the SZ.

5-5

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

Note

• Press on any display for the configuration, and then go back to the "Display for setting". • Even though the configurations are changed at each step on the conf configuration iguration procedure, the SZ does ESC

not enable these configurations at this moment. In order to enable these configurations, you must select "Y "Yes" es" at the "Display for saving the configuration" and complete the following confirmation procedures. If you change the mode switch to "A: RUN/PC communication" without saving these configurations, the following display appears, and then the SZ goes back to the normal operation without enabling these configuration. (The SZ operates in accordance with the original configurations.)

5

  Setting   Canceled

M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

• If you change the mode switch tto o "A: R RUN/PC UN/PC Commun Communication" ication" without confirmation procedur procedures, es, the folfollowing display appears to show that the SZ is waiting for the configuration.   Setting   Not  Completed

Waiting For Configu  ration

• The maximum pr protection otection distance v varies aries depending on the minimum dete detectable ctable object siz size. e. If you you change the current configuration of minimum detectable object size to smaller one, the following display may appear, and then the protection distance may be automatically changed accordingly. This is because the protection distance configured corresponding to the current minimum detectable object size may not meet the specification of maximum protection distance corresponding to new minimum detectable object size. If you find the following display, you must reconfigure the protection zone according to the specification. "2-3 Protection zone" (page 2-6)   CAUTION   Zone   Changed

• If you change the cur current rent conf configura iguration tion for the the distance (1) of the protection zone, the following display may appear, and then the distance (2) and (3) of the protection zone may be automatically changed accordingly in order to meet the specification of maximum protection zone according to the new protection distance (1). If you find the following display display,, you must reconfigure the protection zone according to that specification.

Reference

  CAUTION

  CAUTION

  CAUTION   Zone

 Zone(Left)   Changed

 Zone(Right)   Changed

(Left/Right)   Changed

If you have any change from the default configuration, you can see an asterisk (*) in the lower left corner of the information display. display. 11.Reso  lution   30mm *

5-6

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

 

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

Details of display for the configuration of protection zone "2-3 Protection zone" (page 2-6)  

Example of Protection zone The specification of maximum protection zone

SZ

Protection zone configured 0

180

Rear Boundary

5 Right Boundary

Left Boundary

Protection zone origin 90 Front

 

Front Boundary

Condition for the configuration of protection zone

You can configure the protection zone on the SZ under the following condition. The fo following llowing conditions are always applicable. (1) The shape of the protection zone must be the quadrate or rectangular. (2) The protection zone composed of 3 distances (distance 1, 2 and 3) must be within the specification of maximum protection zone. (3) The rear boundary of the protection zone must be on the line including the protection zone origin. (4) The distance from the protection zone origin to the front boundary must be 100 mm or more. The distance from the protection zone origin to the left or right boundary must be also 100 mm or more.

The following protection zone is beyond the specification of maximum protection zone

The rear boundary of protection zone is not on the line including the protection zone origin

0

The distance from the protection zone origin   to the right boundary is less than 100 mm

180

100 mm

M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

5-7

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

 

Detail procedure for the configuration of protection zone

In order to configure the protection zone, especially the shape of the protection zone, you must determine the 3 distances from the protection zone origin, 1) to front boundary, 2) to left boundary, and 3) right boundary. 15. 15. Dis Displ pla ay ffor or Fro ront nt bo boun unda dary ry 

17. Display for Right boundary

 

15.Zone     Front     100 1000 0 M1350

5

16. Displ ispla ay for for Le Left ft bo boun unda dary ry



16.Zone     Left    900 M 700

M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

 

17.Zone    Right    900 M 750

SZ

0

SZ 0

o

o

180

o

o

180

Right

Left

o

90

Front

90o Front

*1 The protection zone image is shown assuming that the front panel is to be seen from the front side of the SZ. *2 "M∗∗∗∗" appears if the measured distance value execeeds 9,999 9,99 9 mm. Reference

• You can set the actual measured distance value as the distance of protection zone if you pres presss both and at the same time while the distance of protection zone is blinking. • If you perform the above operat operation ion when the measured measured distance value exceeds the maximum protection distance, the following display appears, and then the distance of protection zone automatically set to the maximum protection distance according to the specification. If you find the following display display,, you must reconfigure the protection zone according to the specification. Over Range

• When the above display appears, you can see the original original display if you leave th the e SZ untouched or press or . Enter 

 

ESC

5-8

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

 

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

Confirmation procedure The following confirmation procedure is required to enable the configuration. According to the following procedure, you must confirm whether the configuration is as intended. During saving the configuration

From the "Configuration procedure" (page 5-5)

At co comp mple letition on of sa savi ving ng  

 

Saving

Blinking for a few seconds

OK

 Confirm   Safety Parameters

  Completed

Moves to the next display automatically

Moves to the next display automatically

5

11.Start/   Restart   Manual

Display for confirmation of start/restart mode Manual

Inititia In iall displa s playy fo forr co conf nfir irma matition on

: Manual start / Manual restart

M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

Automatic:: Automatic start / Automatic restart Automatic

Display for confirmation of EDM

12.EDM

Enable : EDM function enabled

 

Enable

Disable : EDM function disabled

Display for the confirmation of minimum detectable object size 30, 40, 50, 70 and 150 mm are options.

13.Detection   Capability   70mm

Display for the confirmation of response time 60ms to 480ms are options.

14.Response   Time   120ms

Display for the confirmation of protection zone

 15.Zone     Front    100 1000 0 M1350

You must confirm that the protection zone is configured as intended. If it is intended, you should press

to proceed to the next display.  16.Zone     Left 900 M 700



17.Zone

 

Right 900 M 750

To

"Details of display for the confirmation of protection zone" (page 5-11)

Display for acceptance No : You don't accept the configuration based on your confirmation. Yes : You accept the configuration based on your confirmation.

  All  Parameters   OK? No Yes

In case of "No"

In case of "Yes", press In case of "No", press

Enter 

ESC

.

.

In case of "Yes" If you change the mode switch to "A: Run / PC Communication" after

  Setting   Not  Completed

Moves automatically

  Setting  Completed

Moves automatically

The displ display ay goes goes back back to to "Display "Display for settin setting" g"

the display goes back to "Display for setting", the SZ operates in accordance with new configuration.

The displ display ay goes goes back back to to "Display "Display for settin setting" g"

5-9

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

Note

• If you press the   No

Enter 

at each step step,, the foll followin owing g display display appears. appears.

Cancel? Yes

If you select "No" (press

ESC

), the display goes back to the confirmation procedure.

If you select "Y "Yes" es" (press the display goes back to the "display foreven setting" after the following display appears. In this case, the SZ), does not perform the normal operation if you change the mode switch to "A: RUN/PC Communication", because the configuration is not completed. Enter 

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

  Setting   Not  Completed

• If you change the mo mode de switch to "A "A:: RUN RUN/PC /PC Communication" without completing the confirmation confirmation procedure, the following display appears to show that the SZ is waiting for the configuration.   Setting   Not  Completed

Waiting For Configu  ration

5-10

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

 

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

Details of display for the confirmation of protection zone You must confirm whether the protection zone zo ne is configured as intended. You You must confirm whether wh ether the SZ detects the object, such as test piece, at the boundary of protection zone. From the confirmation procedure

Confirm  Protection   Zone

Moves automatically

Display for the confirmation of protection zone

 

Confirm Zone   

The sequence of confirmation

 (1) While you find the display for the confirmation of protection zone, you should move an object, such as test piece, along with the boundary of the protection zone. Object (ex. Test piece)

SZ

Left boundary

Right boundary

Front boundary

 (2) The information display lights in red if the SZ detects an object in the protection zone. On the other hand, the information display lights in green if the SZ detects no object in the protection zone. You can easily confirm the boundary of the protection zone because of the changing color on the information display.  (3) The following display appears at the "display for the confirmation of protection zone" if the SZ detects an object all over the boundary of the protection zone. The display changes to the "display for acceptance" if you press at this moment.   Press Down   

Note

The segment will be inverted if the SZ detects  an object on this boundary

You can find that there are some segments that are not inverted on the boundary unless the SZ detects an object all over the boundary of the protection zone. If you press in this situation, the following display appears, and then the display goes back to the "display for the confirmation of protection zone". Confirmation   Not  Completed

Reference

You can perform per form the confirmation fro boundary in any order. order.

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

Reference

5-11

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

Configuration of Non-safety Function Note

If the SZ Configurator is used to configure the SZ, the following display appears and you cannot move the configuration process forward. Unacceptable  Operation

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

If you want to perform the manual configuration on the SZ, you must initialize the configuration that was carried out through the SZ Configurator. For more information, see " Configuration of Others" (page 5-17)

 

Configuration procedure From

" Preparation for configuration (Common procedure)" (page 5-4)

Display for Setting 1. Safety

: You can configure the safety-related functions functions..

2. Non-Safety

: You can configure the non-safety functions.

3. Others

: You can configure the other functions.

Display for the configuration on AUX1

OSSD State Output:"OSSD Output:"OSSD state output" (page 2-37) Error/Alert Output:"Error Output:"Error or alert output" (page 2-37) Display for the configuration on AUX2

Error/Alert Output:"Error Output:"Error or alert output" (page 2-37) Warning Zone Output:"Output for detection in the warning zone" (page 2-38)

Setting 1.Safety 2.Non-Safety 3.Others

21.AUX1

or

Press

Enter 

Press

Enter 

Press

  OSSD State   Output

22.AUX2    

Press

Press

Enter 

Press

Enter 

Press

to set.

, and then the third and forth row blinks. or

Press

Error Output

to select "2. Non-Safety".

to change the AUX1 function.

to set.

once, and then the third and forth row blinks. or

Enter 

to change the AUX2 function.

to set.

You go to the "A" in page 5-14 5-14   if you select "Warning Zone Output".

Display for saving the configuration Yes:Yo You u save the configuration to the SZ. No :Yo You u don't save the configuration to the SZ.

In case of "Y "Yes", es", press   No

In case of "No", press

Save?

Enter 

ESC

.

.

Yes

In case of "No" Display goes back to the "Display for the configuration on AUX1".

In case of "Ye "Yes" s" Blinking in a few seconds  

Saving

Moves automatically   Setting  Completed

Display goes back to the "Display for setting".

5-12

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Note

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

• Press on any display for the configuration, and then go back to the "Display for setting". • Even though the configurations are changed at each step on the conf configuration iguration procedure, the SZ does not enable these configurations at this moment. In order to enable these configurations, you must select "Y "Yes" es" at the "Display for saving the configuration" and complete the following confirmation procedures. If ESC

you change the mode switch to "A: RUN/PC Communication" without saving these configurations, the following display appears, and then the SZ goes back to the normal operation without enabling these configuration. (The SZ operates in accordance with the original configurations.)

5

  Setting Canceled

• The maximum warning distance varies depending on the minimum detectable object size. If you change the current configuration of minimum detectable object size to smaller one, the following display may appear, and then the warning distance may be automatically changed accordingly. This is because the warning distance configured corresponding to the current minimum detectable object size may not meet the specification of maximum warning distance corresponding to new minimum detectable object size. If you find the following display, display, you must reconfigure the war warning ning zone according to that specification. "2-4 Warning zone" (page 2-8)   CAUTION   Zone   Changed

• If you change the current cur rent configuration for the distance (1) of the warning zone, the following display may appear, and then the distance (2) and (3) of the warning zone may be automatically changed accordingly in order to meet the specification of maximum warning zone according to the new warning distance (1). If you find the following display, display, you must reconfigure the war warning ning zone according to the specification.

Reference

  CAUTION

  CAUTION

 Zone(Left)   Changed

 Zone(Right)   Changed

  CAUTION   Zone (Left/Right)   Changed

If you have any change from the default configuration, you can see an asterisk (*) in the lower left corner of the information display. display. 22.AUX2 Warning Zone * Output

M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

5-13

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

A (from page 5-12 "22.AUX2") 5-12 "22.AUX2")

Display for the configuration of minimum detectable object size 30, 40, 50, 70 and 150 mm are options

Display for the configuration of response time*1

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

60ms to 480 ms are options

Display for the configuration of warning zone*3 "Details of display for the Refer to  

configuration of warning zone" (page 5-15) (1) to (3) : The distance of warning zone  

0 to maximum distance in units of 10 mm

0

24.Response   Time   60ms  (Warning-Z)

 25.Zone     Front   1600 M1350

(1)

Press

Enter 

Use the

, and then the third row blinks blinks.. keys to change the minimum detectable object size.

Press

Enter 

to set set..

Press

Enter 

, and then the third row blinks blinks..

Use the

keys to change the response time time..

Press

Enter 

Press

Enter 

Use the

to set set..

, and then the item 1 blinks blinks.. keys to change the distance (1) of protection zone.

Press

Enter 

Press

Enter 

to set set..

(4)

180 (1)

Warning zone

(4) to (6) :

23.Detection   Capability   70mm  (Warning-Z)

(3)

90

(2)

The SZ indicates the measured distance value in

 26.Zone   Left  900 M 700



(2)

, and then the item 2 blinks blinks..  (2) of protection zone. keys to change the distance distance (2)

Use the Press

Enter 

Press

Enter 

to set set..

(5)

the direction of arrow in the display display.. It indicates that the distance to the object located at the direction of 90 degrees (to front boundary), 180 degrees (to left boundary) and 0 degree (to right boundary). Units are "mm" or "inch".

 27.Zone   Right  900 M 750 

(3)

keys to change the distance (3) of protection zone.

Use the

Press

, and then the item 3 blinks blinks..

Enter 

to set set..

(6)

You can configure the warning zone based on the measured distance value, which is the distance to something you prepare prepare,, such as flat board.

 To  To

"Display for saving the configuration" (page 5-12)

* When the configuration is made using the SZ, the shape of the protection zone is limited to a quadrate or rectangle.

5-14

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

 

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

Details of display for the configuration of warning zone "2-4 Warning zone" (page 2-8)  

Example of warning zone The specification of maximum warning zone

SZ

Warning zone configured 0

180

Rear Boundary

5 Right Boundary

Left Boundary

Protection zone origin 90 Front

 

Front Boundary

Condition for the configuration of warning zone

You can configure the warning zone on the SZ under the following condition. The following conditions are always applicable. (1) The shape of the warning zone must be the quadrate or rectangular. rectangular. (2) The warning zone composed of 3 distances (distance 1, 2 and 3) must be within the specification of maximum warning zone. (3) The rear boundary of the warning zone must must be on the line including the protection zone origin. (4) The distance from the protection zone origin to the front boundary must be 100 mm or m more. ore. The distance from the protection zone origin to the left or right boundary must be also 100 mm or more. The following warning zone is beyond the  The rear boundary of warning zone is not on The distance distance from the prot protection ection zzone one origin specification specificat ion of maximum warning zone the line including the protection zone originto the right r ight boundary is less than 100 mm

0

180

100 mm

M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

5-15

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

 

Detail procedure for the configuration of warning zone

In order to configure the warning zone, especially the shape of the warning zo zone, ne, you must determine the 3 distances from the protection zone origin, 1) to front boundary, 2) to left boundary boundary,, and 3) right boundary. 25. Display for Front boundar y

26. Display for Left boundary

27. Display for Right boundar y

25.Zone        Front    

26.Zone     Left 

  27.Zone     Right 

  1600 M1800

 

 





900 M1000

900 M1000

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

SZ

SZ 0

180

0

180

Right

Left

90 Front

90 Front

*1 The warning zone image image is shown assum assuming ing that the front panel is to be seen from the front side of the SZ. *2 "M∗∗∗∗" appears if the measured distance value exceeds 9,999 mm. Reference

• You can set the actual measured measured distance value as the dis distance tance of warning zone if you press press both and at the same time while the distance of warning zone is blinking. • If you perform the above operation w when hen the measured dis distance tance value exceeds the maximum maximum warning distance, the following display appears, and then the distance of warning zone automatically set to the maximum warning distance according to the specification. If you find the following foll owing display, display, you must reconfigure the warning zone according to the specification. Over Range

• When the above display appears, you can see the original original display if you leave th the e SZ untouched or press

Enter 

or  

ESC

.

5-16

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

Configuration of Others " Preparation for configuration (Common procedure)" (page 5-4)

Display for Setting 1. Safety : You can configure the safety-related functions . 2. Non-Safety 3. Others

: You can configure the non-safety functions. : You can configure the other functions .

Setting 1.Safety 2.Non-Safety 3.Others

Press Press

Enter 

or to select "3. Others". to set .

5 ESC

Display for password change

You can change the password. If you change

31.Change   Password

Input New Password   --------

the password through this configuration, that Enter 

password is still enabled for SZ Configurator.

keys for

character selection and the key to change the digit.

Press Enter  to set.

Confirm New Password   ********

Reserved for future use.

Press the

Press

Enter 

after confirmation

of password.

32.Reserved   For Future   Us e

 

OK

To "Display for setting".

  Completed

ESC

Display for initiali initialization zation You can bring all configurations, except for password,

33.Initiali  zation

back to the factory default. Yess : Initialize Ye

Start Initiali  zation No Yes Enter 

No : Not initialize

Display for contrast setting You can change the contrast of the display display.. You can get high brightness if you increase the number.

Reference

Enter 

Press , and then the third row blinks Use the keys to change the number Press to set. Enter 

34.Contrast  

6

Enter 

Hold down Display for Unit setting You can change the units for the distance, such as protection distance or warning distance. Either "mm" or "inch" is available.

Press ESC in case of "No". Press in case of "Yes" *2 .

Press , and then the third row blinks Use the keys to change the units Press to set. Enter 

35.Change   Unit  

for over 3 seconds.

mm

Enter 

When setting the contrast settings of the communication type (SZ-16D), refer to (SZ-16D)" (page 5-32). 5-32).

"Contrast settings

M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

5-17

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

*1 The following display display (1) appears if you complete the password change. The following displa display y (2) or (3) appears if you fail to complete the password change.  

(1) In case of completion of password change. You can use new password. Leave tth he SZ SZ un untouched or or pr press or to OK go back to the "Display for setting". Enter 

 

ESC

  Completed

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

(2) In case of short digit password. You must create a password with 4 characters or more. Pr Pres esss or to go ba back ck to the the "Di "Disp spla layy ffor or pass passwo word rd ch chan ange ge". ". Unaccepted Enter new password with 4 characters or more. Enter 

 

ESC

4 or More Characters

(3) In case of password change failed. The previous password is still valid. Pr Pres esss or to go ba back ck to the the "Di "Disp spla layy ffor or pass passwo word rd ch chan ange ge". ".   Failed Enter new password again. Enter 

Note

 

ESC

The configuration for safety-related functions and the others cannot be performed without the password (ex. when you forget a password.) You must strictly strictly keep the password. "When you forget the password" (page 6-57)

*2 The following display appears if you perform the initialization. i nitialization. Initiali  zation

The SZ is under initialization.

 Processing

Initialization successful

 

OK

Initialization failed

 

Failed

  Completed

Leave the SZ untouched or press Enter  or ESC to go back to the " Display for

  ESC Press Enter  or to go back to the "Display for initialization".

initialization"

You should perform the initialization again.

5-18

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-2

Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M

Reconfirmation Procedure Note

• If the SZ Conf Configurator igurator is used to configure the SZ, you cannot reconfirm the config configurations urations on the SZ SZ.. • It is necessary for the S SZ-16V Z-16V and SZ-16D to reconfirm the configurations configurations through the SZ Configurator, Configurator, because it does not provide the system for the manual configuration on the SZ.

Normal  Operation

Display for normal operation

If you change the mode switch to "B: Configuration on SZ" after opening the setting cover, and then the following display appears.

"1-4 Part description" (page 1-10) Display for selection of what you want to do

1. Setting

: You canre configure/cha nge something .

2. Reconfirm : Yo Youu can confirm the configuration.

Display for reconfirmation 1. Safety

: You can confirm the safety-related functions configured.

2. Non-Safety 3. Others

: You can confirm the non-safety functions configured. : You cannot select this.

Parameter

Press Press

or Enter 

to select "2. Reconfirm".

to set.

1.Setting 2.Reconfirm

Reconfirm 1.Safety 2.Non-Safety

Press Press

or Enter 

to select the item for reconfirmation.

to set.

3.Others

You can confirm the configuration though

key.*1

*1 You cannot change the configuration in reconf reconfirmation irmation procedure. If you press at each step, the following display apears. Enter 

Locked

If you want to change the configuration, refer to

"5-2 Manual configuration for SZ-01S and SZ-04M" (page 5-4)

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

5-19

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-3  Manual configuration for SZ-16V You can perform the following configuration on the SZ if you change the mode switch to "B: Configuration on SZ. • Pas Passwo sword rd change change • Init Initia ialilize ze • Con Contra trast st change change • Uni Units ts change change You must change the mode switch to "A: RUN/PC Communication" in order to start the normal operation.

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

Display for normal operation

If you change the mode switch to "B: Configuration on

Normal  Operation

SZ" after opening the setting cover, and then the following followin g display appears.

"1-4 Part description" (page 1-10) Display for "Input Password"

You can enter a password with 4 to 8 characters.

Press the

Input Password   ________

The followings are acceptable characters: numbers 0 through 9, letters "a" through "z", or a

the

keys for character selection and

key to change the digit.

Press

Enter 

to set.

hyphen. For changing the factory default, you Password is wrong.

must enter "1111" as default password.

Password is acceptable.

Display for Password acceptance

 

If the password is not acceptable, this does not appeared. Display

  Password   Accepted

OK

 

Failed

Display for "Input Password" appears again after a while

  Wrong   Password

for "Input Password" appears again in this situation.

You can see next display if you leave the SZ untouched or press

To B (page 5-21)

Enter 

or  

ESC

.

5-20

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-3

Manual configuration for SZ-16V

From B (page 5-20)

ESC

Display for password change You can change the password. If you change

1. Change   Password

Input New Password   --------

the password through this configuration, that

keys for

character selection and the key to change the digit.

Press Enter  to set.*1

Enter 

password is still enabled for SZ Configurator. Confirm New Password   ********

 Reserved for future use.

Press the

Press

Enter 

after 

confirmation of password.

2. Reserved   For Future   Use

 

OK

To "Display for Password change".

  Completed

ESC

Display for initialization

You can bring all configurations, except for password,

3. Initiali  zation

 back to the factory default. Yes : Initialize

Start Initiali  zation No Yes

Press

You can change the contrast of the display. You can get high brightness if you increase the

 

Enter 

Press

Enter 

in case of

"No". Press

, and then the third row blinks.

Use the 6

in case of

"Yes".

No : Not initialize

4. Contrast

ESC

*2

Enter 

Display for contrast setting

Press

Enter 

keys to change the number. to set.

number. Hold down

Display for Unit setting You can change the units for the distance, such

5. Change   Unit

as protection distance or warning distance.

 

Press

Enter 

for over 3 seconds.

, and then the third row blinks.

Use the mm

Press

Enter 

keys to change the units. to set.

Either "mm" or "inch" is available.

*1 The following display display (1) appears if you complete the p password assword change. The following displa display y (2) or (3) appears if you fail to complete the password change.

(1) In case of completion of password change. You can use new password. Enter 

 

OK

 

Le Leav ave e th the etoSZ unto touch uched edfor or setting" pr pres esss or  go back theun "Display

ESC

to

  Completed

(2) In case of short digit password. You must create a password with 4 characters or more. Pr Pres esss or to go ba back ck to the the ""Di Disp spla layy ffor or pass passwo worrd cha chang nge" e".. Unaccepted Enter new password with 4 characters or more. Enter 

 

ESC

4 or More Characters

(3) In case of password change failed.previous password is still valid. Pr Pres esss or to go ba back ck to the the ""Di Disp spla layy ffor or pass passwo worrd cha chang nge" e"..   Failed Enter new password again. Enter 

Note

 

ESC

The configuration for safety-related functions and the others cannot be performed without the password (ex. when you forget a password). You must strictly keep the password.

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

When you forget the password (page 6 57)

5-21

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-3

Manual configuration for SZ-16V

*2 The followin following g displa display y appears if you per perform form the init initializat ialization. ion. Initiali  zation

The SZ is under initialization.

 Processing

Initialization successful

Initialization failed

  OK   Completed

 

Failed

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

Leave the SZ untouched or press or

ESC

Enter 

to go back to the " Display for

initialization"

Press

Enter 

or  

ESC

to go back to the

"Display for initialization". You should perform the initialization again.

5-22

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-4  Monitoring The SZ can indicate the I/O information, zone information, and OSSD OFF history through the infor information mation display,, in addition to the information display infor mation related to the configuration and c current urrent status of the SZ.

Preparation for monitoring (Common procedure) Note

If the SZ Configurator is used to configure the SZ, you can only check "1. I/O" and "3. History" through this monitoring.

Display for normal operation

Normal  Operation

Hold down

5

for over 3 seconds, and then the

Enter 

following display appears.

Hold down

Enter 

for over 3 seconds.

ESC

Display for monitoring In case of SZ-16V, 1. I/O 2. History

Information 1.I/O 2.Zone 3.History

Use the Press

Enter 

keys to select. to set.

on this display. ("Zone" is not shown.) In case of SZ-16D, 1. I/O 2. History 3. Contrast will be displayed. When selecting Contrast,  " Contrast settings (SZ-16D)" refer to  to  (page 5-32)

In case of I/O selected

In case of zone selected

11.I/O 12.Wiring

In case of history selected

21.Protect 22.Warning

31.OSSD OFF

Display for I/O information

Display for zone information

Display for history information

I/O   I/O

Protect : It displays the configured

OSSD OFF:

 

value and the measured value for

It displays the reason and time for

Wiring: It displays the color and the

 

3 distances of the protection zone.

OSSD-OFF. Additionally, it displays

 

Warning: It displays the configured

the detected position in case of

 

value and the measured value for

detection of object in the protection zone.

 

3 distances of the warning zone.

: ItIt displays the ON/OFF state of

 

Press

each AUX output and each input. assigned function for each wire.

ESC

to go back to the "Display for monitoring". Press

Use the Press

Enter 

keys to select. to set.

ESC

to go back to the "Display for monitoring". Press

Use the Press

Enter 

keys to select.

ESC

Press

to go back to the "Display for monitoring".

Enter 

to set.

to set.

In case of selecting "I/O" " I/O monitoring" (page 5-24)

In case of selecting "Protect" " Protection zone monitoring"

In case of selecting "Wiring" " Wiring confirmation" (page 5-25)

(page 5-29) In case of selecting "Warning"

In case of selecting OSSD OFF " OSSD OFF History" (page 5-31)

M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

Warning zone monitoring (page 5-30)

5-23

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-4

Monitoring

I/O monitoring You should refer to " Preparation for monitoring (Common procedure)" (page 5-23) 5-23) before  before using this function. The information on the display varies depending on the model.

Select I/O

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

I/O Monitor1 Input 12   ON OFF --

11.I/O 12.Wiring ESC

The information display shows the ON/OFF state for Input 1 and 2 at the upper side. On the other hand, it shows the ON/OFF state for AUX output 1 and 2.

The item in question is ON when there is a square " " for ON and a dash "-" for fo r OFF.

Press

ESC

to go back to

The item in question is OFF when there there is a square " " for OFF and a

the previous display. 

dash "-" for ON. I/O Monitor2 AUX 12   ON OFF --

In the example to the left:

I/O Monitor1 Input 123456   ON ON -- -  O F F -- -

The Th e in info form rmat atio ion n di disp spla layy sh show owss th the e ON ON/O /OFF FF st stat ate e fo forr In Inpu putt 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

Input 1 and 2 are ON state, and AUX output 1 and 2 are ON state.

Select I/O 11.I/O 12.Wiring ESC

and 6 at th and the e up upp per si sid de. On th the e ot othe herr ha hand nd,, it sh show owss th the e ON ON/O /OFF FF st stat ate e for AUX output 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. The item in question is ON when when there is a square " " for ON and a dash "-" for OFF. OFF.

Press

ESC

to go back to

The item in question is OFF when there is a square " " for OFF and a dash "-" for ON.

the previous display. In the example to the left: I/O Monitor2 AUX 123456   ON -  O F F -- --

Input 1, 2, and 5 are ON state, while Input 3, 4, and 6 are OFF state.

INP Monitor1 BK DCBAdcba --  -   ON OFF - - -- 

The information display shows the ON/OFF state for Bank input A, B, C, D, a, b, c, and d.

AUX output 1, 2, 5, and 6 are ON state, while AUX output 3 and 4 are OFF state.

Select I/O 11.I/O 12.Wiring ESC

The item in question is is ON when there is a square "

" for ON

and a dash "-" for OFF. The item in question is is OFF when there is a square " " for OFF

Press to go back to the previous display.  display. 

and a dash "-" for ON.

ESC

In the example to the left: Bank input D, A, c, and b are ON state, and bank input C, B, d, and a are OFF state.

IMP Monitor2   RST EDM  ON OFF -

It shows the ON/OFF state for reset input (RST) and EDM input. In the example to the left: Reset input is ON state, and EDM input is OFF state.

AUX Monitor   1234   ON -OFF - -

It shows the ON/OFF state for AUX output 1, 2, 3, and 4. In the example to the left:

AUX output 1 and 2 are ON state, while AUX output 3 and 4 are OFF state.

 

5-24

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-4

Monitoring

Wiring confirmation You should refer to  function.

" Preparation for monitoring (Common procedure)" (page 5-23) before 5-23) before using this

Select Wiring

It shows (1) the cable color and (2) the assigned function.

Cable 11.I/O 12.Wiring

Brown

(1)  

(2) +24VDC

ESC

The information on the display varies depending on the model and the configuration. Input 1 and AUX output 1 in the third row corresponds to the

Press

ESC

to go back to

Input 1 and AUX output 1 of the I/O monitoring.

the previous display.  display.  Cable Blue  

0V

You can check all information related to the cable color and the assigned function if you press

.

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

5-25

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-4

Monitoring

The following table shows the cable color and assigned function that you can see on the information display SZ-01S Cable Brown

(1)  

(2) +24VDC

(1)

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

Brown Blue Black White Yellow Input 1 Red Input 2 Orange AUX 1

Orange/Black AUX 2

Cable color

Brown Blue Black White

+24 V DC 0V OSSD 1 OSSD 2 Reset Yellow Check Input Not Used Red EDM Not Used Error Orange Alert Error/Alert OSSD State Protection-Z Orange/Black Warning-Z Interlock

(2)

Assigned function

+24 V DC 0V OSSD 1 OSSD 2 Reset input Check input Not used EDM input Not used Error output Alert output Error or alert output OSSD state output Output for detection in protection zone Output for detection in warning zone Interlock-reset-ready output

5-26

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-4

Monitoring

SZ-04M Cable Brown

(1)  

(2) +24VDC

(1)

Cable color

(2)

Assigned function

Brown

Brown

+24 V DC

+24 V DC

Blue Black White

Blue Black White

Gray

Gray

Gray/Black

Gray/Black

Yellow Input 1

Yellow

Red Input 2

Red

Light Blue Input 3

Light Blue

0V OSSD 1 OSSD 2 Not Used OSSD 3 Not used OSSD 4 Reset Check Input RST (OSSD 1/2) Not Used EDM (OSSD 1/2) Not Used Bank 1 Muting 1 Teach Mode

0V OSSD 1 OSSD 2 Not used OSSD 3 Not used OSSD 4 Reset input Check input Reset input for OSSD 1/2 Not used EDM input for OSSD 1/2 Not used Bank input 1 Muting input 1 Teach mode input

L-Blue/Black Input 4

Light Blue/Black

Yellow/Black Input 5

Yellow/Black

Red/Black Input 6

Red/Black

Not Used Bank 2 Muting 2 Teach Ready Not Used Bank 3 Override RST (OSSD 3/4) Not Used Bank 4 EDM (OSSD 3/4)

Not used Bank input 2 Muting input 2 Teach ready input Not used Bank input 3 Override input Reset input for OSSD 3/4 Not used Bank input 4 EDM input for OSSD 3/4

Orange AUX 1

Orange/Black AUX 2

Pink AUX 3

Pink/Black AUX 4

Green AUX 5

Green/Black AUX 6

Orange

Not Used State Info.1 State Info.2 Error Alert

Orange/Black Error/Alert Mute/O-ride Muting Lamp OSSD State Pink OSSD 1/2 State OSSD 3/4 State Protection-Z Protection 12 Pink/Black Protection 34 Protection-A Protection-B Warning-Z Green Warning-A Warning-B Interlock Green/Black Interlock 1/2 Interlock 3/4

Not used State information output 1 State information output 2 Error output Alert output Error or alert output Muting or Override output Muting lamp output OSSD state output OSSD1/2 state output OSSD3/4 state output Output for detection in protection zone Output for detection in protection zone for OSSD1/2 Output for detection in protection zone for OSSD3/4 Output for detection in protection zone (A) Output for detection in protection zone (B) Output for detection in warning zone Output for detection in warning zone (A) Output for detection in warning zone (B) Interlock-reset-ready output Interlock-reset-ready output for OSSD 1/2 Interlock-reset-ready output for OSSD 3/4

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

5-27

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-4

Monitoring

SZ-16V/SZ-16D Cable Brown

(1)  

(2) +24VDC

(1)

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

Brown Blue Black White Yellow Input 1 Red Input 2 Light Blue Input 3 Gray Input 4 Pink Input 5 Green Input 6 L-Blue/Black Input 7 Gray/Black Input 8 Pink/Black Input 9 Green/Black Input 10 Orange AUX 1 Orange/Black AUX 2 Yellow/Black AUX 3 Red/Black AUX 4

Cable color

(2)

Assigned function

Brown Blue Black White

+24 V DC 0V OSSD 1 OSSD 2

+24 V DC 0V OSSD 1 OSSD 2

Yellow

Reset

Reset input

Red

EDM

EDM input

Light blue

Bank A

Bank input A

Not Used Bank B Not Used Bank C Not Used Bank D

Not used Bank input B Not used Bank input C Not used Bank input D

Bank a Not Used Bank b Not Used Bank c Not Used Bank d

Bank input a Not used Bank input b Not used Bank input c Not used Bank input d

Gray Pink Green Light Blue/Black Gray/Black Pink/Black Green/Black

Not Used State Info.1 State Info.2 Error Orange/Black Alert Error/Alert OSSD State Yellow/Black Protection-Z Warning-1

Orange

Red/Black

Warning-2 Interlock

Not used State information output 1 State information output 2 Error output Alert output Error or alert output OSSD state output Output for detection in protection zone Output for detection in warning zone 1 Output for detection in warning zone 2 Interlock-reset-ready output

5-28

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-4

Monitoring

Protection zone monitoring You should refer to  function. Note

" Preparation for monitoring (Common procedure)" (page 5-23) before 5-23) before using this

• The SZSZ-16V 16V or the SZ SZ-16D -16D cannot cannot perf perform orm this function. function. • If the SZ Configurator is used to configure the SZ, you cannot select this function. The following display appears if you try to select.

5

Unacceptable   Operation

Select Protect 21.Protect 22.Warning

Display for the monitoring on front boundary

  Protect Zone   Front    138 1380 0 M1400

 You should refer to "Details of display for the configuration of protection zone" (page 5-7)

 Protect Zone Left 710 M 700

 You should refer to "Details of display for the configuration of protection zone" (page 5-7)

ESC

Press

ESC

to go back

to the previous display.  display. 



 Protect Zone Right 730 M 700 

Display for the monitoring on left boundary

Display for the monitoring on right boundary

 You should refer to "Details of display for the configuration of protection zone" (page 5-7)

M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

5-29

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-4

Monitoring

Warning zone monitoring You should refer to function. Note

" Preparation for monitoring (Common procedure)" (page 5-23) 5-23) before  before using this

• The SZSZ-16V 16V or the SZ SZ-16D -16D cannot cannot perf perform orm this function. function. • If the SZ Confi Configurator gurator is used to configure the S SZ, Z, you cannot sselect elect this function. The following following display appears if you try to select.

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

Unacceptable   Operation

• The The fo follo llowi wing ng display display appears  appears if you don’t configure the warning zone.  No Setting

Select Warning  Warning Zone   Front    1380 M3000

21.Protect 22.Warning

Display for the monitoring on front boundary

 You should refer to "Details of display for the configuration of warning zone" (page 5-15)

ESC

Press ESC to go back to the previous display  Warning Zone Left 710 M1400



 Warning Zone Right  730 M1400 

Display for the monitoring on front boundary

 You should refer to "Details of display for the configuration of warning zone" (page 5-15)

Display for the monitoring on front boundary

 You should refer to

"Details of display for the

configuration of warning zone" (page 5-15)

5-30

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-4

Monitoring

OSSD OFF History You should refer to " Preparation for monitoring (Common procedure)" (page 5-23) 5-23) before  before using this function. The SZ stores a history that the OSSD went to the OFF-state since the power to the SZ had been supplied. The SZ stores maximum 20 events. The SZ deletes the oldest event when new event occurs, if the records of events exceed 20.when You can check the the OSSD the OFF-state at "Display 1". You You can also check the time the OSSD wentreason to thewhy OFF-state andwent wenttoback to the ON-state. Note

The history is retained as long as the power is supplied to the SZ. The history is cleared when the power is turned off.

Display 1 Enter 

OSSD OFF 1 1/2  =1200mm   = 500mm  Dist=1300mm

31.OSSD OFF ESC

Press

ESC

Display 2 Enter 

Time 1   H. M. S. OFF 20:15:33 ON 20:16:01 ESC

to go back to

the previous display.  display.  Enter 

OSSD OFF 2 3/4  = 300mm   = 400mm  Dist= 500mm

Time 2   H. M. S. OFF 2:23:33 ON 2:23:34 ESC

It shows a history of max. 20 events.

 

It shows a history of max. 20 events.

Explanation on "Display 1" Information on "Display 1" varies depending on the reason why the OSSD went to the OFF-state. In case of detection in the protection zone OSSD OFF 1 1/2  =1200mm   = 500mm  Dist=1300mm

This is an order of the events in the history. The most recent event is #1. These values means that the SZ detects an object at 1200 mm in the front direction and 500 mm in the right direction. "Dist" means the distance from the

You can check whether the

protection zone origin.

OSSD 1/2 or OSSD 3/4 goes to



the OFF-state for the SZ-04M.

Down arrow (): front direction

Except for the SZ-04M, it is

Up arrow (): rear direction

displayed with OSSD only only..

Right arrow (): left direction Left arrow (): right direction

Protection zone origin 0

1200 mm Detected position 500 mm

In case where the check input went to the ON-state (SZ-01S and SZ-04M only)

"2-14 Check input function" (page 2-43) OSSD OFF

2

 Check Input

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

5-31

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

5-4

Monitoring

 

In case where the laser shutdown was activated (Only for SZ-16V and SZ-16D)

"Laser Shutdown" (page 2-26) OSSD OFF

2

  Laser OFF

 

In case of error state

"Error state" (page 8-2)

5 M  a n  u  a l    C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  o n  t   h   e  S  Z 

OSSD OFF 20  Error

 

In case of no OSSD OFF history

In this case, "Display 2" does not appear. appear. OSSD OFF   No History

 

Explanation on "Display 2" "Display 2" indicates the time when the OSSD went to the OFF-state and went back to the ON-state. This time is counted from the power on. This is an order of the events in the history histor y. The most recent event is #1.

Time 1   H. M. S. OFF 20:15:33 ON 20:16:01

This means the OSSD has turned to the OFF-state at 20 hours, 15 min and 33 seconds since power on, and the OSSD has turned to the ON-state at 20 hours, 16 minutes and 1 second since power on. It does not show the time for "ON-state" if the reason is either "In case where the check input went to the ON-state" or "Error state".  state".  H: Hours M: Minutes S: Seconds

Contrast settings (SZ-16D) You should refer to

"Preparation for monitoring (Common procedure)" (page 5-23) before 5-23) before using this

function. Reference

When setting the contrast settings for models other than the communication type (SZ-16D), refer to "Configuration of Others" (page 5-17). 5-17).

Display for contrast setting You can change the contrast of the display. You can get high brightness if you increase the number.

Press

3.Contrast  

Enter 

Use the 6

Press

Enter 

once, and then the third row blinks. keys to change the number once more to set.

5-32

SZ-M-NO5-E

 

6  Configuration through the configuration software

66-1 1

Befo Before re usi using ng S SZ Z conf config igur urat atio ion n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6-2

6-2

Part Part nam names es and and func functio tions ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

66-3 3

Co Conf nfig igur urat atio ion n tab tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 6-11

6-4

Monito Monitoring ring tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 6-33

6-5

Operat Operation ion menu. menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 6-35

6-1

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-1

Before using SZ configuration

About the configuration software The configuration software integrates the safety device configuration software made by KEYENCE. The consists of the following four software applications. • Safety light curtain GL-R Series configuration software . • Safety light curtain SL-V configura configuration tion software software . Configurator>. • Safety laser scanne scannerr SZ-V config configuration uration softw software are . Configurator>. • Safety lase laserr scanner SZ configuration configuration software software Configurator>..

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  o  c n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

• Confi Configuratio guration n data can be made on PC even if the SZ main unit is not connected. connected.

System Envir Environment onment The following system requirements are necessary to use SZ Configurator. CPU

Compatible OS*1

Required memory size Display Free space on hard disk Communication interface Operation condition *1

*2

Pentium 4, 1.5 GHz or higher Windows 10 Windows 8.1 Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows XP (SP3 or later) 512 MB or more XGA (1024 x 768 pixels) or greater, High Color (16 bit) or greater 500 MB or more*2 USB 1.1 or more .NET Framework 4.0 or 4.5 m us ust be installed*2

Win Window dows s XP support support onl only y the the 32 bit typ type. e. For Windows 7, only Configurator Ver. 2.0 or newer can be used. For Windows 8, only Configurator Ver. 2.6 or newer can be used. For Windows 10, only Configurator Ver. 2.8 or newer can be used. Only supports Japanese, J apanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish or Chinese OS. If .NET Frame Framework work 4.0 is not installed installed on the computer, computer, .NET F Framework ramework 4.0 is installed automatically wh when en installi installing ng SZ Configurator. The following conditions must be met in order to install .NET Framework 4.0. • 1.2 GB or mor more e additional free space is available on the hard disk. • Windo Windows ws Installer Installer 3.0 or grea greater ter is insta installed lled.. • Interne Internett Explor Explorer er 5.01 or greater greater is installed. installed.

SZ Series configuration software "SZ Configurator"

S   w  e e  A  h e   i  n  B  : : R  U  n s e s t  r  u  c  P  C   N   /   t  t  i  n  t  i  o  - I  Ie    P  C   g   i  n m  s s  C   s c  a n  s e  o m  a r  r   u  a  t  t  i  n  m u  i  e d   l    g   n i  c   o u   a t  ti    o n nt    .

S   w  h e e  in s  e n s  t  ru  A : : R   A    e  r u c t   R  n  e  t  in  io    B  : : P   N   P  C  U    /  P  t  C    g  is n  a n  - Ie    c m  nu    Ie s  u a  s s  s C  o m    a r  r  i  e d  a l   e t  tt    in mm  m u   o u   o  n ic  u t  .  g  u n  ic a ti   o n  n  

SZ Series

USB cable (OP-86941)

SZ-M-NO6-E

6-2

 

6-1

Note

Before using SZ configuration

The specification of IP65 cannot be fulfilled without closing the setting-cover. You must close the setting-cover and tighten two screws on the cover with recommended torque before starting operation. (Recommended tightening torque: 0.3 N·m)

SZ-16D Settings When setting the settings of the SZ-16D, it is necessary to use the SZ Configurator Ver.2.0 or newer. Ensure you have the correct version of the SZ Configurator before setting the SZ-16D.

6 Installing the configuration software This section describes how to install the configuration software to a computer computer..

Before installation Check the following items before installing.  

Free space on hard disk 

The configuration software can only be installed on the hard disk. The hard disk where the software will be installed must have at least 300 MB free space (1.2 GB (2.1 GB in case of 64 bit type) additional free space on the computer where .NET Framework 4.0 is not installed). If there is insufficient free space, delete unnecessary items to free the space.  

Pre-installation Windows envir environment onment The configuration software is a Windows application ap plication and the software is installed in Windows. Check that Windows 10/8.1/8/7/XP is installed on the computer and is working properly.

 

USB (USB port) The USB port on the PC can be used to transfer setting data from the PC to the SZ Series or to use the monitoring function. For more information about the setting method, see the PC manual.

 

Manual file The manual file for this software was created in PDF file format. The viewing software Adobe Reader from Adobe Systems Incorporated must be installed onto your computer to use the help file. You can download the latest version for free from the Adobe Systems Incorporated web site: http://  www.adobe.com

Precautions for Windows XP  

User privileges When the configuration software is installed into the default folder (C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\Safety Device Configurator\), set the following access privileges.

• Users must be given rights for "Administrator" or greater in order to use the configuration software.

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

SZ-M-NO6-E

6-3

 

6-1

Before using SZ configuration

Precautions for Windows 7/8/8.1/10  

User privileges When the configuration software is installed into the default folder (C:\Program Files\Keyence\Safety Device Configurator\), set the following access privileges. • Users must be given rights for "Administrator" or greater in order to use the configuration software. If the "User Account Control" window appears during installation, click [Continue].

6

Downloading the configuration Software

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e

The configuration software can be downloaded from KEYENCE homepage. http://www.keyence.com If using in the environment where downloading software is not possible via the internet, contact your nearest KEYENCE office or o r distributor.

Installation Procedure Execute "setup.exe" stored in the downloaded file. After that, start installation according to the instruction of the installation program. When installation ends successfully, the following five software applications are installed. • Integr Integrated ated software software . Configurator>. • GL-R configu configuration ration software software . >. • SL-V configur configuration ation software software Configurator>.. • SZ-V configu configuration ration software software Configurator>.. • SZ configur configuration ation software software Configurator>..

 o  c n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Note

 

To install, log onto the PC as a user with Administrator privileges.

SZ Configurator installation folder When installing SZ Configurator with the default settings, the program is installed to the following folder: C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\SZ Configurator\

Uninstalling SZ Configurator SZ Configurator can be uninstalled by using [Add/Remove Programs] from the Windows Control Panel.

Note

To uninstall, log onto the PC as a user with Administrator privileges.

SZ-M-NO6-E

6-4

 

6-1

Before using SZ configuration

Starting and Exiting SZ Configurator This section describes starting star ting and exiting SZ Configurator.

Start-up SZ Configurator starts up with the following methods.

1

Click the Windows [Start] button and select [All Programs] - [KEYENCE Applications] - [Safety Device Configurator] or [SZ Configurator], or double-click the KEYENCE Safety Device Configurator icon on the desktop.

Double-clicking the shortcut icon will display the Configurator selection screen. Select [SZ Configurator]. If the powered-on SZ is connected via USB, this th is item is skipped. SZ Configurator starts up and the main screen and dialog box are displayed.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

2

Select the startup method and click the [OK] button.

Item

Setting Moni Monito tori ring ng

Read out the configuration data from SZ. Create Crea te a new configura configuration tion file Open Ope n a con config figura uration tion file Star Startt mo moni nito tori ring ng for for SZ

Description

Before start-up, reading the configuration data saved to the SZ Series itself. Creat Creates es a new configuration configuration file. Ope Opens ns a con configu figurat ration ion fil file e curre currentl ntlyy sa saved ved to the the per person sonal al c comp ompute uterr. Comm Commun unic icat ates es wi with th the the SZ Seri Series es an and d star starts ts up in the the moni monito tori ring ng mode mode..

You should click the [Cancel] button in order to exit SZ Configurator. Configurator.

6-5

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-1

Before using SZ configuration

 

When [Read out the configuration data from SZ.] is selected When SZ Configurator is started up with [Read out the configuration data from SZ.] selected, the configuration data is loaded from the connected SZ Series. Note

• Before selecting [R [Read ead out the conf configuration iguration data from S SZ.],you Z.],you should chec check k that the USB cable is properly connected between the personal computer and SZ Series. • You should che check ck that the pow power er is supplied to the SZ SZ.. • Other than for the SZ SZ-16D -16D,, you should check that the mode mode switch on the SZ Series is set to [A:R [A:RUN/PC UN/PC Communication]. If it is set to [B:Configuration on SZ], communication will not be performed.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e

 

When [Create a new configuration file.] is selected When [Create a new configuration file.] is selected, the [Model selection] dialog box appears. You can see the default configuration/value configuration/valu e on the SZ Configurator if you click the {OK} button after selecting the model of SZ series. “SZ-16D” will only appear in the Configurator Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0 or newer. newer.

 

When [Open a configuration file.] is selected When [Open a configuration file.] is selected, the [Open] dialog box appears. Select the appropriate SZ Configurator file (*.szd) and click the [Open] button to open the configuration file.

 c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-6

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-1

 

Before using SZ configuration

When [Start monitoring for SZ.] is selected When [Start monitoring for SZ.] is selected, the configuration data is read from the SZ Series and the screen for monitoring is appeared. Note

• Before selecting [S [Start tart monitoring for SZ.], y you ou should check that the USB cable cable is properly connected between the computer and SZ Series. • You should che check ck that the pow power er is supplied to the SZ SZ.. • Other than for the SZ-16D SZ-16D,, you should check that the mode switch for for the SZ Series is set to [A:RUN/PC [A:RUN/PC Communication]. If it is set to [B:Configuration], communication will not be performed.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Exiting When exiting SZ Configurator, select [Exit] from the [File] menu. Note

When changing the settings, the configuration file must be saved before exiting SZ Configurator. Configurator. If SZ Configurator is exited without saving, the changes are lost.

When changing the settings, the confirmation confir mation dialog box appears.

Note

Click the [No] button to exit without saving.

6-7

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-1

Before using SZ configuration

Connecting the SZ Series to the PC This section describes connecting method between the SZ Series and the personal computer with a USB cable.

Connecting

1

Open the setting-cover on the SZ Series.

Loosen the two screws on the setting-cover and open the cover. There is no screw on the setting-cover of the SZ-16D.

6

Setting-cover

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

S   w  e e  A  h e   i  n  B  : : R  U  n  s e s t  r  u  c  P  C  N   t  t  i   t  i  o  P   n  g   n  - I   I  e  /   s s C  C   i  s  c  m a   s e  o m  a r  n u   t  t  i  n  m u  r  i  e  a l    g   n i  c d   o  a t  i  u  t  . o n   

2

Setting-cover of the SZ-16D

Use the USB cable (OP-86941) to connect the SZ Series to the personal computer computer..

SZ Series configuration software "SZ Configurator"

S   w  e e  A  h e  i  n  B  : : R  U  n s e s t  r  u  c  P  C   N   /   t  t  i  n  t  i  o  - I  e  P  C   g  i  n m  s s  C   s c  a n  s e  o m  a r  r   u  a  t  t  i  n  m u  i  e d  l    g   n i  c  o u   a t  i   t  . o n 

S   e   i   e  w  h e e  s t  t  r   en    i  n s  A : : R   A  s e  c t  ti    o  R  U   et  t    i  iu  B  : : P      g  n  m  N   n  P  C    g   i  i  s  m a   /  P  C   a n  C  C   s c  - I  Ie  n  a  e s     s s  c a r   C  m m  a  s s  r  r  i  u d   m  a  s e  et   o  d   o l   u n e  t  ti    n  g m u  u  t  . i  ic    a  a t  t  i  o u t   n   n 

SZ Series

Note

Settiing cover

Attaching location

USB cable (OP-86941)

If the setting cover is open, the enclosure rating IP65 cannot be satisfied. Make sure that dust does not enter the inside. If it is possible that impurities such as dust may enter the inside of the sensor at the time of USB cable connection, attach a seal as depicted in in the diagram to models other than the SZ-16D. * With the supplied seal, the e enclosure nclosure rating IP65 cannot be sat satisfied. isfied. After setting and monitoring are complete, remove the seal and close the setting cover for use. (Recommended tightening torque: 0.3 N·m) There is no screw on the setting cover of the SZ-16D. After setting and monitoring are completed, make sure to close the cover until you hear the click.

6-8

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-2  Part names and functions This section describes names and functions of each part in the main window. Menu bar

Toolbar

6

Subpanel

Main panel

Status bar

 

 

Menu bar Displays the menus for each function. For more information about the menus, see

Configuration area

"6-5 Operation menu" (page 6-35) 6-35)..

Toolbar Display a row of buttons for frequently used functions. Icon

Function

 (New)

Creates a new configuration file.

 (Open)

Opens a saved configuration file (*.szd).

 (Save)

Saves the configuration file being edited over the old file.

 (Print)

Prints the information in the configuration file being edited. Enter a password to login to the SZ Series. Logs out. Transfers a configuration file to the SZ Series. Reads configuration data from the SZ Series. Seri es. Displays the PDF file of the SZ Series User's Manual.

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-9

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-2

Part names and functions

 

Configuration area The tabs can be used to switch between configuration and monitoring. Tab

Function

Sets each of the functions. "6-3 Configuration tab" (page 6-11) Yo You u can select the c configuration onfiguration item in the subpanel and set the item in the main panel. Configuration

6

Monitoring

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

 

Propert Property: y: You can can config configure ure the the inf informa ormatio tion n for the the con config figura uratio tion n file. file. Sa Safe fety ty 1: You can can c con onfi figu gure re OSSD OSSD1/ 1/2. 2. Saf Safety ety 2: You can config configure ure OSSD3/ OSSD3/4 4a and nd addi additio tional nal functi functions ons.. Non-safety: You can configure non-safety related functions, such as detection in warning zone or AUX. Zo Zone ne:: You ca can nc con onfifigu gure re the the zon zones es wher where e the the SZ Se Seri ries es perfo performs rms dete detect ctio ion. n. Tran ransfe sfer: r: You c can an tran transfe sferr a conf configu igurat ration ion file to the the S SZ Z Se Series ries.. Displays the screen for monitoring for the SZ Series. "6-4 Monitoring tab" (page 6-33)

Subpanel

You can select (click on) the configuration item in the subpanel. The background color of subpanel indicates the status of selection. Configuration should be done in order from the top to bottom. (Background color : blue) Item is under configuration on the main panel.

(Background color : gray) Item can be selected for configuration. Click here to change the configuration on the main panel.

(Background color : none) Unconfigured items that cannot be selected at this moment. These items can be selected once the upper items are configured. Once all of the configurations are completed, the [Transfer] [Transfer] button can be selected.

 

Status bar Displays the communication status and login information. Status

Description

SZ Configurator (computer) and the SZ Series are online (communicating). Logged in. The configuration can be changed. Logged out. Configuration cannot be changed.

6-10

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3  Configuration tab Property

6

Item

File name Title / Department Name of the person responsible Comments Information Date of configuration*3 Software version*3 Model Serial ial nu number on on S SZ Z *1 *2 *3

 

Description

This shows the name of the configuration file. "untitled.szd" is displayed as the name for new, unsaved files. You You can enter the title or department information. Up to 80 characters can be entered (two lines of 40 characters). You You can enter the name of the person in charge of configuration. Up to 40 characters can be entered. You can enter a comment. Up to 100*1 characters can be entered. This shows information about the configuration. This shows the date and time that the configuration was transferred from SZ Configurator to the SZ Series.*2 This shows the version information for the SZ Configurator software , which was used to create the configuration data transferred to the SZ Series. *2 This shows the model of the SZ Series. This ssh hows tth he se serial nu number of of tth he SZ SZ S Se erie ies. s.*2

Line b breaks reaks can be inserted inserted into comme comments, nts, bu butt each line break break co counts unts as as two c charac haracters. ters. Displa Displays ys this information information when when transferri transferring ng a config configuratio uration n file to the SZ Series Series or reading reading out a con configura figuration tion file from from the SZ Series. If any of the settings are changed, this information is no longer displayed. If the con configura figuration tion is chan changed ged on the SZ Ser Series ies afte afterr the configura configuration tion file is transfer transferred red with SZ Co Configur nfigurator ator,, [Manual configuration on SZ] is appeared.

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-11

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

Safety 1 Reference

Refer to the following section for detail information of each function. "2-3 Protection zone" (page 2-6) "2-6 Response time and scan cycle" (page 2-11) "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12) "2-8 External device monitoring function (EDM)" (page 2-16) "2-9 Reference points monitoring function" (page 2-17)

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Item

OSSD1/2(A)*1

Description

Configuration for the OSSD1/2 function. Setting for the minimum detectable object size.

Minimum detectable object size

Maximum protection distance

Selectable Selec table size : 30 mm (1.19 inc inch), h), 40 mm (1.58 in inch), ch), 50 mm (1.9 (1.97 7 inch), 70 mm (2.76 inch), 150 mm (5.91 inch) Default : 70 mm (2.76 inch) This shows the maximum protection distance. This cannot be set. The distance varies depending on the minimum detectable object size setting. Minimum detectable object size

Max distance

30 mm (1.19in.) 1.8 m (70.87in.)

40 mm (1.58 in.) 2.4 m (94.49in.)

50 mm (1.97 in.) 3.0 m (118.11in.)

70 mm 150 mm (2.76 in.) (5.91 in.) 4.2 m (165.35in.)

You can select the following time when using scan cycle A. The response time can be selected in 30 ms increments. Scan cycle A (General) Response time*2

Selectable time : 60 ms, 90 ms, 120 ms, 150 ms, 180 ms, 2 210 10 ms, 240 m ms, s, 270 ms, 300 ms, 330 ms, 360 ms, 390 ms, 420 ms, 450 ms, 480 ms Default : 12 1 20 m s You can select the following time when using scan cycle B. The scan cycle can be selected in 33 ms increments.

Scan cycle B

Selectable time : 66 ms, 99 ms, 132 ms, 165 ms, 198 ms, 2 231 31 ms, 264 m ms, s, 297 ms, 330 ms, 363 ms, 396 ms, 429 ms, 462 ms, 495 ms, 528 ms Default : 13 1 32 m s

6-12

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Item

Configuration tab

Description

Setting for start/restart mode (interlock). Start/Restart mode (Interlock)

Restart delay (ON-delay)

EDM (OSSD1/2) Enable

Reference points monitoring*3

Possible setting: Automatic/Automatic, Manual/Automatic, Manual/Manual*4 Default : Manual/Manual Setting for restart delay (ON-delay). This can be set when [Automatic/Automatic] or [Manual/Automatic] is selected for start/restart mode (interlock). Place a check mark in the [Enable] checkbox to set the delay time. Se Sett tting ing ra rang nge e : 2 to to 60 (U (Uni nit: t: sec secon onds ds)) Default :2 Setting for EDM function. Place a check mark in the checkbox to enable the EDM function. Default : (Checked) Setting for the reference points monitoring function. Place a check mark in the checkbox to enable the reference points monitoring function. Default

*1 *2 *3 *4

:

(Unchecked)

This item is displayed displayed as [OS [OSSD] SD] for "SZ"SZ-01S", 01S", "S "SZ-16V" Z-16V" a and nd "SZ-16D". "SZ-16D". The scan cycle cycle of OSSD3/4 OSSD3/4 is alwa always ys the same as as the one of OSS OSSD1/2 D1/2 for ""SZ-04M SZ-04M". ". The setting for the refere reference nce points m monitoring onitoring function is only displayed for "SZ-01S" or "SZ-04 "SZ-04M". M". When a check mark is placed in the [Enable] checkbox for "Restart delay (ON-delay)", "Manual/Manual" cannot be selected (grayed out). You have to re remove move the check mark from the [Enable] check bo boxx in order to change. change. Start/Restart mode to "Manual/Manual".

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-13

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

Safety 2 This is the configuration for OSSD3/4 and additional functions. Note

• This conf configura iguration tion cannot cannot be done when the model model is "SZ-01S "SZ-01S". ". ("Safety 2" is not displayed in the subpanel.) • The [Operation mode for OSSD3/4] OSSD3/4] item cannot be set (is not displa displayed) yed) when tthe he model is "SZ-16V" and "SZ-16D". • Only the bank function can be set ffor or the [Additional function] item when the mod model el is "SZ-16V" and "SZ-16D".

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Reference

Refer to the following section for detail information of each function. "2-10 Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18) "2-11 Bank switching function" (page 2-20) "2-12 Temporary Temporary suspension of safety function" (page 2-27)

Item

Operation mode for OSSD3/4

Description

Setting for the operation mode for OSSD3/4. A description of the operations for each mode appears in the box next to the selections. "Operation mode for OSSD3/4" (page 6-15) Possible setting: Not used, Mode A, Mode B, Mode C, Mode D Default : Not used Setting for the additional function. "Additional functions" (page 6-18)

Additional function

Possible Possib le setting: Not used, Ba Bank, nk, Muting, Muting, Suspension in teaching mode Default

: Not used

6-14

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

 

Configuration tab

Operation mode for OSSD3/4 Note

 

This can only be configured when the model is "SZ-04M".

When "Not used" is selected

OSSD3/4 is not used.(OSSD3/4 u sed.(OSSD3/4 is always turned OFF.) OFF.)  

When "Mode A" is selected

OSSD 3/4 performs completely the same operation for the detection as OSSD 1/2. In this mode, only the EDM function can be set for OSSD3/4.

Item

Description

Setting for the EDM function. Place a check mark in the checkbox to enable the EDM function for OSSD3/4.

OSSD3/4 (B)

Default

 

:

(Checked)

When "Mode B" is selected

OSSD3/4 performs the same operation for fo r the detection as OSSD1/2, but the following functions are not enabled. • IIn nterlock • Re Restart delay (ON-delay) • Muting • Suspension in teaching mode • Over Overri ride de In this mode, only the EDM function can be set for OSSD3/4.

Item

Description

Setting for the EDM function.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Place a check mark

OSSD3/4 (B)

Default

:

in the checkbox to enable the EDM function for OSSD3/4. (Checked)

6-15

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

 

When "Mode C" is selected

OSSD 3/4 performs the different operation for the detection form OSSD 1/2, especially the minimum detectable object size and response time, but protection zone is completely c ompletely the same as OSSD 1/2. In this mode, only the EDM function can be set for OSSD3/4.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

For more information about the details and default values for each item, refer to Item

OSSD3/4 (B) Minimum detectable object size Ma Maxi ximu mum m pro prote tect ctio ion n dis dista tanc nce e Sc Scan an cyc cycle le A (Ge (Gene nera ral) l) Response time Scan cycle B

EDM (OSSD3/4) Enable

"Safety 1" (page 6-12) 6-12)..

Description

Configuration for the OSSD3/4 function. Setting for the minimum detectable object size. You can set the minimum detectable object size different from OSSD 1/2. This This show showss tthe he ma maxim ximum um pr prot otec ectio tion n dis dista tanc nce. e. Th This is ca cann nnot ot be set. set. Se Sett tting ing for for th the e resp respon onse se tim time. e. The scan cycle for OSSD3/4 is consequently the same as the cycle for OSSD 1/2, so it cannot be set here. Setting for the EDM function for OSSD3/4 Place a check mark in the checkbox to enable the EDM function. Default

:

(Checked)

6-16

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

 

Configuration tab

When "Mode D" is selected

OSSD 3/4 performs the non-related no n-related (independent) operation from OSSD 1/2. Therefore, all of parameters related to OSSDs, including the protection zone, can be different from OSSD 1/2. In this mode, only the EDM function can be set for OSSD3/4. Note

"Mode D" cannot be selected if "Muting" or "Suspension in teaching mode" are selected as additional functions. "Additional functions" (page 6-18)

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

For more information about the details and default values for each item, refer to Item

OSSD3/4 (B) Minimum detectable object size Ma Maxi ximu mum m pro prote tect ctio ion n dis dista tanc nce e Sc Scan an cyc cycle le A (Ge (Gene nera ral) l) Response time Scan cycle B Star Start/ t/Re Rest star artt mod mode e (I (Int nter erlo lock ck)) Restart delay (ON-delay)

EDM (OSSD3/4) Enable

"Safety 1" (page 6-12) 6-12)..

Description

Configuration for the OSSD 3/4 function. Setting for the minimum detectable object size. You You can set the minimum detectable object size different from OSSD 1/2. This This show showss tthe he ma maxim ximum um pr prot otec ectio tion n dis dista tanc nce. e. Th This is ca cann nnot ot be set. set. Se Sett tting ing for for th the e resp respon onse se tim time. e. The scan cycle for OSSD3/4 is consequently the same as the cycle for OSSD 1/2, so it cannot be set here. Se Sett ttin ing g ffor or st star art/ t/re rest star artt mod mode e ((in inte terl rloc ock) k).. Setting for restart delay (ON-delay). This can be set when [Automatic/Automatic] or [Manual/Automatic] is selected for start/restart mode (interlock). Place a check mark in the [Enable] box to set the delay time. Setting for the EDM function for OSSD 3/4. Place a check mark in the [Enable] box to enable the EDM function. Default

:

(Checked)

6-17

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

 

Additional functions Note

 

• This can only be configured when the mod model el is "SZ-04M", "SZ-16V" and "S "SZ-16D". Z-16D". • Only the bank fu function nction ca can n be set when the model is "SZ"SZ-16V" 16V" and "SZ-16D" "SZ-16D"..

When "Not used" is selected

Additional function is not used.

When the bank function is selected − in case of "SZ-04M" − 

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e Item

Description

Setting for the number of banks for use. Bank

Se Sett ttin ing g ran range ge : 2 to 4 *1 Default : 2 If bank switching is not completed within the specified transition time, "Error10 Bank Error" will be generated. 2

Bank transition time *

Bank sequence monitoring

Selectable time : 0.02 seconds, 0.05 seconds, 0.10 seconds, 0.25 seconds, 1 1.00 .00 seconds, 2.50 seconds, 5.00 seconds Default : 0.10 seconds This can be set when 3 or more banks are set for "Bank". Place a check mark in the [Enable] box to monitor the bank switching sequence. The bank sequence is set by the presence of a check in the checkboxes. Checked : This permits bank switching in the specified sequence. Unchecked : Bank switching in the specified sequence will generate "Error10 Bank Error".

*1 The setting range varies depending on the sett setting ing for [Operation mode for OSSD3/4]. Operation m mo ode

Setting ra range

Not use Mode A

2 to 4 2 to 3

M Mo od de eB C

2 2 tto o3 3

Mode D

2

*2 0.02 seconds and 0.05 seconds can o only nly be chosen with a SZ Configurator V Ver er.2.0 .2.0 or newer. newer.

6-18

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

 

Configuration tab

When the bank function is selected − in case of "SZ-16V" and "SZ-16D" − 

6

Item

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Description

If the "Valid" check box is c checked, hecked, the warning area can be changed by the RS-422A communication function. However, the number of protection area banks has a Warning bank switching via communication *1

maximum of 2. The number of alarm area banks has a maximum of 16.

Concerning the RS-422A communication function, refer to communication manual".

"SZ-16D

Default : (Unchecked) Setting for the number of banks for use. Number of banks

Bank transition time *2

Bank sequence monitoring *3

[Not specified] radio button

Sett Settin ing g ra ran nge : 1 to 16 Default:1 If bank switching is not completed within the specified transition time, "Error10 Bank Error" will be generated. Selectable Select able time : 0.20 second seconds, s, 0.05 seconds, 0.10 seco seconds, nds, 0.25 seconds, seconds, 1.00 seconds, 2.50 seconds, 5.00 seconds Default : 0.10 seconds You You can place a check mark in the [Enable] box to monitor the bank switching sequence. The bank sequence is set separately for each bank. Default : (Unchecked) ON : This This pe permi rmits ts swit switch chin ing g to a any ny b ban ank. k. ON

[Specified] radio button

: This This perm permits its sw switchin itching g to any of th the e banks banks spe specified cified (maximum (maximum 3 3). ).

Checking this box

allows the available ban banks ks to to be specified. Switching to the bank

[Specified] radio button

unspecified will generate "Error10 Bank Error". Se Sett ttin ing gR Ran ange ge : 0 tto o1 15 5 *4 *5 Default : 0 (or "1" if "From Bank 0" is set)

6-19

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

Item

Laser shutdown function*6

Description

Checking [Enable] causes the laser to be shut down when the bank specified in "Bank No. for laser shutdown" is activated. The laser shutdown function stops the laser radiation and the OSSD forcibly goes to the OFF-state. Default : (Unchecked) Switching to the specified bank will cause the laser to be shut down.

Bank No. for laser shutdown

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Sett Settin ing g rra ang nge e : 0 to 15 *4 *5 Default : 0

*1 This can only be set when the model is "SZ-16D". If this function is enabled, the bank sequence sequence monitor cannot cannot be used. *2 This cannot be set when "Number of Banks" is set to ""1". 1". (The option will be grayed out.) 0.02 seconds seconds and 0.05 seconds seconds can only be chosen with a SZ Configurator Ver.2.0 or newer newer.. *3 This is not not display displayed ed when "Numbe "Numberr of Ban Banks" ks" is set to "1" or "2 "2". ". Additionally, the bank information for setting, which is higher than the setting value in "Number of banks", is not displayed. *4 You cannot specify the same Bank number to the bank to be switched in the n next ext place. Example: "3" cannot be set when you specify the "To bank" for "From bank3". *5 Values Values beyon beyond d this range (i.e., (i.e., 16 throu through gh 99) can be enter entered, ed, but this will result in an error when moving to another item. This error will also be displayed if the setting is higher than the setting for "Number of banks." *6 This will not not be disp displayed layed when when "Number "Number of Banks" Banks" is set set to "1".

[Input error dialog box]

Note

You must configure the protection zones for all banks when the bank is set. If there are banks without a protection zone configured, configuration data cannot be transferred to the SZ Series. "Zone" (page 6-25)

6-20

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

 

Configuration tab

When "Muting" is selected

Note

"Muting" and "Suspension in teaching mode" cannot be selected when the "Operation mode for OSSD3/  4" is set to "Mode D". "Operation mode for OSSD3/4" (page 6-15)

6

Item

Cond Conditi ition on ffor or ini initia tiatition on o off mutin muting g

Sequence of muting inputs

Time period between muting inputs

Conditi Con dition on fo forr term termina inatio tion n of mu mutin ting g Maximum muting period of time Condition Condit ion ffor or te terminati rmination on of override override Maximum override period of time *1

Description

Conf Config igur urat ation ion ffor or the the c con ondi ditition on ffor or iini nititiat atio ion n of mut mutin ing. g. Setting for the sequence of muting input. Possible setting: Muting input 1 1:: First / Muting input 2: Second : Mutin Muting g input 2: First / Muting Muting input 1: Secon Second d : Not spe specif cified ied Default : Muting ing in inpu putt 1: 1: Fi First rst / Mutin ing g iin nput 2 2:: S Se econd Setting for the time period between muting inputs Muting is initiated if the SZ Series detects the muting inputs (muting input 1 and 2) within the specified time period according to the "Sequence of muting inputs" above. Selectable time : 3 seconds Selectable seconds,, 5 seconds, 10 sec seconds, onds, not spe specified cified *1 Default : 3 seconds Config Configura uratio tion n for th the e con condit dition ion for for termina terminatio tion n of mutin muting. g. This specifies how long the muting will continue. Selectable time : 1 minute, 5 minu Selectable minutes, tes, 10 minu minutes, tes, not spec specified ified *1 Default : 5 minutes Confi Configurat guration ion for for the condition condition for for te terminat rmination ion of of ove override. rride. This specifies how long the override will continue. Selectable Select able tim time e : 1 minute minute,, 5 minute minutes, s, 10 minu minutes tes Default : 1 minute

Muted c conditi ondition on will be terminated terminated a approx. pprox. 5 minute minutess later when th the e time betw between een mut muting ing input inputss exceeds exceeds 3 second seconds, s, even if "Not specified" is selected for maximum muting period and time between muting inputs.

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-21

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

 

When "Suspension in teaching mode" is selected

Note

"Muting" and "Suspension in teaching mode" cannot be selected when the "Operation mode for OSSD3/  4" is set to "Mode D". "Operation mode for OSSD3/4" (page 6-15)

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Item

Description

Condition for initiation of suspension in Configuration for the condition for initiation of suspension in teaching mode. teaching mode Setting for the time between teach mode input and teach ready input, which are external inputs to be used for initiation of this suspension. Time between teach mode input and teach ready input Selectable Select able time : 3 secon seconds, ds, 5 second seconds, s, 10 seco seconds nds Default : 3 seconds Condition Condit ion ffor or te terminati rmination on of override override Confi Configurat guration ion for for the condition condition for for te terminat rmination ion of of ove override. rride. This specifies how long the override will continue. Maximum override period of time Selectable Select able tim time e : 1 minute minute,, 5 minute minutes, s, 10 minu minutes tes Default : 1 minute

6-22

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

Non Safety-related Functions This section describes how to configure non safety-related functions, such as warning zone and AUX. Reference

Refer to the following section for detail information of each function. "2-4 Warning zone" (page 2-8) "2-13 AUX (auxiliary) output" (page 2-35) "2-14 Check input function" (page 2-43)

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Item

Description

Detection Detec tion in warning warning zone (A (A)/(B) )/(B) Configuratio Configuration n for the detection detection in th the e warning zone zone (A)/( (A)/(B) B)*. Setting for the minimum detectable object size. Minimum detectable object size

Maximum warning distance

Selectable Selec table size : 30 mm (1.1 (1.19 9 in.), 40 mm (1.58 (1.58 in. in.), ), 50 mm (1.9 (1.97 7 in.), 70 mm (2.76 in.), 150 mm (5.91 in.) Default : 70 mm (2.76 in.) This shows the maximum warning distance. This cannot be set. The distance varies depending on the minimum detectable object size setting. Minimum detectable object size

Max distance

Response time

Scan cycle A (General) Scan cycle B

30 mm 40 mm 50 mm (1.19 in.) (1.58 in.) (1.97 in.) 4.5 m 6.0 m 7.5 m (177.17 in.) (236.22 in.) (295.28 in.)

70 mm 150 mm (2.76 in.) (5.91 in.) 10.0 m (393.70 in.)

Setting for the response time. The scan cycle is consequently the same as the scan cycle for OSSD1/2, so it cannot be set here. Refer to "Safety 1" (page 6-12) 6-12) for  for the selectable time and default related to response time.

* Warn Warning ing zone (A) (A) :W :Warning arning zo zone ne for OS OSSD1/2 SD1/2

Warning zone (B) :Warning zone for OSSD3/4 Warning zone (B) is displayed only when the model is "SZ-04M" and "Mode D" is selected for [Operation mode for OSSD3/4] .

6-23

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

Item

AUX State information output *1

Description

Configuration for auxiliary (AUX) output. Place a check mark in the [Enable] box to output state information. Default : (Unchecked) Setting for the pulse width for state information. This can only be set when the [Enable] box is checked

.

Pulse width Selectable width:20 ms, 40 ms, 80, ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 300 ms Default :2 20 0 ms In case of muting lamp Setting for how the OSSDs perform in case of muting lamp failure. failure*2 Error (OSSDs go Muting lamp failure generates an error and turns OSSD1/2/3/4 to the OFF-state. to the OFF state) Alert (OSSDs are still in the ON Muting lamp failure generates an alert, but does not turn OSSD1/2/3/4 to the OFF-state. state) Assignment of a function to the AUX output. • The numb number er of AUX outpu outputs ts varies depe depending nding on the mo model. del. • The assign assigned ed output function function varies depe depending nding on the model model.. (AUX output setting display) • Items ma marked rked with ""-"" canno cannott be assigne assigned. d. • Items with grayed out radio bu buttons ttons can be become come available depen depending ding on the combination of settings. Place a check mark in the [Enable] box to configure check input.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Check input *3 OSSD OFF with laser shutdown OSSD OFF with check points monitoring*4 Information display*5 [Wire color and assigned function] button Communication settings*6 Measured value stabilization filter*6 Communication monitoring*6 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6

Default

:

(Unchecked)

Check input turns OSSD1/2/3/4 to the OFF-state. The SZ Series stop the laser radiation. Check input turns OSSD1/2/3/4 to the OFF-state. Check point monitoring operates at the same time. You can check the "T "Turn urn of offf ba backlight" cklight" check check box to turn off the ba backlight cklight on the information display on SZ series. Default : (Unchecked) You can click the [Wire color and assigned function] button to show the [Wire [Wi re color and assigned function] dialog. When using the RS-422A communication function via the SZ-16D, these settings are necessary. For details, refer to “SZ-16D Communication manual”.

This c can an only only be set when when the theX6 mo model del is "SZ-04M", "SZ-04 SZ-16V" " and "SZ-16D". Thi Thiss can oonly nly be sset et wh when en AU AUX6 is as assign signed ed toM", "Muti "M""SZ-16V uting ng lam lamp p output out"SZ-1 put". ".6D". This can on only ly be set when th the e model is "SZ "SZ-01S" -01S" or "S "SZ-04M Z-04M". ". Addit Additionally ionally,, this can only only be set when [A [Automa utomatic/A tic/Autom utomatic] atic] is selected for "Start/restart mode (interlock)" under [Safety functions 1] and [Safety functions 2]. This can cannot not be set when when the [Enable] [Enable] check check box for "Re "Refere ference nce point monito monitor" r" under [S [Safety afety feature featuress 1] is checked. checked. Backl Backlight ight for LCD turns turns on at the st start-up art-up and th the e occurr occurrence ence of error/ error/alert alert regardle regardless ss of this setting. setting. It also tu turns rns on for 30 seconds while the key on SZ is operated. Thi Thiss can can only only be set whe when n th the e mo model del is "SZ-1 "SZ-16D" 6D"..

6-24

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

Zone Reference

Refer to the following section for detail information of each function. "2-3 Protection zone" (page 2-6) "2-4 Warning zone" (page 2-8) "2-9 Reference points monitoring function" (page 2-17) "2-10 Multi-OSSD function" (page 2-18) "2-11 Bank switching function" (page 2-20) "2-12 Temporary Temporary suspension of safety function" (page 2-27) Zone display panel

6

Switching button for zone display panel

Canvas Drawing toolbar

Drawing properties

Item

Canvas

Zone display panel

Switching button for zone display panel Drawing toolbar Drawing properties

Description

You You can draw the zone (protection zone, warning zone) on this canvas. You You can use the "Drawing Tool bar" for zone configuration. "Canvas" (page 6-26) You can select the zone to be configured with this panel and can also switch s witch whether the zone in question is displayed or not. "Zone display panel" (page 6-27) For switching whether the "Zone display panel" is display or not.  Click this to hide the "Zone display panel". Click this to display the "Zone display panel". You can draw the zzone one (protection zone, warning zone) on this canvas with this drawing tools. "Drawing toolbar" (page 6-28) This shows information related to the drawing.

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

[Mouse position ion] [F [Fig igur ure e iinf nfor orma mati tion on]]

This sho shows the current coordin dinates for the mouse po poin intter. Th This is show showss inf infor orma mati tion on su such ch as the the siz size ea and nd an angl gles es of fi figu gure ress on on tthe he canv canvas as..

6-25

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

 

Canvas The SZ Series is represented in the center of the canvas. The grid is also shown on canvas.

Unconfigurable Unconfigurab le area 1

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Zone with the limited detection capability

Configurable Configurab le area

Unconfigurable Unconfigurab le area 2

Item

Description

The color of image on canvas is white for the configurable area. The configurable area varies depending on the configuration for safety functions. Unco Unconf nfig igur urab able le area area 1 Th The ec col olor or of imag image e on on can canva vass is is ligh lightt-Gr Gray ay for for unc uncon onfifigu gura rabl ble e are area. a. The color of image on canvas is dark-Gray for unconfigurable area with no laser radiation from Unconfigurable area 2 SZ. (Blind area) The zone within the circle with the radius of 85 mm from the center of the SZ (protection zone Zone with the limited detection origin) is the zone with the limited detection capability. capability "Zone with limited detection capability" (page 3-6)

Configurable area

6-26

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

 

Configuration tab

Zone display panel The contents of the zone zo ne display panel vary depending on the model and the configuration.

6

Item

(Zone n na ame) Bank 1 to View

Display all/Hide all*1

Edit

Description

TThis he zisonshown e showifnbanks va varieshave de depebeen ndingset. o on n the mo model a an nd the co configuration. This is not shown when the model is "SZ-01S". • You can check this box to show the drawn protection zone. • You can uncheck this box to hide the drawn protection zone. • You can click [View] to change all o off the checkboxes at once. If clicked while the [Display all] is displayed, all of the areas of all of the banks will be displayed. If clicked when the [Hide all] is displayed, all of the areas of all of the banks will be hidden (mask). The surrounding of the button turns to "green" in order to show that the zone is currently under edit, if you click the button in "Edit ". You can change the type of zone through the button in "Edit". • The color of th the e button corresponds to the color of the zone on the canvas. • Multiple buttons in "Edit" cannot be selected at the same time.

*1 This item will only be displayed for the SZ Configurator Ve Ver.2 r.2.0 .0 or newer. newer.

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-27

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-3

Configuration tab

 

Drawing toolbar The following tools can be used when drawing on the canvas. (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) (9)

(8) (10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(20)

(21)

(22)

(23)

(24)

(25)

(26)

(27) (28)

Function

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Zoom in in*1 Zoom ou out*1 Full display [Ruler] tool

(5 (5)) [S [Spe peci cify fy the the p poi oint nt**2] tool (6) (6) [S [Set et tthe he p poi oint nt**2] tool (7) [Set [Set the the lin line e se segme gment] nt] too tooll (8) [Delete [Delete the line line ssegm egment ent]] tool tool (9) [Set [Set the the rectan rectangle gle]] tool tool (10) [Dele [Delete te th the e rectang rectangle] le] to tool ol (11) (11) [Ad [Add d pol polygo ygon] n] to tool ol (12) (12) [delet [delete e polyg polygon] on] to tool ol (13) (13) [Set [Set the ci circl rcle] e] too tooll (14) [Dele [Delete te the the c circle] ircle] tool (15) (15) [Set [Set the se secto ctor] r] too tooll (16) [Delet [Delete e the the secto sector] r] ttool ool (1 (17) 7) [F [Fre reeh ehan and d*3 dr draw awin ing] g] too tooll

Description

Zooms in the canvas. Zooms out the canvas. Adjusts the screen scale in order to show the zone that is drawn on the canvas. This shows the distance between the specified two points. Selects the user point, reference point or check point for the zone currently being edited. Drag to select multiple points. Adds user point, reference point or check point to the border of the zone currently being edited. Adds a line connecting two points, as well as the triangular area defined by the points on that line and the origin. Deletes from the area currently being edited an area defined by the two points on the selected line and the origin. Adds a rectangle with the two specified points at opposite vertices, as well as the area defined by these points and the origin. Deletes from the area currently being edited a rectangle with the two selected points on opposing vertices and the area created by these points and the origin. Adds a polygon defined by multiple user points, as well as the area defined by these points and the origin. Deletes from the area currently being edited a polygon defined by multiple user points and the area created by these points and the origin. Adds a circle with a radius defined by specified points, as well as the area defined by these points and the origin. Deletes from the area currently being edited a circle with a radius defined by specified points and the area created by these points and the origin. Adds a sector with an edge defined by two specified points and an internal angle specified by a third, as well as the area defined by these points and the origin. Deletes a sector with an edge defined by two specified points and an internal angle specified by a third, as well as the area defined by these points and the origin. Adds Adds a fr free eeha hand nd ssha hape pe,, as as we wellll a ass the the ar area ea defi define ned d by this this sha shape pe a and nd the the o ori rigi gin. n.

(1 (18) 8) [F [Fre reeh ehan and d*3 dele deletition on]] too tooll (19) (19) Automa Automatic tic drawi drawing ng (20) [Delete all] tool

Dele Delete tess a fr free eeha hand nd sh shap ape, e, as well well as the the a are rea a def define ined db byy this this shap shape ea and nd the the o orig rigin in.. Automatically draws a zone based on the detection state of the SZ Series. "Automatic drawing" (page 6-39) Clears everything in the zone.

6-28

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Icon name

(21) (22) (23) (24) (24) (25) (25)

Undo Redo Start real-tim -time e rra anging Pau Pause realeal-ti tim me ran ranging ging Finis inish h re real al-t -tim ime e rran angi ging ng

(26) Bott Bottom-ho om-hold ld real-tim real-time e ran ranging ging

Configuration tab

Function

Undoes the previous operation. Redoes the last operation that was undone. Displ splays th the rra anging ssttate o off th the S SZ ZS Se erie iess in in rre eal ttiime. Tempo empora rari rily ly sto stops th the e real eal time time ra ran ngi ging ng di disp spla layy. Cl Clea earr th the rre eal tim time ran rangi ging ng di disp spla layy in in tthe he dr draw awin ing gp pan anel el.. Holds real time ranging display at bottom. • The bott bottom om hold is up updated dated by the g green reen line line in real time. time. • This is only availa available ble when "Rea "Reall time ranging dis display play -Start-" -Start-" is ON.

Displays or hides the comments on the zone under the drawing panel (above the (27) (27) Com Commen ments ts on the the zon zone e drawing properties). A memo of up to 100 characters can be recorded. (28) Clear ba background ho hold Clear th the ba background ho hold da data. *1 Move th the e mouse c cursor ursor over over the d drawing rawing panel an and d move m mouse ouse wh wheel eel for forward ward to to zoom in o orr backw backward ard to zoom zoom out out.. *2 Poi Points nts a are re th the e "n" tthat hat appe appear ar at ea each ch corne cornerr of the shap shape e drawn. drawn. *3 Free Freehand hand sha shapes pes follow the the movem movement ent of the m mouse ouse fr from om the start start of the leftleft-draggi dragging ng of the mouse mouse to the en end d of it. Reference

• Drag the mouse w wheel heel to change the display position position of the XY orientation. The mous mouse e icon become while dragging. • When using the line, polygon, sector (main line) and ruler tools, holding the Shift key will restrict the lines drawn to horizontal and vertical. • By clicking the line, square, polygon, sector, sector, or ruler tool while pressing and holding the Alt key, key, the intersections the grids in tools the drawing area are selected. • When setting of a zone us using ing (7) through throug h (18), right-click the mouse mouse on the drawing panel and select "Numeric entry", and you can set a zone by entering coordinates.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-29

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

 

Transfer Once configuration is completed, the configuration data can be transferred to the SZ Series. Before transferring the configuration data ,you should make sure that the computer (SZ Configurator) and the SZ Series are properly connected with a USB cable.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Procedure for transfer This section explains the procedure for transferring the configuration data to the SZ Series.

1

Click the [Transfer] button on the sub-panel.

The [Transfer] button cannot be clicked if configuration is not completed.

2

Click [OK] in the transfer settings dialog box.

3

If you are not logged into the SZ Series, the [Log-in] dialog box will appear. Enter your passw password ord to log in. Reference

Note

The default password is "1111". Change the default password. "Password change" (page 6-56)  6-56) 

The configuration for safety-related functions and the others cannot be performed without the password

(ex. when you forget a password). Y You ou must strictly keep the password. "When you forget the password" (page 6-57)

6-30

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

Configuration tab

The configuration data will be transferred after a successful login.

Note

Do not disconnect the USB cable while transferring the configuration data.

After the configuration data is transferred, tr ansferred, configuration data is read out from the SZ Series.

Note

4

Do not disconnect the USB cable while transferring the configuration data.

Click [OK] in the confirmation dialog to show the [Confirmation] dialog for the configuration data. Confirm the configuration and then click [Accept] if you find nothing different from your intention.

If the [Accept] button is grayed out and cannot be clicked, use the scroll bar to display all of the settings. Note

Clicking the [Not accept] button will cancel the transfer. If this happens, all configuration data on the SZ Series will be erased.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-31

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-3

5

Configuration tab

The [Confirmation] dialog for configured zone appears. Confirm the zone and then click [Accept] if you find nothing different from your intention.

If mode D or a bank is configured, co nfigured, the [Next] button will appear next to the zone name and the [Accept] button will be grayed out. The [Accept] button will become available once all the zones have been confirmed. confir med.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Note

6

Clicking the [Not accept] button will cancel the transfer. If this happens, all configuration configuration data on the SZ Series will be erased.

The confirmation dialog box appears. Click either the [Start monitoring] button or the [Back to configuration] button.

The confirmation dialog box appears when the configuration co nfiguration data have been transferred, and the SZ will begin operating in accordance with the new configuration.

6-32

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-4  Monitoring tab Select the Monitoring tab to monitor the detection state of the SZ Series in real time. t ime. Note

• Before selecting tthe he Monitoring tab, make sure that the personal computer (SZ Configur Configurator) ator) and the SZ Series are properly connected with a USB cable. • Monitoring cannot be possible if the the conf configuration iguration data on the S SZ Z Configurator is different from the configuration data on the SZ series. serie s. Read the the configuration data from the SZ Series or transfer the the configuration data from the SZ Configurator.

Monitoring panel

Display for SZ operation

6

Toolbar

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Background hold tool bar

OSSD display

Warning zone 1

Protection zone

Warning zone 2*

Ranging information

* Warning range 2 can be set only when the SZ Series model is "SZ-16V" and "SZ-16D". Item

Displayy for Displa for SZ operat operation ion Monit onito oring ring panel anel Toolbar OSSD display Protection ion zone Warni arning ng zone 1/2 1/2 Rang Rangin ing g info inform rmat atio ion n

Description

Thi Thiss sshow howss the the opera operatin ting g state state of the the SZ. SZ. Th This is sho how ws th the e ra rang ngin ing g in info form rmat atio ion n of th the e SZ in rea eall ti tim me. Zooms in and out on the Monitoring panel, and measures distance. "Drawing toolbar" (page 6-28) This shows the state of OSSD. The protection zone set in the SZ Configurator is shown. Th This is is sho how wn iiff a war arni ning ng zon one e 1/2 1/2 set in th the e SZ SZ Con Confi fig gur urat ator or.. This This show showss tthe he ran rangi ging ng re resu sultlt o off tthe he SZ SZ Ser Serie iess iin n rrea eall titime me (B (Blu lue e liline ne). ).

6-33

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-4

Monitoring tab

 

Background Hold This function can only be used for the SZ Configurator Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0 or newer. This function is primarily for use with AGV’s and can be monitored through the SZ Configurator. The minimum measured distance distance value is continuously updated and held for each individual individual bank. By using this function, the minimum distance between the AGV and objects within its travel path can be verified in order to determine whether the programmed zone interferences with these objects. Because the AGV surroundings change throughout its path, this function will assist in zone setting. The minimum measured distance (background) is displayed on the monitoring panel and the canvas.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Note

• When using the communication bank change function, the background hold function can cannot not be used from the protection bank. Concerning the changing of the communication, refer to “SZ-16D communication manual”

 

Background Backgro und hold tool bar (1) (2)

Icon name

(1)

Start background hold/  Stop background hold

(2) (2) Clea Clearr ba back ckgr grou ound nd ho hold ld  

Function

If the icon is clicked, the minimum distance detected by the SZ will wi ll be displayed on the gray line. With this gray line as a border, the hold will be displayed with the far distance side as light purple, and the close distance side as white. If changing the bank, the hold display will be reset, and the shortest distance hold will display. Each hold display screen can be stored in each bank. If the icon is clicked once again, the hold display dis play will no longer be renewed. The held area will be displayed as is. Rese Resett the the ho hold ld disp displa layy cond condit itio ions ns.. Th The e ar area ea se sett as pu purp rple le wi willll re retu turn rn to wh whit ite. e.

Delay the start of the background hold function/ restart will be stopped automatically. From the menu select [Monitor tool(M)] then [background [ background hold timer(S)]. The [Monitor start timer] dialogue box will appear and the start time and hold time can be set. Name

Start up delay time

Function

When the Background hold start icon is clicked, and the setting time is passed the hold display starts. By delaying delayi ng the start, the background hold function can be started after leaving the protection and warning areas of the SZ. Se Sett ttin ing g rang range e : 0 tto o 59 mi minu nute tess a and nd 59 59 sec secon onds ds Initial value :0 After starting the background hold, and when the setting time has passed, the hold display will automatically display and stop.

Hold time Se Sett ttin ing g rang range e Initial value

: 0 tto o 59 mi minu nute tess a and nd 59 59 sec secon onds ds :0

6-34

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5  Operation menu File(F) This section explains how to save the setting file used by the SZ Configurator to the computer and load it from the computer.

New You can select [New(N)] under the [File(F)] menu. The [Model selection] dialog appears. You can select the model of the SZ Series. “SZ-16D” will only appear in the Configurator Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0 or newer. newer. Shortcut Key:

 

Open You can select [Open(O)] under the [File(F)] menu. The [Open] dialog appears. You can select an SZ configuration file (*.szd). Shortcut Key:

 

Ctrl + N

Ctrl + O

Close This closes the configuration file currently c urrently being edited. If editing a configuration file, a save confirmation dialog appears. Note Closing the configuration file will not automatically log you out if you are logged in. Y You ou must log out separately.

Save You can select [Save(S)] under the [File(F)] menu. This saved the configuration file currently being edited. Shortcut Key: Reference

Ctrl + S

If this is the first time for this configuration to be saved, the [Save as...] dialog will appear.

Save as...

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

You can select [Save as(A)] under the [File(F)] menu. The [Save As] dialog appears. You can select a name for the file and then save the file.

6-35

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

 

Change model You can select [Change model(M)] under the [File(F)] menu. The [Model selection] dialog appears. You can change the model from SZ-01S to SZ-04M, or from SZ-04M to SZ-01S. You can change the model from SZ-16V to SZ-16D or from SZ-16D to SZ-16V. SZ-16V.

 

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Print You can select [Print(P)] under the [File(F)] menu. The [Print] dialog appears so as to pefrom the setting on print condltion. If you click [Print] button, you can get the printed document including the following information. • File File Name Name • Information on "Property",such as Title/Department,Name of the person responsible and comment. • Information on "Configuration", such as Date of configuration, software version, Model Model and serial number. • Config Configuration uration parameters parameters Shortcut Key:

 

Ctrl + P

Recent files This shows the five files most recently opened in the SZ Configurator. Exit You can select [Exit(X)] under the [File(F)] menu. This exits the SZ Configurator. Configurator. If currently editing a file, a save confirmation dialog appears.

6-36

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

Edit(E) This shows a menu for zone configuration. Note

The [Edit(E)] menu is only available when the [Configuration] sub panel of the [Zone] tab is selected.

Undo This undoes the previous operation. Shortcut Key:

 

Redo You can redo the last operation that was undone. Shortcut Key:

 

Ctrl + C

Paste zone You can select [Paste zone(P)] under u nder the [Edit(E)] menu. This pastes a zone copied with [Copy zone] to the selected location. Shortcut Key:

 

Ctrl + Y

Copy zone You can select [Copy zone(C)] under the [Edit(E)] menu. This copies the zone currently being edited to the clipboard. Shortcut Key:

 

Ctrl + Z

Ctrl + V

Paste zone in reverse You can select [Paste zone in reverse(Y)] under the [Edit(E)] menu. This pastes a zone copied with [Copy zone] zone ] to the selected location. The pasted zone is reversed. This menu is displayed only on the SZ Configurator Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0 or newer. newer.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-37

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

 

Scaling zone You can select [Scaling zone(S)] under the t he [Edit(S)] menu. The [Scaling zone] dialog appears.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Item

Scaling ratio

(Slide bar) [Preview] button [Ex [Execut ecute] e] butto utton n [Can [Cance cel] l] butt button on

Description

You can change the scale of the current zone by specifying a percentage. You should click the up and down buttons in the input box to change the scaling ratio of the zone. If the scaling ratio is entered manually, manually, click the [Preview] button to confirm the change of the zone scale. Se Sett tting ing Rang Range e : 0 to 200 200 (%) (%) Default : 10 100 You can change the scaling ratio via the slide bar. bar. The size of the zone under editing is changed corresponding to the movement of side bar. You can input the scaling ratio directly into the input box. Draws the zone according to the specified scaling ratio. You ca can n ref efle lect ct th the e sspe peci ciffie ied d sca caliling ng ra rati tio o tto o tthe he zon one e ssiz ize. e. Th This is ca canc ncel elss tthe he ch chan ange ge in sca calilin ng ra rati tio o and and ret etur urn ns tto o tthe he previo ious us siz ize. e.

Bank copy Select [Edit(E)] then [Bank copy(B)] from the menu. The [Bank copy] dialogue box will display. Then by specifying the copy origin bank and the copy destination bank, except for the reference points and the th e muting zone, all of the zones zo nes set to the bank can be copied. This menu is displayed only on the SZ Configurator Ver2.0 or newer.

6-38

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

 

Operation menu

Automatic drawing The purpose of the automatic drawing function is to just draw the zo zone ne automatically based on the surrounding situation of the SZ, such as a protective guarding.

Example of the drawing for the protection zone with the automatic drawing function If there is nothing beyond the maximum distance, the maximum protection or warning distance is drawn.

Protection zone or warning zone

Even if there is something beyond the maximum distance, the maximum protection or warning distance is drawn. Protective guarding

Danger

The zone drawn with the automatic drawing function is just an informative zone, which is automatically drawn by the SZ Configurator based on the surrounding situation of the SZ, such as a protective guarding. Therefore, you must confirm whether the zone drawn with the automatic drawing is just as you intended, if you want to configure the actual protection zone according to the zone drawn with automatic drawing. Failure to follow this warning may result in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death.

You can select [Automatic drawing(A)] under the [Edit(E)] menu. The "Automatic Drawing" dialog box appears. Alternate procedure: Click the

button on the drawing toolbar. toolbar.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-39

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

Item

space

Based on the actual ranging information i nformation through the SZ series, the SZ Configurator automatically draws the zone, taking into account the specified space from the surrounding obstacles. You can use the up and down buttons of the input box, or input the value (space) directly.

Setting Range: Setting Range: 0 to 500 (mm) (mm) Default : 1 10 00 [Default] button You can reset the value in the input box to its default (100). You can check this box to activate auto drawing after deleting a current Delete the current specified zone zone. before starting automatic drawing. Default : ON ON You can can check this box to reduce reduce the number of user points so as to to make make the drawing easy to see (adjust). Smoothing

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Description

[Start automatic drawing] button

[Cancel] button

 

1

Default :O OF FF Start automatic drawing. Cancels automatic drawing and closes the [Automatic drawing] dialog.

Automatic drawing procedure

Select [Automatic drawing(A)] from the [Edit(E)] menu.

The "Automatic Drawing" dialog box appears. This explains how to configure automatic drawing. 2

Click the the [S [Start tart automatic drawing] button to st start art automatic automatic drawing.

Based on the actual ranging information infor mation through the SZ series, the SZ Configurator automatically draws the zone. The "Automatic drawing is in execution" dialog box appears when it is star started. ted.   While "Automatic drawing is in execution" dialog is being appeared, the zone that is automatically drawn is always updated in real time.

3

Click the [Finish] button to fix the drawing of zone.

If you click the [Finish] button, updating in real time stops, and then the confirmation dialog appears. If you click the [Cancel] button in that confirmation dialog, the SZ Configurator stops the automatic drawing, and then restores the zone.

6-40

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

4

Operation menu

Click the [OK] button to complete the automatic drawing.

The zone generated by the automatic drawing will be reflected in the configuration data. If you click [Cancel] button in that confirmation dialog, the SZ configurator stops the automatic drawing, and then restores the zone.

 

Rotation of all zones You can select [Rotation of all zones(O)...] under the [Edit(E)] menu. The [Rotation of all zones] dialog appears.

6

Item

Angle

(Slide bar) [Preview] button [Exe [Execu cute te]] but butto ton n [Can [Cance cel] l] butt button on

Description

You can specify the angle to rotate all zones on the canvas. Press the up and down buttons in the input box to change the angle of rotation. If the angle is entered manually, click the [Preview] button to rotate the zones. Setting Settin g Range Range : -180 -180 to 180 180 (Deg (Degre ree) e) Default : 0. 0.00 You can change the angle of rotation via the slide bar. bar. The all zones are rotated corresponding to the movement of slide bar. You can input the value of angle directly into the input box. All zones are rotated with the specified angle. You ca can n cha chang nge e tthe he se sett ttin ing g data data to re refl flec ectt the the sp spec ecif ifie ied d ang angle le of ro rota tati tion on.. Th This is ca canc ncel elss th the e ch chan ange ge in th the e an angl gle e of ro rota tati tion on an and d re retu turn rnss to th the e pr prev evio ious us st stat ate. e.

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-41

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

 

Displacement of all zones Select [Displacement of all zones(M)...] under the [Edit(E)] menu. The [Displacement of all zones] dialog appears.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Item

Horizontal direction

(Slide bar)

Vertical direction

(Slide bar) [Preview] button [Exe [Execu cute te]] b but utto ton n [Cancel] button

Danger

Description

You can specify a distance to displace all zones on the canvas horizontally. horizontally. Press the up and down buttons in the input box to change the distance displaced. If the distance is entered manually, manually, click the th e [Preview] button to displace the zones. Setting Settin g Range Range : -1000 -1000 to to 1000 1000 (mm (mm)) Default : 0 You can displace the distance horizontally via the slide bar. The all zones are displaced corresponding to the movement of slide bar bar.. You can specify a distance to displace all zones on the canvas vertically. vertically. Press the up and down buttons in the input box to change the distance displaced. If the distance is entered manually, manually, press the [Execute] button to displace the zones. Setting Settin g Range Range : -1000 -1000 to to 1000 1000 (mm (mm)) Default : 0 You can displace the distance vertically via the slide bar. The all zones are displaced corresponding to the movement of slide bar. You can input the value of distance (displacement) directly into the input box for horizontal direction and/or vertical direction. All zones are displaced with the specified distance. You ca can n cha chang nge e the the se sett ttin ing g dat data a to to ref refle lect ct th the e sspe peci cifi fied ed di dist stan ance ce(d (dis ispl plac acem emen ent) t).. This cancels the change in the distance(displacement) and returns to the previous state.

Displacement of all zones may result in shape changes of the zone corresponding to the new relationships between the origin and each point. You must make sure that displaced zones are as intended. If not, you must make any necessary adjustments.

6-42

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

View(V)  

Configuration Mode You can select [Configuration mode(C)] under the [View(V)] menu. The [Configuration] tab in the configuration con figuration will be active.

 

Monitoring Mode You can select [Monitoring mode(M)] under the [View(V)] menu. The [Monitoring] tab in the configuration will be active.

6  

Zoom This is a setting for the display of the monitoring panel and of the canvas. Zoom in

You can select [Zoom in(I)] under un der [Zoom(Z)] on the [View(V)] menu. Zooms the canvas or monitoring panel. Al Alte tern rnat ate e proc proced edur ure e :

 

· ·

 

Click the button on the drawing toolbar. toolbar. Move the mouse cursor over the drawing panel or monitor panel and move mouse wheel forward.

Zoom out

You can select [Zoom out(O)] under [Zoom(Z)] on the [View(V)] menu. Zooms out the canvas or monitoring panel. Al Alte tern rnat ate e proc proced edur ure e :

 

· ·

 

Click the button on the drawing toolbar. toolbar. Move the mouse cursor over the drawing panel or monitor panel and move mouse wheel backward.

Full display

You can select [Display full(A)] under [Zoom(Z)] on the [View(F)] menu. You can adjust the screen scale in order to fully display the zone and ranging information on the canvas or monitoring panel. Al Alte tern rnat ate e proc proced edur ure e :

 

·

Click the

button on the drawing toolbar. toolbar.

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-43

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

 

Turn canvas You can select [Turn [Turn canvas(T)...] from the [View(V)] menu. The [Turn canvas] dialog appears. You You can change the direction (angle) of SZ Series on the canvas and the monitoring panel. Note

The "Undo" function cannot be used to restore the canvas direction.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Item

Angle

Description

You can specify the angle to rotate the SZ series on the canvas or monitoring panel. Click the up and down buttons in the input box to change the angle of rotation in the [Turn canvas] dialog. Setting Settin g Range Range : -179 -179 to 180 180 (Deg (Degre ree) e) Default : 0

 (Left rotation)

Each click of this icon makes the left rotation with 45 degrees.

 (Right rotation)

Each click of this icon makes the right rotation with 45 degrees.

[OK] button [Cancel] button

You ca can rre eflect tth he specified angle to tth he di display of tth he ca canvas o orr mo monitoring pane nell. This cancels "Turn canvas".

Grid This is a setting for the grid on the monitoring panel and the canvas. View

You can select [Visible(V)] under [Grid(G)] on the [View(V)] menu. The grid is displayed on both monitoring panel and canvas. Checked  Unch Un chec ecke ked d

: The grid is displayed. : The The gr grid id is not not dis disp playe layed d.

6-44

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

 

Operation menu

Grid interval

You can select [Grid Interval(I)...] under [Grid(G)] on the [View(V)] menu. The "Grid interval" dialog box appears. You can specify the grid interval on the canvas and monitoring panel. Note

The "Undo" function cannot be used to restore to the grid interval.

Setting Settin g Rang Range e : 100 100 to 2000 2000 (mm) (mm) Default : 500  

6

Cartesian coordinates

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h 

You can select [Cartesian [Car tesian coordinates(C)] under [Grid(G)] on the [View(V)] menu. The canvas and monitoring panel are displayed as Cartesian coordinates.

Cartesian coordinates

Polar coordinates

You can select [Polar coordinates(P)] under [Grid(G)] on the [View(V)] menu. The canvas and monitoring panels are displayed as polar coordinates.

Polar coordinates

Unit This is a setting for the units on the monitoring panel and the canvas. mm

You can select [mm(M)] under [Unit(U)] on the [View(V)] menu. The canvas and monitoring panel are displayed in units of "mm".

 e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

inch

You can select [inch(I)] under [Unit(U)] on the [View(V)] menu. The canvas and monitoring panels are displayed in units of "inches".

6-45

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

 

Real-time ranging Displays the ranging information in real time on the canvas. Note

You should make sure that the personal computer (SZ Configurator) and the SZ Series device are properly connected with a USB cable.

Start

You can select [Start(S)] [Start( S)] under [Real-time ranging(R)] on the [View(V)] menu. The ranging information of the SZ Series is displayed on the canvas in real time.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Alternate Alternat e procedure procedure : Click Click the

button on the drawing drawing toolbar toolbar.

Pause

You can select [Pause(P)] under [Real-time ranging(R)] on the [View(V)] menu. Temporarily stops the real-time ranging. Alterna Alternate te proced procedure ure : Click Click the

button button on the drawin drawing g toolbar toolbar..

Clear

You can select [Clear(C)] under [Real-time ranging(R)] on the [View(V)] menu. Clears the real-time ranging information on the canvas. Alterna Alternate te proced procedure ure : Click Click the

button button on the drawin drawing g toolbar toolbar..

Bottom hold

You can select [Bottom-hold(B)] under [Real-time [ Real-time ranging(R)] on the [View(V)] menu. Both-hold can be set to the real-time ranging. You can see the result of bottom-hold. by a green line. Alterna Alternate te proced procedure ure : Click Click the

button button on the drawin drawing g toolbar toolbar..

Light Interference / High-reflective backgroun background d You can select [Light Interference / High-reflective background(L)] under the [View(V)] menu. You can switch whether the light interference / high-reflective background is displayed or not. Note

This can be selected during real-time ranging or during monitoring.

6-46

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

 

Operation menu

All points You can select [All points(A)] under the [View(V)] menu. This shows user points and setting points for all beams on the drawing panel during zone configuration. Zone display panel You can select [Zone display panel(P)] under the [View(V)] menu. You can switch whether the zone display panel is displayed or not. Alter Alterna nate te proc proced edur ure: e:

Cl Clic ickk the

butt button on on the the top top of the the ca canv nvas as..

Comments on the zone You can select [Comments on the zone(O)] under the [View(V)] menu. You can switch whether the zone memo is displayed or not. Alter Alterna nate te proc proced edur ure: e:

Cl Clic ickk the

butt button on on the dr draw awin ing g toolb toolbar ar..

Wire color and assigned function You can select [Wire color and assigned function(W)] f unction(W)] under the [View(V)] menu. The [Wire color and assigned function] dialog box appears.

Reference

The contents on this dialog box varies depending on the model and the configuration.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-47

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

Image on canv canvas(I) as(I)  

Visible You can select [Visible(V)] under the [Image on canva canvas(I)] s(I)] menu. You can switch whether the image on the canvas or monitoring panel is displayed or not. Note

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

This is only available when an image has been set on the canvas and monitoring panel.

Setting You can select [Setting(S)] under the [Image on canvas(I)] menu. The "Image on canvas" window appears. You can set the image on the canvas and monitoring panel.

Preview area

Item

[Import the file] button [Clear] button (Zoom In) (Zoom Out) [Scaling] button [Positioning] button (Left rotation) (Right rotation)

Description

You can specify the image file for putting on the canvas and monitoring panel. The file types that can be displayed*1 are BMP (*.bmp), JPEG (*.jpg) and TIFF (*.tif). You can clear the image displayed. Zooms in on the preview area. Zooms out on the preview area. You can change the scale of image in the preview area. You can move the image in the preview area. Each click of this icon makes the left rotation with 45 degrees. Each click of this icon makes the right rotation with 45 degrees.

6-48

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Item

Operation menu

Description

You can specify the angle to rotate the image in the preview area. Angle

[Reverse] button

Transparency [OK] button [Cancel] button *1

Setting Settin g Range Range : -180 -180 to 180 180 (Deg (Degree ree)) Default : 0 You can invert the image used as the background in the preview area about horizontal axis. The transparency of the image can be changed with the slide bar. The setting of 100% makes the image fully transparent , and then it becomes invisible. You can horizontally reverse the image in the preview area. You can reflect the specified image to the canvas and monitoring panel. This cancels the image setting.

Images Images gr great eater er than than 4000 p pixel ixelss x 4000 pixels pixels ca canno nnott be impo importe rted. d.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-49

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

Monitoring tools(M) Note

The monitoring tool can only be selected during monitoring.

I/O monitoring You can select [I/O monitoring(I)] under the [Monitoring tools(M)] menu. This shows I/O information (I/O monitoring) on the monitoring panel.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

I/O monitoring

Item

Input Output [Close] button [AUX output test] button

Description

This shows the wire color, color, function and ON/OFF state of the input. The contents on this varies depending on the model, configuration and input state. This shows the wire color, color, function and ON/OFF state of the output. The contents on this varies depending on the model, configuration and output state. Closes the I/O monitoring. Turns OSSD OFF and tests AUX output. OSSD goes to the OFF-state in order to execute the AUX output test.

6-50

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

 

Operation menu

AUX output test

You can click the [AUX output test] button to display the [AUX output test] dialog. Note

OSSD goes to and keeps the OFF-state during the AUX output test.

6

Item

Description

SZ series output the pulsed signal according to the specified state. "State Information Output" (page 2-41)

State information output 1/2*1

[ON] / [OFF] button *2 [Out [Outpu putt for] for] butt button on

[Finish test] button

*1 *2

Possible setting:1 Normal operation / 2 Muted or override condition / 3 Interlock condition / 4 Switch to bank1 / 5 Switch to bank2 / 6 Switch to bank3 / 7 Switch to bank4 / 8 Waiting for bank input / 9 Alert for window / 10 Alert for light interference or high-reflective background / 11 Alert for muting lamp / 12 OSSD error / 13 EDM Error / 14 Reset error / 15 Bank input error / 16 Window error / 17 Check point error / 18 Muting lamp error / 19 Window calibration error / 20 System error / 21 State in configuration / 22 Configuration data error / 23 MI Error / 24 Communication monitoring error You can turn the specified AUX output to the ON-state or OFF-state. Output will not be generated until the [Output] button is clicked. Ou Outp tput ut is gene genera rate ted d fo forr ea each ch AUX AUX ac acco cord rdin ing g to th the e sset etti ting ng.. You can finish the AUX output test. Click the [Finish test] button to display a confirmation dialog. Click the [Finish test] button in the dialog box to restore the state of all AUX outputs. OSSD also goes back to the normal operation.

When usi using ng an SZ-04 SZ-04M, M, this will on only ly be display displayed ed when th the e non-sa non-safety fety func functions tions AU AUX1/2 X1/2 ar are e set to state informa information tion output 1/2. If ne neither ither [ON] n nor or [OF [OFF] F] has has been selec selected, ted, tthe he ou output tput will be OFF OFF..

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-51

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

 

OSSD OFF history You can select [OSSD OFF history(O)] histor y(O)] under the [Monitoring tools(M)] menu. This shows an OSSD OFF history on the monitoring panel.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Detected position

OSSD OFF History

Item

Description

Selection button for detected position

Monitoring panel highlights the detected position for the specified event in the OSSD OFF history. This is the history No. of the event in the th e OSSD OFF history history.. "1" is assigned to the most recent event in the OSSD OFF history. On the other hand, "20" is assigned to the oldest event. OSSD OFF history has maximum 20 events in their history. Th The e ti tim me th that at OSS SSD D goe oess to th the e OFF FF-s -sta tate te is dis ispl play ayed ed.. (Ti Tim me of oc occu currren ence ce)) The following is the relationship between the event displayed and models.

(Number) Tim Time at OFF-s FF-sta tate te

[Event]

[R [Rea easson fo forr tthe he even event] t] [Det [Detec ecte ted d posi positi tion on]] [Detec [De tected ted period period of tim time] e] [Time at ON-state]

OSSD OFF

: OSSD 1/2 goes to the OFF-state in case of SZ-01S, SZ-16V and SZ-16D.

OSSD 1/2 1/2 OFF : OSSD 1/2 1/2 goes to the the OFF-state OFF-state in case case of SZ-04M. SZ-04M. OSSD 3/4 3/4 OFF : OSSD 3/4 3/4 goes to the the OFF-state OFF-state in case case of SZ-04M. SZ-04M. Th The e rea reasson fo forr tthe he ev even entt ((O OSSD OFF FF)) iiss dis disp pla layyed ed.. Th The e co coor ordi dina nate tess of posi positi tion on th that at th the e ev even entt (O (OSS SSD D OF OFF) F) oc occu curr rred ed ar are e di disp spla laye yed. d. The period period of tim time e that that the the event event (OS (OSSD SD OFF) OFF) conti continue nued d are are dis displa played yed.. The time that OSSD goes back to the ON-state is displayed. (Time of occurrence) "OSSDs are still in the OFF-state" is displayed if the OSSD still keeps the OFF-state.

[[C Ulpodsaet]eb] ubtutottnon Note

ClpodsaetsesthteheOS FFFFhishtisotroyrd U OSSD SDOO y.isplay.

OSSD OFF history is cleared if the power turns OFF OFF..

  6-52

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

 

Operation menu

Error information You can select [Error Information(E)] under the [Monitoring tools(M)] menu. This shows the information for the current error on the monitor display. display. Alternate Alternat e procedure: procedure: Click the [Error] [Error] button, which which is only displayed during during an error. error.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Error information

Item

(Number) Time at error [Error No.] [Error name] Occurred at [d.h.m.s] from power-on [Close] button [Update] button

Note

Description

This is the history No. of the error in the error information. "1" is assigned to the most recent error in the error information. On the other hand, "20" is assigned to the oldest error.. Error information has maximum 20 events in their history. error history. (The 21st and later events are not displayed.) The time that error occurred is displayed. (Time of occurrence) The number of the error is displayed. The name of the error is displayed. The period of time from the power-on to the occurrence of the error is displayed. Closes the error information display. display. Updates the error information.

Error information is cleared if the power turns OFF OFF..

Clear OSSD OFF history You can select [Clear OSSD OFF history(C)] histor y(C)] under the [Monitoring tools(M)] menu. This clears the OSSD OFF history. Turning the power off also clears the history.

 

6-53

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

Communication(C) Note

Read out the configuration data from SZ You can select [Read out the configuration data from SZ.(R)] under the [Communication(C)] menu. SZ Configurator reads out the configuration data from the SZ Series, and shows it on itself.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

You should make sure that the computer (SZ Configurator) and the SZ Series device are properly connected with a USB cable.

Alterna Alternate te proce procedur dure e : Click Click the

 

Transfer the configuration data to SZ You can select [Transfer [Transfer the configuration data to SZ.(T)...] under u nder the [Communication(C)] menu. SZ Configurator transfers configuration data from the personal computer to the SZ Series. Alterna Alternate te proce procedur dure e Refer to

 

button button on the drawin drawing g toolba toolbarr.

: ·· Click Cli ck the the[Transfer] button on thebutton but on the drawin drawing g too r. Click subton panel belonging totoolba thelbar [Configuration] tab.

"T "Transfer" ransfer" (page 6-30) for 6-30) for more information about transferring configuration data.

Verification You can select [Verification(V)] under the [Communication(C)] menu. You can check the configuration currently being edited against the configuration data on the SZ Series. The results are shown in the [Verification] window when matching is completed.

6-54

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

 

Operation menu

Initialization You can select [Initialization(I)] under the [Communication(C)] menu. This initializes the SZ Series. Note

Initialization causes return to factory defaults of all configurations and deletion of the OSSD OFF history and the error information.

Initialization procedure

1

Select [Initialization(I)] under the [Communication(C)] [Communication(C)] menu.

The initialization confirmation dialog box appears. Click the [OK] button.

2

The [Log-in] dialog appears. The password is required to log in.

If you are already logged in, step 2 will not occur and initialization will begin.

If initialization is completed correctly, correctly, a confirmation confir mation dialog appears. Click [OK].

RS-422A Communication Test You can select [RS-422A Communication test(T)] under the [Communication(C)] menu. This can be selected when the model is “SZ-16D”. For details of the Communication Test, refer to “SZ-16D Communication Manual”.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

6-55

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

Operation menu

Log-in authentication(A) Note

 

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

You should make sure that the computer (SZ Configurator) and the SZ Series device are properly connected with a USB cable.

Log-in You can select [Log-in(I)] under the [Communication(C)] menu. This will log you in to the SZ Series. This cannot be selected if you are already logged in. Reference

The default password is "1111". Change the default password. "Password change" (page 6-56)

Alternate Alternat e procedur procedure e : Click the

 

button button on the drawing drawing toolbar toolbar.

Log-out You can select [Log-out(O)] under the [Log-in authentication (A)] menu. This will log you out of the SZ Series. This cannot be selected if you are already logged out. Alternate Alternat e procedur procedure e : Click the Note

button button on the drawing drawing toolbar toolbar.

You will be llogged ogged out automatically if 30 minutes has been passed with no operations.

Password change You can select [Password change(C)] under the [Log-in authentication(A)] menu. This is only available when logged in to the th e SZ Series. The [Password change] dialog appears. You can change the password. Reference

The default password is "1111".

Enter the new password.

The password must meet the following characteristics. Length Usable characters

4 to 8 Alphabet and hyphen (-)

6-56

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

6-5

 

Operation menu

When you forget the password You can select [When you forget the password(F)...] from the [Log-in authentication (A)] menu. me nu. This is only available when logged out of the SZ Series. The [Reference code] will be displayed in the [When you forget the password] dialog. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office with this code to receive a [Password for initialization].

6 Language(L) You can chang change e the language of the SZ Configurator Configurator..  

Japanese You can select [Japanese] under the [Language(L)] menu. You can change the llanguage anguage of the SZ Configurator to Japanese.

 

English You can select [English] under the [Language(L)] menu. You can change the language of the SZ Configurator to English.

 

Chinese You can select [Chinese] under the [Language(L)] menu. You can change the language of the SZ Configurator to Chinese.

 

German You can select [German] under the [Language(L)] menu. You can change the language of the SZ Configurator to German.

 

French

You can select [French] under the [Language(L)] menu. You can change the language of the SZ Configurator to French.  

Spanish You can select [Spanish] under the [Language(L)] menu. You can change the language of the SZ Configurator to Spanish.

 

Italian You can select [Italian] under the [Language(L)] menu. You can change the language of the SZ Configurator to Italian.

 

Portuguese You can select [Portuguese] under the [Language(L)] menu.

 C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

You can change the language of the SZ Configurator to Portuguese.

SZ-M-NO6-E

6-57

 

6-5

Operation menu

Reference

Windows XP requires that fonts are installed to display Japanese and Chinese. Click the Windows [Start] button and select [Control Panel] - [Regional Options]. When a dialog box like the one below appears, select the [Languages] tab and under [Supplemental language support], select the [Install files for East Asian languages] check box and then click [OK]. A Windows XP CD-ROM is required to install the files.

6  C   o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  t   h  r   o  u  g h   t   h   e  c  o n f   i    g  u r   a  t   i    o n  s  o f    t   w  a r   e

Help(H)  

SZ User's Manual You can select [SZ Users Manual(M)] under the [Help(H)] menu. You can see the SZ user's manual as a PDF.

 

About SZ Configurator You can select [About SZ Configurator(A)...] under the [Help] menu. This displays the version information for the SZ Configurator.

6-58

SZ-M-NO6-E

 

7  Inspection and Maintenance

77-1 1

In Insp spec ecti tion on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7-2

7-2

Ini Initia tiall in inspe specti ction on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

77-3 3

Da Dail ily y insp inspec ecti tion on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 7-6

7-4

Regula Regularr (p (perio eriodic dical) al) inspec inspectio tion n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

77-5 5

Cl Clea eani ning ng the the w win indo dow w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 7-9

7-1

SZ-M-NO7-E

 

7-1

Inspection

You are fully responsible for performing the risk assessment on your machine application, taking into account performing maintenance and inspections, which are critical factor for appropriate risk assessment. In addition, it is a responsibility for the responsible personnel to train the machine operators regarding inspection and maintenance of the machine and the SZ. Note that the following inspection items comprise only a bare minimum minimum inspection. KEYENCE Corporation strongly recommends including the necessary checking items into this checklist based on the judgment of the responsible personnel since additional criteria may be necessary depending on both the machine to which the SZ is installed and the laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or region in which the SZ is used/installed. You must keep the inspection result along with the machine log.

7 I   n  s  p  e  c  t   i    o n  a n  d  M  a i   i   n  t    e n  a n  c  e

Danger

Do not use the machine on which the SZ is installed if the SZ does not operate according to any of the inspection items as a s listed below. F Failure ailure to follow this warning results in a significant harm to the machine operators, including serious injury or death.

7-2

SZ-M-NO7-E

 

7-2  Initial inspection When the installation of the SZ is completed, the responsible personnel must verify the operation of the SZ in accordance with the checklist shown below. (1) Pre-check for installation conditions 

 









The SZ is installed without loose fixture screws, in accordance with the specification of tightening torque in this manual. The machine under SZ control can stop running run ning when the OSSD is in the OF OFF-state. F-state. The SZ is installed so that the machine operator cannot go into or approach the hazardous area or hazards without passing through the protection zone of the SZ. The SZ is installed so that the machine operator cannot go into or approach the hazardous area or hazards without passing through any of the protection zone of the SZ belonging to the bank switching function. The interlock reset mechanism is installed so that it cannot be operated if there are any personnel within the hazardous area. The device to activate the override is installed so that it cannot be operated if there are any personnel within the hazardous area. Minimum safety distance is ensured, which has been calculated according to the laws, regulations, and standards of the country and region in which the SZ is installed.













"3-3 Safety distances" (page 3-7). 3-7).

The SZ is installed at a location loc ation free from light interference, for example an incandescent lamp or a halogen lamp. "Light interference" (page 3-3). 3-3). When two or more SZ are installed nearby, nearby, the countermeasures counter measures against mutual interference are taken based on the description of "Mutual interference" (page 3-3) 3-3).. The muting devices fulfill the conditions specified in this manual and the requirements of the laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or region in which the SZ and those devices are used. "Muting function" (page 2-27). 2-27). The devices used to activate the override fulfill the conditions specified in this manual and the requirements of the laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or region in which the SZ and those devices are used. "Override function" (page 2-32) 2-32).. All conditions specified in this manual are fulfilled when enabling the suspension in teaching mode. in teaching mode" (pageis2-30). 2-30) . The"Suspension reference points monitoring function enabled in case of access protection. Additionally, two or more reference points are set on one structure so as to ensure the detection of its position change.  "2-9 Reference points monitoring function" (page 2-17). 2-17) .

(2) Pre-check for wiring 

The SZ power supply is 24 V DC, fulfilling the conditions for the power supply as specified in this manual. See "4-2 Power supply" (page 4-3). 4-3).



For the wiring between the SZ and a safety-related part of a machine control system, both OSSD 1 and OSSD 2 is wired to a safety-related part of a machine control system. Similarly, both OSSD 3 and OSSD 4 is also wired to a safety-related part of a machine control system if you assign a function for OSSD 3/4.

 

The polarity of the power supply is not reversed. The shielded wire is grounded. (0 V line is grounded in case of PNP output type t ype cable, while +24 V line is grounded in case of NPN output type cable.)

7 I   n  s  p  e  c  t   i    o n  a n  d  M  a ii      n  t    e n  a n  c  e







In case of using PNP output type cable, the OSSD is not short-c short-circuited ircuited to +24 V, V, and the load is between the OSSD and 0 V. In case of using NPN output type cable, the OSSD is not short-circuited to 0 V, and the load is between the OSSD and +24 V. All of the AUX outputs are not used as a safety output for safety-related part of a control system.

SZ-M-NO7-E

7-3

 

7-2

Initial inspection





There is no damage to the cable insulation. insu lation. Additionally,, the protection against the disconnection or short-circuit of cable, which might be caused Additionally by crushing or being caught in a machine, is taken into account. Any non-safety related functions described in this manual should not be used as a safety related machine control.

(3) Pre-check test while the machine is stopped

You should perform the following pre-check test with the test piece in order to make sure the operation of the SZ while the machine is stopped. In this case, you should supply the power only to the SZ. Test piece should match the minimum detectable object size you chose. 

7 I   n  s  p  e  c  t   i    o n  a n  d  M  a i   i   n  t    e n  a n  c  e

















The OSSD indicator lights in red when the test piece is present in the specified protection zone. This test must be performed for the whole specified protection zone. If the bank switching function is applied to the SZ, this test must be performed per formed for the whole and ever everyy specified protection zone. If the muting function is applied to a part of the protection zone, this test must be performed during muted condition for the whole specified protection zone, except for muting zone. The OSSD indicator lights in red when the SZ detects the test piece at the intended detection plane (height) while the test piece vertical to the detection plane moves in the protection zone. The OSSD indicator lights in red due to an error caused by the open-circuit of the EDM input while the test piece is present in the protection zone. This is only applicable if the EDM function is applied. The OSSD indicator lights in green when the SZ starts normal operation after power on (when "Now Loading" is changed to "Normal Operation" on the information display) and detects no object in the protection zone with "Automatic/Automatic" for the configuration of start/restart mode. The OSSD indicator continues to light in red and the th e interlock indicator lights in yellow, when the SZ starts normal operation after power on (when "Now Loading" is changed to "Normal Operation" on the information display) with either "Manual/Manual" or "Manual/Automatic" for the configuration of start/  restart mode. Continuously, the OSSD indicator lights in green and the interlock indicator lights off in the event of reset operation, if the SZ detects no object in th the e protection zone at that time. The OSSD indicator lights in red and the interlock indicator lights in yellow when the SZ detects the test piece in the protection zone with "Manual/Manual" for the configuration of start/restart mode. Continuously,, the OSSD indicator continues to light in red and the interlock indicator lights off when Continuously the test piece is removed from the protection zone. The OSSD indicator lights in green after the specified delay time has been passed if the restart delay (ON-delay) function is applied to the SZ. The SZ does not go to the muted condition even if the t he muting inputs are activated in accordance with the specified sequence and time difference, when the SZ detects an object in the protection zone other than muting zone. This is only applicable if the muting function is applied. The SZ does not go to the muted condition if the muting inputs are activated with different sequence from the specified one. The SZ does not also go to the muted condition if the muting inputs are activated exceeding the specified time difference. These are only applicable if the muting function is applied.





The muted condition is terminated if the specified muting period of time has been passed. This is only applicable if the muting function is applied. The SZ does not go to the suspension in teaching mode even if the teach input and teach ready input are activated in accordance with the specified sequence and time difference, when the SZ detects an



object in the protection zone. This is only applicable if the suspension in teaching mode is applied. The SZ does not go to the suspension in teaching mode if the teach input is activated after the activation of teach ready input. The SZ also does not go to the suspension in teaching mode if the teach input and teach ready input are activated activate d exceeding the specified time difference. This is only applicable if the suspension in teaching mode is applied.

7-4

SZ-M-NO7-E

 

7-2











Initial inspection

The override condition is terminated ter minated if the specified override period of time has been passed. This is only applicable if the override function is applied. The protection zone can be switched according a ccording to the signal combination of bank inputs in case of bank switching function. "Bank error" occurs if the protection zone is switched according to the unspecified sequence. This is only applicable if the bank sequence monitoring function is applied. If there is an unprotected space between the protection zone and the protective structure, test piece is always detected by the SZ when it goes through that space. This is only applicable if the SZ is used for the access protection (the application where the angle of the approach exceeds ±30° to the detection plane). The OSSD indicator lights in red when the protective structure moves exceeding the tolerance of reference point. This is only applicable if the SZ is used for the access protection (the application where the angle of the approach exceeds ±30° to the detection plane).

(4) Pre-check test while the machine operates

The purpose of this pre-check test is to make sure that the machine (hazards) stops its operation. This test must be performed perfor med after you completely make sure that there is nobody in the hazardous zone. 



  

Machine (hazard) stops its operation if the test piece is present in the specified protection zone. If the bank switching function is applied to the SZ, this test must be performed for the whole and every specified protection zone. The machine (hazard) still stops its operation as long as the test piece is present in the specified protection zone. If the bank switching function is applied to the SZ, this test must be performed for the whole and every specified protection zone. The machine (hazard) stops its operation when the t he power for the SZ is disconnected. The machine (hazard) stops its operation when the t he interlock indicator lights in yellow. The response time for overall safety-related control system (from the intrusion of test piece in the protection zone to the machine stop) is less than overall response time (T) used for the calculation of safety distance.

7 I   n  s  p  e  c  t   i    o n  a n  d  M  a ii      n  t    e n  a n  c  e

SZ-M-NO7-E

7-5

 

7-3  Daily inspection The daily inspection for the SZ operation and the machine operation should be performed based on the following check items. (1) Pre-check for installation conditions 





7 I   n  s  p  e  c  t   i    o n  a n  d  M  a i   i   n  t    e n  a n  c  e



The SZ is installed so that the machine operator cannot go into or approach the hazardous area or hazards without passing through the protection zone of the SZ. The SZ is installed so that the machine operator cannot go into or approach the hazardous area or hazards without passing through any of the protection zone of the SZ belonging to the bank switching function. The SZ is installed at a location loca tion free from light interference, for example an incandescent lamp and a halogen lamp. There is no damage to the cable insulation. insu lation. Additionally,, the protection against the disconnection or short-circuit of cable, which might be caused Additionally by crushing or being caught in a machine, is taken into account.

(2) Pre-check test while the machine is stopped

You should do the following pre-check test with the test piece in order to make su sure re the operation of the SZ while the machine is stopped. In this case, you should shou ld supply the power only to the SZ. Test piece should match the minimum detectable object size you chose. 













The OSSD indicator lights in red when the test piece is present in the specified protection zone. This test must be performed for the whole specified protection zone. If the bank switching function is applied to the SZ, this test must be performed per formed for the whole and ever everyy specified protection zone. If the muting function is applied to a part par t of the protection zone, this test must be performed during muted condition for the whole specified protection zone, except for muting zone. The OSSD indicator lights in red when the SZ detects the test piece at the intended detection plane (height) while the test piece vertical to the detection plane moves in the protection zone. The OSSD indicator lights in green when the SZ starts normal operation after power on (when "Now Loading" is changed to "Normal Operation" on the information display) and detects no object in the protection zone with "Automatic/Automatic" for the configuration of start/restart mode. The OSSD indicator continues to light in red and the th e interlock indicator lights in yellow, when the SZ starts normal operation after power on (when "Now Loading" is changed to "Normal Operation" on the information display) with either "Manual/Manual" or "Manual/Automatic" for the configuration of start/  restart mode. Continuously, the OSSD indicator lights in green and the interlock indicator lights off in the event of reset operation, if the SZ detects no object in th the e protection zone at that time. The OSSD indicator lights in red and the interlock indicator lights in yellow when the SZ detects the test piece in the protection zone with "Manual/Manual" for the configuration of start/restart mode. Continuously,, the OSSD indicator continues to light in red and the interlock indicator lights off when Continuously the test piece is removed from the protection zone. The OSSD indicator lights in green after the specified delay time has been passed if the restart delay (ON-delay) function is applied to the SZ. The SZ does not go to the muted condition even if the t he muting inputs are activated in accordance with



the specified sequence and time difference, when the SZ detects an object in the protection zone other than the muting zone. This is only applicable if the muting function is applied. The SZ does not go to the muted condition if the muting inputs are activated with different sequence from the specified one. The SZ does not also go to the muted condition if the muting inputs are activated exceeding the specified time difference.

7-6

SZ-M-NO7-E

 

7-3



 



Daily inspection

The SZ does not go to the suspension in teaching mode even if the teach input and teach ready input are activated in accordance with the specified sequence and time difference, when the SZ detects an an object in the protection zone. This is only applicable if the suspension in teaching mode is applied. The protection zone can be switched according a ccording to the signal combination of bank inputs. If there is an unprotected space between the protection zone and the protective structure, test piece is always detected by the SZ when it goes through that space. This is only applicable if the SZ is used for the access protection (the application where the angle of the approach exceeds ±30° to the detection plane). The OSSD indicator lights in red when the protective structure moves exceeding the tolerance of reference point. This is only applicable if the SZ is used for the access protection (the application where the angle of the approach exceeds ±30° to the detection plane).

(3) Pre-check test while the machine operates

The purpose of this pre-check test is to make sure that the machine (hazards) stops its operation. This test must be performed perfor med after you completely make sure that there is nobody in the hazardous zone. 



  

Machine (hazard) stops its operation if the test piece is pr present esent in the specified protection zone. zone. If the bank switching function is applied to the SZ, this test must be performed for the whole and every specified protection zone. The machine (hazard) still stops its operation as long as the test piece is present in the specified protection zone. If the bank switching function is applied to the SZ, this test must be performed for the whole and every specified protection zone. The machine (hazard) stops its operation when the t he power for the SZ is disconnected. The machine (hazard) stops its operation when the t he interlock indicator lights in yellow. The response time for overall safety-related control system (from the intrusion of test piece in the protection zone to the machine stop) is less than overall response time (T) used for the calculation of safety distance.

7 I   n  s  p  e  c  t   i    o n  a n  d  M  a ii      n  t    e n  a n  c  e

SZ-M-NO7-E

7-7

 

7-4  Regular (periodical) inspection The responsible personnel must perform a regular inspection at least once every six months. Additionally,, you should perform Additionally perfor m the regular inspection if you make any ch change ange to the configuration on the SZ and on the machine on which the SZ is installed. Regular (periodical) inspection items include the following, in addition to the "7-3 Daily inspection" (page 7-6). 7-6). (1) Additional inspection items 

 

7 I   n  s  p  e  c  t   i    o n  a n  d  M  a i   i   n  t    e n  a n  c  e

       



The SZ is installed without loosing the screws for fixture, in accordance with the specification of tightening torque in this manual. The screw on the connector cable is fastened tightly to the SZ. The SZ does not have any change on its position. (Safety distance is ensured, and the detection plane is not changed.) The shielded wire is securely grounded. All of wires are correctly connected to external device, and the connection is securely performed. There is sufficient life left in terms ter ms of how many times the safety relay ha hass been opened and closed. There is no damage to the SZ that may impair the performance of iits ts protective IP65 structure. The surface of the window is not dirty or damaged. The OSSD indicator lights in red due to an error caused by the open-circuit of the EDM input while the test piece is present in the protection zone. This is only applicable if the EDM function is applied. The muted condition is terminated if the specified maximum muting period of time has been passed. The override condition is terminated ter minated if the specified maximum override period of time has been passed. The bank error occurs if the bank is switched according to unspecified sequence in case ca se where the bank sequence monitoring is applied to the SZ.

7-8

SZ-M-NO7-E

 

7-5  Cleaning the window The SZ window is a critical part of the detection system. You must clean the window whenever there is dust or pollution on it. You should wipe off the pollution in the area indicated by the diagonal lines with a soft c cloth loth moistened with a mild detergent that will not corrode polycarbonate.

Note

Reference

• OSSD might go tto o the OFF-state if the window has a scratch, because the SZ falsely detects that scratch as the object approaching into the protection zone. Be sure to take care that the window has no scratch on it. • Be careful static electricity while cleaning because of avoiding dust collection. You should use a cloth that will be hard to generate static electricity when rubbed on polycarbonate.

Detection capability might be decreased due to the attenuation of light if the window has a pollution. OSSD goes to the OFF-state before the pollution on the window leads to loss of detection capability because the SZ has a function to monitor the pollution on the window. Furthermore, OSSD might go to the OFF-state if the window has a pollution because the SZ detects that pollution as the object approaching into the protection zone. Be sure to keep clean on the window to avoid unnecessary OFF-state of OSSD.

7 I   n  s  p  e  c  t   i    o n  a n  d  M  a ii      n  t    e n  a n  c  e

7-9

SZ-M-NO7-E

 

7-5

Cleaning the window

MEMO

7 I   n  s  p  e  c  t   i    o n  a n  d  M  a i   i   n  t    e n  a n  c  e

7-10

SZ-M-NO7-E

 

8  Troubleshooting

8-1

Self-d Self-diag iagnos nosis is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8-2

Trouble roublesho shooti oting ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

8-1

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

8-1

Self-diagnosis

The SZ periodically execute the self-diagnosis against the failure at the start-up and during the normal operation. If the SZ detects any failures through self-diagnosis, the SZ has either an error or an alert based on the type of failure, and indicates such information on the information display in addition to the AUX outputs.

Error state The SZ goes to the error state if it detects the failure having impact to the safe safety-related ty-related function. In this situation, the OSSD goes to the OFF-state, and an error information is indicated on the information display and is output to the external. You can check the state of the SZ through the indicator on the front panel, the information display, and the AUX outputs. In case of error state, the interlock indicator blinks in yellow and the information display indicates the factor on the failure. You can refer to "Troubleshooting" to remove the failure. If you want to have error information and the state of the SZ through the AUX outputs, see "2-13 AUX (auxiliary) output" (page 2-35). 2-35). You can also check the state of the SZ and the error information through the SZ Configurator, if you connect the SZ to the personal computer. computer.

8 T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s h   o  o  t   i   n  g

 

Indication or output on the t he error information Information Informa tion displa displayy : It indicat indicates es the factor on the failure. failure. "8-2 Troubleshooting" Troubleshooting" (page 8-5) 8 -5) AUX AU X out outpu puts ts : AU AUX X out outpu putt iin n que quest stio ion n goe goess tto o the the OFF OFF sta state te in cas case e of of err error or if yo you u assi assign gn "err "error or output" or "error/alert output" to the AUX output. "2-13 AUX (auxiliary) output" (page 2-35) State Sta te informa information tion : The SZ outp outputs uts the the error error informa informatio tion n signal signal if you you assig assign n "state "state informa informatio tion" n" to the AUX output. " State Information Output" (page 2-41) SZ Conf Config igur urat ator or : It iind ndic icat ates es the the error error inf inform ormat atio ion n on the the moni monitor torin ing g pane panel.l. "Error information" (page 6-53)

 

Restoration from the error state It depends on the factor on the failure. See "8-2 Troubleshooting" Troubleshooting" (page 8-5). 8-5). • The SZ automatically goes b back ack to the normal operation if you rremove emove the factor on the failure. • The SZ goes back to the normal operation with reset operation if you remove the factor on the failure. • The SZ goes back to the norma normall operation with restoring restoring the power if you rem remove ove the factor on the failure. failure.

8-2

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

8-1

Self-diagnosis

 

In case where the SZ goes back to the normal operation with reset operation.  

"Automatic "Automat ic start mode" Detect no object SZ Detect object

ON Reset input OFF Error Err or occurs occurs Cause of error error eliminate eliminated d ON

100 ms min.

Error state

OSSD OFF

1.2 s max.

"Manual start mode"

8

Detect no object SZ Detect object

ON Reset input OFF 100 ms min. Error occurs ON OSSD

100 ms min.

Cause of error eliminated

Error state

Interlock condition

OFF 1.2 s max.

Note

100 ms max.

When the Mode D is applied as the operation mode for OSSD3/4, the following sequence is applied. 2 reset operation is required if the SZ goes back to the normal operation with reset operation. 1) At first, you must perform the reset rese t operation on OSSD 1/2 (yellow wire). 2) Then, you must perform the reset operation on OSSD 3/4 (yellow/black wire).

T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s h   o  o  t   i   n  g

SZ-M-NO8-E

8-3

 

8-1

Self-diagnosis

Alert state The SZ goes to the alert state if it detects either the failure having impact to the operation or the external interference. In this situation, alert error information is indicated on the information display and is output to the external. (OSSD keeps normal operation.) You can prevent the unnecessary machine stop because you can find the countermeasure before the OSSD goes to the OFF-state during the normal operation, if you find the alert state on the SZ. You can check the state of the SZ through the information display and the AUX outputs. In case of aler alertt state, the information display indicates the factor on the aler alert. t. You You can refer to "Troubleshooting" to remove the factor on the alert. If you want wan t to have the alert infor information mation and the state of the SZ through the AUX outputs, see "2-13 AUX (auxiliary) output" (page 2-35) 2-35).. You can also check the state of the SZ and the alert aler t information through the SZ Configurator, if you connect the SZ to the personal computer. computer.

8 T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s h   o  o  t   i   n  g

 

Indication or output on the alert information Information Informa tion displa displayy : It indicat indicates es the factor on the the alert. alert. "8-2 Troubleshooting" Troubleshooting" (page 8-5) 8 -5) AUX AU X out outpu puts ts : AU AUX X out outpu putt in qu ques estition on go goes es to to the the OFF OFF sta state te in case case o off ale alert rt iiff yyou ou as assi sign gn "ale "alert rt output" or "error/alert output" to the AUX output. State Sta te informa informatio tion n

SZ Conf Config igur urat ator or

"2-13 AUX (auxiliary) output" (page 2-35) : The SZ SZ outputs outputs the the alert inform informatio ation n signal signal if you you assign assign "state "state inform informatio ation" n" to the the AUX output.  " State Information Output" (page 2-41) : It iind ndic icat ates es the the alert alert inf inform ormat atio ion n on the the mon monititor orin ing g pane panel.l.

The SZ automatically goes back to the normal nor mal operation if you remove the factor on the alert. For more details, see "8-2 Troubleshooting" (page 8-5). 8-5).

8-4

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

8-2  Troubleshooting You can confirm the state of the SZ through the information display in case of error or aler alert. t. You You should resolve the problem with the information on that display if the SZ does not operate as intended.

Indication on information display The following table shows the information on the information infor mation display, display, the state of the SZ, and explanation. It also shows the number of pulse for state information output. If you have any problem (error or alert) aler t) on the SZ, the fo following llowing table must be helpful for you. Note

• The SZ ma may y recognize a prob problem lem due to the several selfself-diagnosis diagnosis functions. In this case, you can see several error information on the information display display.. Y You ou should remove exact problem since these information are possibility possibility.. • The SZ ma may y recognize the consequent problem after it detects one prob problem. lem. In this case, you can see several error information on the information display display.. Y You ou should remove exact problem since these information are possibility possibility..

Reference

• The SZ cannot indicate se several veral error information information on the information display at the same time. time. If you find the " " or " " on the upper right on the information display, it means that the SZ has another error info inform rmat atio ion. n. You shou should ld pre press ss " " or " " butt button on to scr scroll oll th the e dis displ play ay.. • The restoration from error error state depends depends on the error error information. Error 1: The SZ automatically goes back to the normal operation if you rremove emove the factor on the err error or.. Error 2: The SZ goes back to the normal normal operation with reset oper operation ation if you remove the factor on the error. Error 3: The SZ goes back to the normal normal operation with restoring the power if you remove remove the factor on the error. • "B:C "B:Config onfiguratio uration n on SZ", see see "Chapter 5 Manual Configuration on the SZ" (page 5-1). 5-1).

Information on the Color of display display

State

The number of pulses for state

Description

information

Countermeasure

You should check the wiring. "4-5 Examples of wiring" (page 4-9)

You should check the rating of power supply to the SZ. You should check whether the power is enough. "9-2 Specifications" (page 9-3) If you want to turn on the backlight, you should change the "T "Turn urn off backlight" has been configuration through the SZ configured. Cofigurator. "Non Safety-related  Safety-related  Functions" (page 6-23) The SZ may be broken. You should replace the SZ. This is indicated at start-up for a few You should wait for normal seconds. operation. The OSSD keeps the OFF-state due to the detection of an error through You should replace the SZ unless the self-diagnosis at start-up unless

No power supply

Nothing in display

-

Normal operation

-

Broken Normal operation KEYENCE  SZ Series Safety Laser

Lighting in red

-

8 T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s

 o h   o  t   i   n  g

Broken

-

Scanner

you see "Now Loading" after this you see "Now Loading" after this information. information. The SZ may be broken in this case.

8-5

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

8-2

Troubleshooting

Information on the Color of display display

State

The number of pulses for state information

This is indicated for app. 20 seconds before starting normal operation. The SZ is under loading.*1

Normal operation

Now Loading

8 T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s

 o h   o  t   i   n  g

Waiting For Configu  ration

Under Configu  ration

Normal  Operation

Normal  Operation   Bank*

Blinking in red

Error 3, or Broken

Lighting Normal in red operation

22

Blinking Normal in red operation

21

Lighting in green, Normal red, or operation orange*2

1

Lighting in green, Normal red, or operation

4~7

orange*2 Normal  Operation

Lighting Normal in red operation

Description

Countermeasure

You should wait for starting normal operation.

The OSSD keeps the OFF-state due (1) You should reinstall the SZ so as not to have light interference to the detection of an error through within ±5° to the detection plane. the self-diagnosis at start-up unless " Light interference" (page 3-3), 3-3) , you see "Normal Operation" after " Mutual interference" (page 3-3) this information. In this case, (1) the (2) You should install the SZ so as not SZ is in the error state of light to have the vibration and shock interference, (2) the SZ is in the exceeding the specification. error state due to the strong "9-2 Specifications" (page 9-3) vibration and shock, or (3) the SZ (3) You should should re replace place the SZ. may be broken in this case. You should perform perfor m the configuration of safety function through the SZ Configurator or manual configuration on the SZ. "Chapter 5 Manual The The c con onfi figu gura rattio ion n iiss not not compl omplet eted ed.. Configuration on the SZ" (page 5-1) "Chapter 6 Configuration through the configuration software" (page (1) You6-1) should should wait fo forr compl completing eting (1) The configura configuration tion th through rough tthe he the transferring or initialization. SZ Configurator is being (2) You should should compl complete ete the AUX transferred or initialized. output test. "Monitoring (2) AUX output output test test is in execu execution. tion. tools(M)" (page 6-50) The SZ is under normal operation. The OSSD is in the ON-state if the If the OSSD goes to the OFF-state display lights in green, while the when nothing is present in the OSSD is in the OFF-state if the protection zone, see display lights in red. For the "T "Troubleshooting roubleshooting on the OSSD SZ-04M, if either OSSD 1/2 or OSSD 8-11). 3/4 is in the ON-state and the other operation" (page 8-11). OSSD is in the OFF-state, the display lights in orange. It indicates the bank number in case of enabling the bank switching "2-11 Bank switching function" function. Asterisk (*) is the bank (page 2-20) number.

1

The OSSD is in the OFF-state due to "2-14 Check input function" the check input. (page 2-43)

 Check Input Normal  Operation  

Lighting Normal in red operation

1

The OSSD automatically goes to the The OSSD is in the OFF-state due to ON-state after the configured delay restart delay (ON-delay). time is passed.

ON Delay

Muting

"Restart Delay (ON-delay)" (page 2-15)

Lighting Normal in green operation

2

The SZ is under the temporary "2-12 Temporary suspension of suspension of safety function due to muting, override, or suspension in safety function" (page 2-27) teaching mode. The SZ is under the temporary suspension of safety function due to muting, override, or suspension in

Muting   Detection

Lighting Normal in green operation

2

teaching mode. The OSSD still in "2-12 Temporary suspension of the ON-state even if the SZ is detects safety function" (page 2-27) an object in the protection zone or if the structure moves exceeding the specified tolerance for reference points monitoring function.

8-6

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

8-2

Troubleshooting

Information on the Color of display display

Interlock

State

Lighting in red, or

Normal operation *2

The number of pulses for state information

Description

3

The SZ is under interlock condition. The SZ detects an object in the protection zone or that the structure moves exceeding the specified tolerance for reference points monitoring function.

orange

Interlock Reset Ready

Lighting Normal in red operation

3

Countermeasure

You should perform perfor m the reset operation in order to terminate the interlock condition when the SZ detects no object in the protection

zone or thepoints. structure on the reference "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12) You should perform perfor m the reset operation in order to terminate the interlock condition. The SZ is under interlock condition. "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12)  2-12)  You can perform the reset operation For the SZ-04M, you should perform to restart the SZ because the the reset operation for OSSD 1/2 and/  conditions for terminating the or OSSD 3/4 respectively in order to interlock are met. terminate the interlock condition when the Mode D is applied as the operation mode for OSSD 3/4.

Interlock RST Ready1/2

Interlock RST Ready3/4

Alert Window Pollution

Alert Light Interference

Alert Muting Lamp

Alert AUX Over current

Lighting Normal in red, or operation orange*2

3

Lighting Normal in red, or operation orange*2

3

Lighting in green,  red, or orange*2

9

Lighting in green,  red, or orange*2

Lighting in green,  red, or orange*2

Lighting in green,  red, or orange*2

Lighting

Alert

Alert

Alert

Alert

10

11

-

The OSSD 1/2 is under interlock You should perform perfor m the reset condition. You can perform the reset operation for OSSD 1/2 in order to operation to restart the SZ because terminate the interlock condition. the conditions for terminating the "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12) interlock are met. The OSSDYou 3/4 can is under interlock condition. perform the reset operation to restart the SZ because the conditions for terminating the interlock are met. Alert: Window pollution There is pollution or damage on the window. The OSSD may go to the OFF-state if you leave this situation as it is. Alert: Light interference The SZ has light interference, such as incandescent lamp, fluorescent lamp, stroboscopic light, or photoelectric sensor. Or, Or, the SZ has mutual interference between SZs. The OSSD may go to the OFF-state as unintended.

You should perform perfor m the reset operation for OSSD 3/4 in order to terminate the interlock condition. "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12)

Alert: Muting lamp failure The SZ has a problem on the muting lamp connected to the AUX 6. (Disconnection, broken, or overcurrent.)The OSSD keeps normal operation.

You should between thecheck AUX6the andwiring muting lamp, and whether the muting lamp is broken or not. You should also check the rating/specification of muting lamp.

Alert: AUX Overcurrent The SZ detects an overcurrent on the AUX output. All of AUX outputs go to the OFF-state after the SZ detects this situation. The OSSD keeps normal operation.

You should check the wiring between the AUX and the load, and whether the loads are broken or not. You should also check the current on AUX outputs. "9-2 Specifications" (page 9-3)

Alert: High-reflective background

High reflective background must not be positioned within 1.5 m from the boundary of the protection zone. You must remove the background itself or reduce the reflectance. Unless you

You should perform perfor m the cleaning according to "7-5 Cleaning the window" (page 7-9)

You should take a countermeasure according to "Light interference" (page 3-3), 3-3), "Mutual interference" (page 3-3)

"Muting lamp output" (page 2-40)

8 T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s

 o h   o  t   i   n  g

Lighting

Alert High Reflection

in green,  red, or orange*2

Alert

10

There is a high reflective background behind the specified protection zone, which has impact to the detection capability.

can take the above-mentioned countermeasures, 200 mm must be added as supplementary necessary distance to the protection zone in case of calculation of the minimum safety distance.

"High reflective background" (page 3-5)

8-7

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

8-2

Troubleshooting

Information on the Color of display display

Waiting For Bank Input

State

The number of pulses for state information

Normal

Blinking operation in red , or Error

8

1

Error1 OSSD1  

Blinking in red

Error 2

12

Blinking in red

Error 2

12

Error

8 T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s

 o h   o  t   i   n  g

Error2 OSSD2  

Error

Error3 OSSD3  

Blinking in red

12

Error

Error4 OSSD4  

Error 2

Blinking in red

Error 2

12

Error

Description

The signal combination of bank inputs does not meet the

You should check the signal combination of bank inputs. The SZ automatically goes back to the normal operation if the signal combination of

specification.

bank inputs meets the specification.

(3) EMC OSSDenvironment. 2 is inf influence luenced d by the the (4) OSSD 2 is bro broken ken..

(3) You should check the wiring and EMC environment in the surrounding. (4) You should should re replace place the SZ. SZ.

OSSD 3 Error (1) OSSD 3 is is shortshort-circu circuited ited to to the other wire , or the wiring is wrong. (2) OSSD 3 has a surge voltage voltage due to inductive load. (3) OSSD 3 is inf influence luenced d by the the EMC environment. (4) OSSD 3 is bro broken ken.. OSSD 4 Error (1) OSSD 4 is is shortshort-circu circuited ited to to the other wire , or the wiring is wrong. (2) OSSD 4 has a surge voltage voltage due to inductive load.

(1) You should check the wiring on OSSD 1.

"2-11 Bank switching function" (page 2-20) (1) You should check the wiring on OSSD 1. OSSD 1 Error "4-5 Examples of wiring" (1) OSSD 1 iis s shortshort-circu circuited ited to to the (page 4-9) other wire , or the wiring is (2) You should use the th e load with a wrong. surge absorber function, or apply (2) OSSD 1 has a surge voltage voltage the surge protection to the load. due to inductive load. (3) You should check the wiring and (3) OSSD 1 is inf influenc luenced ed by the EMC environment in the surrounding. EMC environment. ( 4) You should should re replace place the SZ. SZ. (4) OSS OSSD D 1 iiss br broke oken. n. (1) You should check the wiring on OSSD 1. OSSD 2 Error "4-5 Examples of wiring" (1) OSSD 2 is is shortshort-circu circuited ited to to the (page 4-9) other wire , or the wiring is (2) You should use the th e load with a wrong. surge absorber function, or apply (2) OSSD 2 has a surge voltage voltage the surge protection to the load. due to inductive load.

(3) EMC OSSDenvironment. 4 is inf influence luenced d by the the (4) OSSD 4 is bro broken ken..

OSSD Overcurrent Error Overcurrent occurs on any of OSSD1 to 4. Error5 OSSD Over current

Blinking in red

Error 2

Countermeasure

12 In case of NPN output type cable, the SZ with positive grounding is connected to the PC with negative grounding through the USB cable.

"4-5 Examples of wiring" (page 4-9) (2) You should use the th e load with a surge absorber function, or apply the surge protection to the load. (3) You should check the wiring and EMC environment in the surrounding.

(4) You should should re replace place the SZ. SZ. (1) You should check the wiring on OSSD 1. "4-5 Examples of wiring" (page 4-9) (2) You should use the th e load with a surge absorber function, or apply the surge protection to the load.

check in thethe wiring and (3) You EMCshould environment surrounding. (4) You should should re replace place the SZ. SZ. You should check the wiring between OSSD and the load, and whether the load is broken or not. "4-5 Examples of wiring" (page 4-9)

You should also check the rating/  specification of the load. "9-2 Specifications" (page 9-3) In case of NPN output type cable used, either the SZ or the PC should not be grounded prior to the connection through the USB cable. The brown wire and shielded wire must be be grounded in order to start normal operation.

8-8

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

8-2

Troubleshooting

Information on the Color of display display

State

The number of pulses for state information

Description

Countermeasure

(1) You should should make su sure re the wir wiring ing on EDM. EDM Error for OSSD 1/2 Error6 EDM Error (OSSD1/2)

Blinking in red

Error 2

13

"2-8 External device monitoring function (EDM)" (page 2-16),

(1) the EDM input input isdevice n not ot connecte con nected d to "4-5 Examples of wiring" external correctly. (page 4-9) (2) The external external device device connec connected ted (2) You should should ma make ke sure sure the external device. If it is broken, to the OSSD is broken. you should replace it. (3) EDM input input is no nott open-circ open-circuited. uited. (3) You should make an open-circuit on EDM input with an insulation, in case of EDM function not applied.

(1) You should should check tthe he wirin wiring g on EDM.

Error7 EDM Error (OSSD3/4)

Blinking in red

Error 2

13

EDM Error for OSSD 3/4 "2-8 External device monitoring function (EDM)" (page 2-16) (1) EDM input input is n not ot connecte connected d to "4-5 Examples of wiring" the external device correctly. (page 4-9) (2) The external external device device connec connected ted (2) You should should chec checkk the external external to the OSSD is broken. device. If it is broken, you should replace it. (3) EDM input input is no nott open-circ open-circuited. uited. (3) You should make an open-circuit on EDM input with insulation, in case of EDM function not applied.

Error8 Reset Error (OSSD1/2)

Error9 Reset Error (OSSD3/4)

Error10 Bank  

Blinking in red

Blinking in red

Blinking in red

Error 2

Error 2

Error 2

14

14

15

Error

Reset input Error for OSSD 1/2 The reset input is in the OFF-state at start-up even if the configuration of restart mode is "Automatic". Or, the reset input is in the ON-state at start-up if the configuration of restart mode is "Manual". Reset input Error for OSSD 3/4 The reset input is in the OFF-state at start-up even if the configuration of restart mode is "Automatic". Or, the reset input is in the ON-state at start-up if the configuration of restart mode is "Manual".

You should check the wiring wiri ng of reset input and the configuration on restart mode. "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12), 2-12),  "4-5 Examples of wiring" (page 4-9)

You should check the wiring wiri ng of reset input and the configuration on restart mode. "2-7 Interlock" (page 2-12), 2-12), "4-5 Examples of wiring" (page 4-9)

(1) You should should check tthe he wirin wiring g on the signal combination of bank Bank Error inputs. (1) The signal signal co combina mbination tion of of bank (2) The bank bank sw switchin itching g should should be inputs does not meet the performed during the specified specification. bank transition time. (2) The bank bank sw switchin itching g was not should ch check eck the the bank performed during the specified (3) You should sequence and the configuration bank transition time. of bank sequence monitoring. (3) The bank bank sw switchin itching g was not "2-11 Bank switching performed according to the function" (page 2-20), 2-20), "Bank specified bank sequence. sequence monitoring" (page 2-26)

Error11 Window   Error

Error 1

Blinking in red

16

Window Error Window may be polluted or damaged.

You should perform perfor m cleaning according to "7-5 Cleaning the window" (page 7-9) If you experience continuous errors after cleaning, you should replace the window. In this case, you should consult the nearest KEYENCE office.

Window may be broken.

You should replace the window. In

8 T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s  o h   o  t   i   n  g

Error 3

Error12 Check Point   Error

Blinking in red

Error 1

17

Or it may not be correctly positioned. Check Point Error The SZ detects no structure s tructure on the check points within the specified tolerance when the check input goes to the ON-state.

this case, you should consult the nearest KEYENCE office. You should check whether the SZ or the structure on the check points is displaced or not. "Check point monitoring" (page 2-44)

8-9

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

8-2

Troubleshooting

Information on the Color of display display

Error13 Muting Lamp  

Blinking in red

State

Error 1

The number of pulses for state information

18

Muting Lamp   Error

Error15 Calibration   Error

Error16 Error

Error** SYSTEM   Error

Error47 COM Monitor   Error

Countermeasure You should check the wiring between the AUX6 and muting lamp, and whether the muting lamp is broken or not. You should also make sure the rating/specification of muting lamp. "Muting lamp output" (page 2-40)

Blinking in red

Error 1

18

Muting Lamp Error (Overcurrent) Muting lamp has an overcurrent exceeding the rated current.

You should check the wiring between the AUX6 and muting lamp, and whether the muting lamp is broken or not. You should also check the rating/specification of muting lamp. "Muting lamp output" (page 2-40)

Blinking in red

Error 1

19

Calibration E Errror

You should consult the nearest KEYENCE office.

8

MI  

Muting Lamp Error (Disconnection) Muting lamp has a failure, such as disconnection or break.

Error

Error14

T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s  o h   o  t   i   n  g

Description

Blinking

Error 1

23

in red

Blinking in red

Blinking in red

Error 2 or Error 3

Error 2

20

24

MI Error (1) A structure structure with with ex extrem tremely ely low reflectance is located close to the SZ. (2) The SZ SZ doe doess not detec detectt any diffuse reflection from the object to be detected or the structure outside the protection zone. The SZ generates an error if it does not detect anything exceeding 60 degrees. System Error The number from 17 to 46 is assigned to the asterisk (**) (1) The SZ SZ is un under der E EMC MC environment. (2) The SZ has ligh lightt Interfere Interference. nce. (3) The SZ has str strong ong vib vibration ration or shock. (4) The power power is disconnect disconnected ed during configuration. (5) The SZ is brok broken. en. Communication monitoring error (only for the SZ-16D)

(1) You should should remov remove e struct structure ure with low reflectance close to the SZ. (2) You should should positio position n a structure structure outside the protection zone so that the SZ detects diffuse reflection from the structure.

(1) You should check the wiring and EMC environment in the surrounding.

(2) You should take a countermeasure to "Light interference" (page 3-3), 3-3), or "Mutual interference" (page 3-3). 3-3).

(3) You should avoid strong vibration or shock. "9-2 Specifications" (page 9-3). 9-3). (4) You should perform the configuration again. (5) You should should re replace place the SZ. SZ. Enact the command communication

It will occur only when the within the set communication monitor interval, then clear the timer timer,, communication monitor function of a or or,, stop the communication monitor part of the RS-422A communication function. function is enabled.

*1 When the main body of the SZ is not Ver Ver.2 .2 or newer, newer, it will take about 50 seconds. *2 The information display lights in green green if the OSSD is in the ON-state. It lights in red if the OSSD is in the OFF-state. For the SZ-04M, if either OSSD 1/2 or OSSD 3/4 is i s in the ON-state and the other OSSD iiss in the OFF-state, the information display lights in orange.

8-10

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

8-2

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting on the OSSD op operation eration Situation

Description

Light interference may occur. occur.

Countermeasure

You should take a countermeasure according to the description in "Light interference" (page 3-3) You can check the situation of light interference through

the SZ Configurator. Configurator. "View(V)" (page 6-43) You should take a countermeasure according to the description in "Mutual interference" (page 3-3) You should adjust the SZ installation angle and position positi on so that the SZ does not detect the floor or the surrounding (background). The SZ detect the surroundings (background). You should move it away from the specified protection zone. The background is close to the boundary "2-3 Protection zone" (page 2-6) of the specified protection zone. If the surroundings are high reflective background, you The OSSD goes to the should take into account the additional safety distance. OFF-state when " High reflective background" (page 3-5) nothing is present in You should restore the position of the SZ or the the protection zone. surroundings (background). The position of the SZ or the surroundings You should perform the configuration on the protection (background) has been changed. zone again. You should check the position positi on of the structure on the The structure on the reference points is not reference points and the tolerance. You should change present or is not located within the specified the configuration on the reference points, if necessar necessaryy. tolerance. "Reference points monitoring function" (page 2-17) You should switch the bank. Laser shutdown function is activated. "Laser Shutdown" (page 2-26) You should perform the cleaning according to The SZ has a pollution on the window. "7-5 Cleaning the window" (page 7-9) The SZ detects particles in the air, such as You should take a countermeasure that the particles in the dust, spatter or moisture. air do not go into the protection zone. Mutual interference due to another SZ may occur. The SZ may detect the floor or the surrounding (background) because the SZ is installed with some inclination.

8 T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s  o h   o  t   i   n  g

8-11

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

8-2

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting concerning USB connection

Situation

Description

USB cable is not connected to the SZ, or is disconnected. The The powe powerr iiss no not sup suppl plie ied d tto o th the SZ. SZ. Mode switch is in the "B: Configuration on SZ". The USB cannot be connected to the SZ (Yo (You u cannot log-in.)

USB driver is not installed into your computer computer..

In case of NPN output type cable, the SZ with positive grounding is connected to the PC with negative grounding through the USB cable.

8 T  r   o  u  b  l    e  s  o h   o  t   i   n  g

The specified model in the SZ Configurator mismatches the actual SZ model. You cannot transfer the configuration.

You cannot perform the monitoring on the SZ.

Al Alll conf config igur urat atio ions ns ar are e not not comp comple lete ted. d. The specified protection zone or warning zone is configured beyond the specification. The The powe powerr iiss no not sup suppl plie ied d tto o th the SZ. SZ.

The specified model in the SZ Configurator mismatches the actual SZ model.

The configuration is not completed.

Countermeasure

You should check the USB cable and USB port on your personal computer. computer. You sho shoul uld d supp supply ly th the e pow power er to the the SZ. SZ. You should change the mode switch swi tch to "A: Run / PC PC Communication". You should click the "DPInst" file USB driver is installed into your personal computer."DPInst" file is located in the folder that the SZ Configurator is installed. (C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\SZ Configurator\Driver\) In case of NPN output type cable used, either the SZ or the PC should not be grounded prior to the connection through the USB cable. The brown wire and shielded wire is necessary to be grounded in order to start normal operation. You should check the SZ model through the "Property" in the Sub panel. If the model mismatches, you should select "Chage model (M)" on "File (F)" from menu bar in order to select the correct model. When the model cannot be changed, create a new file. From "File (F)" choose "Create New File (N)". You shou should ld ch chec eckk the the co conf nfig igur urat atio ion. n. You should check the configuration on the protection zone, warning zone, and minimum detectable object size. You sho shoul uld d supp supply ly th the e pow power er to the the SZ. SZ. You should match the models between the specified one in the SZ Configurator and the actual one before starting the monitoring. You should transfer the configuration c onfiguration if you want to monitor the SZ operation according to the configuration through the SZ Configurator. Configurator. On the other hand, you should read out the configuration in the SZ if you want to monitor the SZ operation according to the current configuration in the SZ. In this case, all setting under configuration on the SZ Configurator is deleted. You should start monitoring after you transfer the configuration to the SZ.

8-12

SZ-M-NO8-E

 

9  Specifications and Dimensions

9-1

Model. Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

99-2 2

Spec Specif ific icat atio ions ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 9-3

9-3

Dimens Dimension ions s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

9-1

SZ-M-NO9-E

 

9-1

Model

SZ- 01 S

(1)

(2) (3)

< Nomenclature > (1) Basic Basic designa designatio tion: n: SZ (2) (2) Num Numbe berr of of ban banks ks OneOne-di digi gitt o orr ttwo wo-d -dig igit it nu numb mber ers. s. (3) (3) Typ ype e id iden enti tiffica ication tion S: Sim Simple ple fu func ncti tion on ttyp ype e M: Multi-function type V: Multi-bank type D: Communication type

9  S   p  e  c i   f   i    c  a  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  D i   m  e n  s i    o n  s

9-2

SZ-M-NO9-E

 

9-2  Specifications Model

SZ-01S

Minimum detectable object size Detectable angle General scan cycle Response time (ON to OFF)

Detection capability

(Scan cycle A) Specific scan cycle (Scan cycle B) General scan cycle Response time (Scan cycle A) (OFF to ON) Specific scan cycle (Scan cycle B) Minimum detectable object size: 70/150 mm Minimum detectable object size: 50 mm Maximum protection zone Minimum detectable object size: 40 mm Minimum detectable object size: 30 mm Minimum detectable object size: 70/150 mm Minimum detectable object size: 50 mm Minimum detectable object size: 40 mm Minimum detectable object size: 30 mm Additional safety distance Type, wavelength Maximum warning zone *1 (non safetyrelated)

Light source

Laser class

Power voltage Rating Power consumption Output

OSSD output

Max. load current Residual voltage (during ON) OFF-state voltage Leakage current Max. capacitive load Load wiring resistance

Input Input resistance (safety-related) Non safetyrelated output (AUX output)

Output type Max. load current

SZ-04M

SZ-16V/SZ-16D

Diameter 30, 40, 50, 70, 150 mm (depends on the setting) Reflectance 1.8 % min., Speed 1.6 m/s max. 270° (-45° to 225°) 60 ms (2 scans) to 480 ms (16 scans) 66 ms (2 scans) to 528 ms (16 scans)

Response time (ON to OFF) + 125 ms 4.2 m (-5° to 185°) 2.8 m (-45° to -5°, 185° to 225°) 3.0 m (-5° to 185°) 2.0 m (-45° to -5°, 185° to 225°) 2.4 m (-5° to 185°) 1.6 m (-45° to -5°, 185° to 225°) 1.8 m (-5° to 185°) 1.2 m (-45° to -5°, 185° to 225°) 10.0 m (-5° to185°) 7.0 m (-45° to -5°, 185° to 225°) 7.5 m (-5° to 185°) 5.0 m (-45° to -5°, 185° to 225°) 6.0 m (-5° to 185°) 4.0 m (-45° to -5°, 185° to 225°) 4.5 m (-5° to 185°) 3.0 m (-45° to -5°, 185° to 225°) 100 mm*2 Infrared laser diode, 905 nm Class 1 IEC / EN 60825-1 Class 1 CFR 21 1040.10, 1040.11 (Laser Notice No.50) Class 1 JIS C6802 24 V DC ±10 % (Ripple P-P 10 % or less): When using a converter power supply 24 V DC +20 %/-30 %: When using a battery Max. 9.5 W (without Max. 9.5 W (without Max. 10.5 W (without load) load) load) Max. 39 W (with load) Max. 50W (with load) Max. 43 W (with load) PNP or NPN (Selectable according to the connector cable) 2 outputs 4 outputs 2 outputs *3 500 mA Max. 2.5 V (with a cable length of 5 m) Max. 2.0 V (with a cable length of 5 m) Max. 1 mA*4 2.2 μF (with a load resistance of 100 Ω) Max. 2.5 Ω*5 4.4 kΩ (for Input 1, 3, 4.4 kΩ (for Input 1 and 4, and 5) 4.4 kΩ (for Input 1) 3 to 10) 2.2 kΩ (for Input 2 2.2 kΩ (for Input 2) 2.2 kΩ (for Input 2) and 6) PNP / NPN totem-pole output 2 outputs 6 outputs 4 outputs 50 mA

9  S   e  p  c i   f   i    c  a  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  D i   m  e n  s i    o n  s

Residual voltage (during ON)

Muting lamp output

Max. 2.5 V (with a cable length of 5 m) Can be connected to the incandescent lamp (24 V DC, 1 to 5.5 W) and LED lamp (load current 10 to 230 mA)

(AUX6 output can be assigned for the muting lamp output)

9-3

SZ-M-NO9-E

 

9-2

Specifications

Model

SZ-01S

SZ-04M

SZ-16V/SZ-16D

Communication method

Full duplex

Synchronization method

Start-stop 9600/19200/38400/  57600/125k/250k bps

Baud rate Date bit length RS-422A Communication Parity check (SZ-16D only)

8 bit None

Stop bit length

1 bit 4 units (multi-drop link)

Maximum number of connectable units Transmission distance

Max. 30 m

Data transfer direction Enclosure protection Operating ambient temperature

-10 to +50 °C (No freezing) -25 to +60 °C (No freezing)

Storage relative humidity

 e  p  c i   f   i    c  a  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  D i   m  e n  s i    o n  s

100 m/s2 (Approx. 10 G) 16 ms pulse, in X, Y, Z directions 1,000 times each axis

Main unit case Material Cable length

Approved standards

Aluminum die casting, SPHC (Bottom)

Window

EMC

35 % to 95 % RH 10 to 55 Hz, 0.7 mm compound amplitude, 20 sweeps each in X, Y, and Z directions

Shock

 S 

35% to 85 %RH (No condensation) incandescent lamp: 1500 lx or less*7

Surrounding light Vibration

9

IP65 (IEC60529)*

Storage ambient temperature Operating relative humidity Environmental resistance

LSB 6

Polycarbonate 30 m or less*8 EMS EMI

IEC61496-1, EN61496-1, UL 61496-1 EN55011 Class A, FCC Part15B Class A IEC61496-1, EN61496-1, UL 61496-1 (Type 3 ESPE) IEC61496-3, EN61496-3 (Type 3 AOPDDR)

Safety

IEC61508, EN61508, IEC62061, EN62061 (SIL2) EN ISO13849-1:2015 (PL d, Category 3) UL508, UL1998

*1 20 % or more more reflectance reflectance is necessary for the minimum detectable detectable object in the warning zone. *2 If there is a high reflective reflective background wit within hin 1.5 m from the boundary boundary of the protection zone, 200 mm must be added as supplementary necessary distance to the protection zone in case of calculation of the minimum safety distance. *3 For the load current current calculation calculation of the OSSD output and the the AUX output, make sure it is 1.5 A o orr less when using converter power supply (or 1.0 A or less when the cable length is 25 m or more), and 1.0A or less when using a battery (or 0.5 A or less when the cable length is 5 m or more). *4 This also takes into account the situations when power is either either off or disconnected. *5 The wiring resistance resistance between the OSSD output and the con connected nected equipment (excluding the resistance of the cable) m must ust be 2.5  or less to ensure operation. However However,, it must be 1.0  or less if the load current is 300 mA or more, *6 When the setting setting cover is open, or the connector cable is not connected, the IP65 certification cannot be met. In addition, the SZ-16D doesn't fulfill the requirements of IP65 degree of protection with the connector cable for the RS-422A communication unattached. *7 The SZ should should not be installed installed so as to have light light interferenc interference e withi within n ±5° to the detection plane. *8 It must be 10 m or or less if the po power wer is supplied supplied by th the e battery, battery,

SZ-M-NO9-E

9-4

 

9-3  Dimensions SZ main unit

 

SZ-01S/SZ-04M/SZ-16V 40.2

22

10

45

56 59

Protection zone origin 270

100

Detectable angle

 60  15

104 64.5

30

4 x M5 x 0.8 Depth: 9

Protection plane 110

149 151.2 100.8 60 29.2 91 100

104

12

9

24

(Unit: mm)

9  S   e  p  c i   f   i    c  a  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  D i   m  e n  s i    o n  s

9-5

SZ-M-NO9-E

 

9-3

Dimensions

 

SZ-16D 48.4 10

18.9

56 59

45°

16.2

Protection zone origin

32.5 270°

Detectable angle 100

104

(17.4)

64.5

(6.9)

(28.6)

30

4 x M5 x 0.8 Depth: 9

149

9  S   p  e  c i   f   i    c  a  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  D i   m  e n  s i    o n  s

166.4

Protection plane

155.9

110

100.8 60 29.2 91 100

When Wh en M1 M12 2 co conn nnec ecto torr is conn connec ecte ted d 45°

104

12

9

24

M1 M12 2 co conn nnec ecto torr sect sectio ion n R3

32

ø14

32 ø12 ø7.1

(42.4)

(191.4)

(Unit: mm)

9-6

SZ-M-NO9-E

 

9-3

Dimensions

When using the mounting bracket  

Horizontal mounting bracket (Model: OP-86935) 14 73

270° 144

4-ø6.3

120 25

9 110 135 36

25 (Unit : mm)

 

Vertical mounting bracket (Model: OP-86936) 14 73

270 2-ø6.3

170 19 190 0

 S   e  p  c i   f   i    c  a  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  D i   m  e n  s i    o n  s

66 (Unit : mm)

9-7

SZ-M-NO9-E

 

9-3

Dimensions

 

Horizontal mounting bracket with angle alignment (Model: OP-86937) 19 78

270 174 150 15

9  S   p  e  c i   f   i    c  a  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  D i   m  e n  s i    o n  s

120 80

ø6.3

14

14

26 15 (Unit : mm)

 

Vertical mounting bracket with angle alignment (Model: OP-86938) 19 78

270 134 60

ø6.3

15

14

170 194.6

14

71.3 (Unit : mm)

15

9-8

SZ-M-NO9-E

 

9-3

 

Dimensions

L-shaped mounting bracket with angle alignment (Model: OP-86939) 160

4-ø6.3

140 19 84

78

60

4

270

15

9 161.2

14

70 (Unit : mm)

 S   e  p  c i   f   i    c  a  t   i    o n  s  a n  d  D i   m  e n  s i    o n  s

9-9

SZ-M-NO9-E

 

Revision History Date of creation

Version

Februar y 2009

Official release

April 2009

2nd

December 2009 De Dece cemb mber er 201 2010 0

3rd Re Revi vise sed d fir first st edi editi tion on

October 2012

2nd

July 2016

3nd

March 2017

4th

Revision contents

Content added Mo Mode dell add addit itio ion, n, co cont nten ents ts add addit itio ion n Contents revised

Document Control No.862AE002-07 No.862AE002-07

 

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be fr free ee of defects in materials and workmanship ffor or a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted. (2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use o off its various Products. Products. They are only suggestions, and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products. (3) The Products and any samples ("Products/S ("Products/Samples") amples") supplied to Buye Buyerr are not to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-saf fail-safe e systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way way,, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility,, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or responsibility damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples. (4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply apply..

BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS: If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1101-3